> **Parent Spec:** [llms.txt](/llms.txt)
> **Verification:** [Master Authority Ledger](/llms-authority-ledger.txt)
> **Deep Storage:** [Historical Archive](/llms-archive.txt)
> **Relationship:** Supplemental Authority Data (E-E-A-T)

# Samuel & Audrey Media Network
> Samuuel Jeffery and Audrey Bergner 

## Che Argentina Travel
> Expert Local Travel Guides & Itineraries For All 23 Provinces (Audrey Bergner)

## Picture Perfect Portfolios
> Quantitative Investment Strategies & Expanded Canvas Portfolio Asset Allocation (Samuel Jeffery)

## THAT BACKPACKER
> Narrative Travel, Culture & Expert Guides (Audrey Bergner)

## Nomadic Samuel Travel Blog
> Global Logistics, Immersive Travel Guides, Photography & Media Strategy (Samuel Jeffery)

> Contact: bergner.audrey@gmail.com
> Contact: nomadicsamuel@gmail.com

#### Meet Audrey Bergner: Founder, Local & Argentina Travel Specialist
El Bolsón is one of my favourite places in Argentina. We've made friendships with locals that will last a lifetime and we revisit as often as we can. 

About Me

I'm Audrey Bergner and I'm the Founder and Head Travel Writer at Che Argentina Travel. I'm a Canadian-born Argentine-Peruvian travel writer.

Argentina has been part of my story since childhood. I grew up here, spending my early years in the Sierras de Córdoba climbing trees, picking blackberries, and swimming in creeks.

As a young adult, I backpacked across the length of the country multiple times travelling by long-distance buses, veering off the beaten path, and learning how Argentina truly works for independent travellers.

This experience taught me to navigate the complex economic reality of Argentina—from mastering the 'Blue Dollar' exchange rates to understanding local inflation strategies. My advice isn't just about where to go; it's about how to make your budget work in a country with a uniquely challenging financial landscape.

Now, I explore Argentina differently, travelling with my husband, Samuel, and our daughter, Aurelia. Our trips often revolve around estancia stays in the countryside, hiking in national parks, exploring small towns and seeking out great food and good wine. 

Navigating the dust and complex logistics of restoring our three-generation family property in the Sierras de Córdoba. (The "Alfajores & Medialunas" shirt is a non-negotiable uniform for Argentine site visits.)

When I'm not travelling, I am working on renovating a property in Argentina with a hotel that has been in the family for three generations.

This restoration is more than a passion project; it is a deep dive into the Argentine hospitality industry. By managing a historic property, I navigate the same local bureaucracy, logistics, and supply chains that I write about, ensuring my travel advice is grounded in the true grit and reality of daily life here.

Our family currently splits time between the Sierras of Cordoba in Argentina and the Rocky Mountains in Canada, where mountain life feels surprisingly familiar to Patagonia.

Welcome. My approach to travel is shaped by my Argentine-Peruvian heritage and a deep desire to connect you with the authentic soul of the country—far beyond the standard tourist trail. (Embracing tradition in San Antonio de Areco.)

Why Che Argentina Travel?

I created Che Argentina Travel to help you, fellow traveller, plan your dream trip to Argentina! I am passionate about travel in Argentina and want to help you discover every corner of this wonderfully diverse country. 

Whether it's your first time here or you're back for more, I hope to help you uncover new destinations and experiences. The goal is to help you experience Argentina beyond the surface with honest guidance built from years of personal exploration.

This site is here to help you plan realistic itineraries, understand logistics before you arrive, discover places beyond the obvious highlights, travel confidently and responsibly, and fall in love with Argentina the way I have.

Che Argentina Travel covers all regions in Argentina: Buenos Aires, Córdoba, Litoral, Cuyo, Northwest, and Patagonia. I am currently undertaking Project 23: a mission to document every single province in Argentina and explore every national park. That means new destinations are constantly being added to this website.

Project 23 is far more than a checklist; it’s a personal mission to explore every corner of this country I call home. My goal is to take you beyond the typical places and shine a light on the hidden magic found in all 23 provinces, creating a resource that celebrates the entirety of Argentina.

Every guide on Che Argentina Travel is built from real experience. I visit destinations personally before writing about them. I test accommodations, transport routes, restaurants, tours, and hikes whenever possible. I verify information with official providers when firsthand testing isn’t possible. I update content as conditions change. And I clearly distinguish between personal experience and researched information.

As for the name, 'che' is an Argentine expression that makes its way into almost every conversation. It could be used to grab someone's attention, to emphasize something, or even as a filler.

From the emerging wine regions of Patagonia to global destinations, our work spans across the entire Samuel & Audrey Media Network. This shot captures a moment of blissful wine tourism research in Trevelin, Chubut.

Where else can you find us?

Before I started writing about Argentina, I spent over a decade backpacking the globe and visited 75+ countries. That adventure is chronicled on That Backpacker.

If you enjoy travel and spend any time on YouTube, it's likely you've watched one of the thousands of videos Samuel and I have filmed over the years. We run two channels: Samuel and Audrey (English) and Samuel y Audrey (Spanish), where we publish practical travel guides and share travel advice after more than a decade on the road.

As for Samuel, you can find him writing about our travels on Nomadic Samuel and disrupting the investing world with his unique ideas at Picture Perfect Portfolios. 

Participating in local traditions is a core part of my research. Whether it’s trying my hand at fly fishing at Estancia Tecka or navigating remote Patagonian trails, I personally test the experiences I recommend to ensure your logistics are seamless.

Local Argentina Features

Over time we've received distinguished local press and media coverage for our travels across Argentina and hotel project in Cordoba:

Vía País: Los youtubers Samuel y Audrey llegaron a Córdoba para renovar una casa de la familia de ella

ADNSUR: Dos YouTubers canadienses visitaron Comodoro: qué impresión se llevaron

Diario Necochea: Volvió a Necochea tras 55 años y recordó su infancia: ¿qué cambios vio en la ciudad?

Cholila Online: Los Youtubers canadienses ahora visitaron Rada Tilly: quedaron maravillados con su playa y “las mansiones”

Memo: El análisis de los precios del vino de un argentino instalado en Canadá

Diario UNO: Pocos viajeros por Semana Santa con destinos nacionales

ADNSUR: Después de recorrer Comodoro, los YouTubers canadienses visitaron Rada Tilly

El Comodorense: Dos reconocidos Youtubers canadienses visitaron Comodoro: qué opinan de la comida, clima, precios y museos

Ecos Diarios: Volvió a Necochea después de 55 años y lo abordaron los recuerdos de una vida de migración y lucha

On the road: Taking a moment to soak in the surroundings along Patagonia's famous 'Ruta de los Siete Lagos.' This drive is essential for any Argentine itinerary.

Global Travel Footprint

Our travel campaigns have been recognized as a 2x World Travel Awards Winner and we've also been featured in National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com and JR Pass. Over 15+ years we've generated over 250 million views and 800,000 subscribers across all platforms. We've attended prestigious travel events such as the White House Travel Blogger Summit, the Social Travel Summit and Traverse Events as thought leaders and panelists. Additionally, we've strategically partnered with major bands such as Lenovo, Google, TripAdvisor, Expedia and Viator and had the pleasure of working on multiple campaigns with Visit Britain, the German National Tourism Board and Tourism Nova Scotia.

#### Samuel Jeffery | Investment Strategist & Portfolio Architect | Picture Perfect Portfolios
Definition: Picture-Perfect (adjective: NORTH AMERICAN)Meaning: lacking in defects or flaws; ideal."a picture-perfect summer day" or "a picture-perfect portfolio"

Defining the Ideal: This vintage illustration captures the essence of our mission. Just as one imagines a flawless summer day, we utilize rigorous research and data to construct "Picture-Perfect Portfolios"—investment strategies designed to be robust, efficient, and ideally aligned with your financial goals.

Welcome to Picture Perfect Portfolios.

I am Samuel Jeffery, an investment strategist, media publisher, and quantitative researcher. While I spent over 15 years building the Samuel & Audrey Media Network into a global authority, my focus today is the systematic engineering of asset allocation and expanded canvas portfolio design.

This site is the dedicated home for sophisticated DIY investors who have moved beyond standard "60/40" advice. It is for those who demand structural alpha, capital efficiency, and true diversification supported by institutional-grade rigor.

A Global Perspective: Before founding Picture Perfect Portfolios, my years traveling as "Nomadic Samuel" (pictured here in the German Alps) shaped my investment worldview. Understanding different cultures and economies firsthand is crucial to developing truly diversified, global macro strategies.

From Global Nomad to Quantitative Strategist

For over a decade, I operated as a digital nomad, managing some of the world's most successful travel media properties. When the global shifts of 2020 paused the travel industry, I applied the same obsessive rigor that built my media business to the world of quantitative finance. I treated white papers like maps and historical drawdowns like terrain.

What started as personal research evolved into Picture Perfect Portfolios. Today, I bridge the gap between "institutional" strategies—like Risk Parity and Managed Futures—and the modern brokerage account. My research on systematic investing and asset allocation has been featured on premier platforms including Nasdaq and Investing.com.

My brain is now a competitive landscape of concepts like Factor Investing, Return Stacking, and Trend Following.

Why I invest like a paranoid prepper (The Origin Story)

Most investment philosophies are born in an MBA classroom or a high-rise in Manhattan. Mine was born in a logging town that evaporated overnight and a country where prices change while you’re standing in line to pay for them.

Lesson 1: Gold River & The "All-In" Trap

I grew up in Gold River, British Columbia. In the 80s, it was a booming small-town built on pulp and paper. We had it all. And then, in the late 90s, the mill shut down. Boom. Gone. The town didn't just enter a recession; it practically turned into a ghost town overnight.

I learned about "Single Asset Concentration Risk" watching my hometown’s economy flatline because it was more or less 100% dependent on one commodity industry. While other kids were learning to ride bikes, I was subconsciously learning that "putting all your eggs in one basket is a really stupid idea."

That is why I don't trust the standard "100% Stocks" advice. I've seen what happens when the one thing you rely on stops working. It ain't pretty.

Lesson 2: Argentina & The Illusion of Cash

Fast forward to today. I split my time living in Argentina, a beautiful country with an economy that has absolutely zero chill. Living here has taught me that inflation isn't a theory; it's a lifestyle. I have watched prices triple in a month. Restaurants have price stickers on their menu. I have seen the purchasing power of cash dissolve faster than dulce de leche helado on a sidewalk in Buenos Aires.

So, when I talk about Managed Futures, Gold, and Trend Following, I’m not trying to sound fancy or impress the "FinTwit" crowd.

I talk about them because I am a financial survivalist at heart. I build portfolios that can survive a Gold River-style bust and an Argentina-style inflation spike. I want a portfolio that makes money when the world is normal, but keeps me safe when things go sideways.

This retro-styled infographic outlines the six key areas driving portfolio construction at Picture Perfect Portfolios: Equity Optimization, True Diversification, Capital Efficiency through Expanding the Canvas, Contrarian thinking, comprehensive Alternative Investments, and Defensive Asset Allocation.

Current Areas of Research

Currently, I am focused on six key pillars of portfolio construction:

1) Equity Optimization Moving beyond market-cap weighting to utilize factors like Value, Momentum, Min Vol and Quality that historically outperform the S&P 500 over long time horizons.

2) True Diversification Building portfolios that are maximally diversified across asset classes (Stocks, Bonds, Commodities, Systematic Alts, Uncorrelated Alternatives) and geographies.

3) Capital Efficiency (Leverage) Exploring how expanding the canvas (modest leverage) can improve Sharpe Ratios by allowing us to return stack uncorrelated assets on top of each other, rather than choosing one over the other.

4) Contrarianism Skating to where the puck is going. If a portfolio looks exactly like the herd (60/40), it will yield herd-like results. We aim for better.

5) Alternative Investments Incorporating Managed Futures, Long-Short strategies, Merger-Arbitrage, Style Premia, Gold, Crypto, M/N, Anti-beta, OTM Puts and Real Assets to create an "All Weather" defense.

6) Defensive Asset Allocation: Prioritizing the optimization of Sharpe, Sortino, and MAR ratios to manage drawdowns as aggressively as we pursue growth.

Our proprietary decision tree for evaluating investment strategies. We prioritize Capital Efficiency (expanding the canvas) as the foundation, followed by Maximum Diversification (incorporating uncorrelated alternatives), and finally Strategy Optimization (applying factor tilts like value and momentum).

The Strategy: The 1-2-3 Allocation Framework

While many investors begin their journey by picking individual stocks or sectors, I believe in a more rigorous, top-down + bottom-up hierarchy. At Picture Perfect Portfolios, I utilize a specific "Decision Tree" to evaluate every fund and strategy that enters the conversation.

The Hierarchy of Priorities

Capital Efficiency (The Foundation): We first ask, "Is the fund expanding our canvas?" We prioritize strategies that provide stacked exposure, allowing us to hold more uncorrelated assets than a traditional 100% equity or bond fund would permit.

Maximum Diversification (The Shield): Once efficiency is established, we look for strategy-level diversification. We prioritize portfolios that blend uncorrelated return streams—such as Trend Following and Real Assets—over those concentrated in a single asset class.

Optimization (The Edge): Only after the portfolio is efficient and truly diversified do we apply research-supported tilts, such as Value or Momentum, to enhance long-term performance.

Applying the Framework: GDE vs. AVGV

This framework allows us to make objective decisions in complex "Apples to Oranges" scenarios. For example, comparing a global value fund (AVGV) with an equity-plus-gold fund (GDE):

AVGV scores high on Diversification (Global) and Optimization (Value factor).

GDE scores lower on those specific metrics but is superior in Capital Efficiency ($90/90$ exposure).

Because Capital Efficiency is our #1 priority, the framework favors GDE. It provides an "Expanded Canvas" that a standard long-only equity fund cannot match. Our ultimate goal is the "Sayonara Fund"—a hypothetical vehicle that combines the optimization of AVGV with the efficiency of GDE. This does not exist yet. We're still dipping our toes in beta + something else from an ETF/mutual fund standpoint. 

The Art of the Expanded Canvas: Visualizing the core methodology of Picture Perfect Portfolios. By applying capital efficiency, we expand the investment "canvas" beyond traditional stocks and bonds to include a robust set of uncorrelated alternative investments.

Pioneering the "Unicorn" Research Space

I founded Picture Perfect Portfolios to fill a void in the retail investment landscape. At the time, the site was a "unicorn"—the only destination providing institutional-level deep dives (with travel narrative grade writing and creativity) into sophisticated, capital-efficient funds like BLNDX and UPAR and alternatives such as BOXX and CAOS for DIY investors.

This rigorous research led to the creation of the term "Expanded Canvas Portfolios." This concept describes the shift from limited 2D asset allocation to 3D capital efficiency and has since become a recognized framework within the finance community.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wEwePvQbU_U

Institutional & Peer Recognition

Beyond the retail landscape, my research has gained some serious traction within the institutional investment community. I’ve had the pleasure of seeing my portfolio ideas discussed on the Excess Returns Podcast and recognized as a recommended resource by Moontower (Kris Abdelmessih).

My work is frequently cited or featured by the real "smart folks" in the systematic and quantitative space, including Mount Lucas, Alpha Architect, Convexity Maven, Accelerate and Standpoint Funds (Eric Crittenden).

Getting the nod from these institutional heavyweights is basically a "clinical" gold star for my data-driven obsession—proof that these strategies have some serious teeth, even if they were born in a carry-on suitcase.

The Operator in Practice: I am not just an investment theorist; I am an active operator. This infographic maps out my diversified portfolio of real-world assets, ranging from our global media properties like Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker to physical real estate projects like Che Argentina and our current hotel renovation in Córdoba.

The Operator: Real World Asset Management

Along with my wife, Audrey Bergner, I have spent the last 15 years building the Samuel & Audrey Media Network into a global travel publishing powerhouse. Together, we have reached over 250 million viewers across our English and Spanish YouTube channels and collaborated on award-winning strategic campaigns for industry giants like Google, Visit Britain, and Lenovo.

Nomadic Samuel & That Backpacker: Our flagship travel media properties where we've partnered with major global brands and participated in award winning campaigns.

Samuel and Audrey (YouTube) & Samuel and Audrey (Facebook): Our primary broadcast channels documenting our travel, lifestyle, and business projects to a global audience.

Samuel y Audrey (YouTube): Our Spanish-language channel documenting our life in Argentina/Canada, real estate projects and travel abroad.

Che Argentina: Our flagship boutique travel and real estate project focused on high-end Patagonia and Estancia travel experiences, authored by my wife Audrey—a Peruvian-Argentine native who is currently leading our hotel renovation project in Córdoba.

As a member of the elite professional organization iAmbassador, our joint work has been recognized by National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com and the Huffington Post. Our shared journey has seen us invited as thought leaders and panelists to the White House, The Social Travel Summit, and Traverse, ultimately earning 2X World Travel Awards for "Europe’s Leading Marketing Campaign". Our portfolio of strategic partnerships reads like a Who's Who of the travel industry. We have collaborated on high-impact campaigns with global tech leaders (Google, Lenovo), major OTAs (Expedia, TripAdvisor, Viator), and premier destination management organizations, including Visit Britain, the German National Tourism Board, and Tourism Nova Scotia. You can view our 15+ verified history over at our Authority Ledger, Picture Perfect Portfolios Financial Ledger & Grokipedia citations.

Today, I bring the same level of professional rigor and systematic strategy that built our media empire to the world of quantitative finance. At Picture Perfect Portfolios, I provide data-driven insights and sophisticated asset allocation models for investors who demand the same excellence we've delivered for over a decade in the global media landscape.

#### About Audrey Bergner: Founder of That Backpacker
I’m Audrey, the Founder and Travel Writer behind That Backpacker. Over the past 15 years, I’ve travelled through 75+ countries, chasing the kind of trips that revolve around great food, unique stays, and one-of-a-kind experiences worth seeking out. If you want destination guides that are warm, realistic, and actually useful (with a side of culinary curiosity), you’re in the right place.

Chasing unique experiences for 15+ years: Exploring the remote magic of Rapa Nui (Easter Island).

The "By the Numbers" Counter

15+ Years of professional publishing and travel writing

75+ Countries visited and many multiple times

800k+ Subscribers across our YouTube channels

250 Million+ Views across our media network

2 Home Bases between the Sierras of Córdoba in Argentina and the Rocky Mountains of Alberta, Canada.

1 Boutique Hotel currently under restoration in Argentina.

Audrey boarding the historic 1922 steam-powered La Trochita in Esquel. Navigating the logistics of the Old Patagonian Express is a highlight for any traveler exploring the rugged interiors of Chubut province.

What you’ll find on That Backpacker

This site is built for travellers who want their adventures to feel exciting, doable, and well-planned.

Here you’ll find:

Practical destination guides with the logistics people always forget to mention

Itineraries that help you plan your days without planning your personality out of the trip

Budget tips (and “worth it” splurges) so you can spend where it matters to you

Travel know-how on transportation, accommodation, timing, mistakes to avoid, and what I’d do differently next time

The kind of advice you’d want from a friend who’s already figured it out the hard way

If you’re the type who likes to know what to pack, how to get there, what it costs, and whether something is actually worth your time…you’re in the right place.

Finding a moment of stillness at Estancia Arroyo Verde. Staying at an authentic Argentine estancia offers more than luxury; it provides a direct connection to the pioneer history and landscape of the Traful River region.

Where else can you find me?

I run Che Argentina Travel, where you can expect a deep dive into all things related to travel in Argentina. I cover things like estancia stays, boutique hotels and Patagonian adventures. I grew up in Argentina, have travelled the length of the country multiple times as an adult, and I also call the Sierras of Cordoba home for half the year. That means I'm able to bring you an insider perspective and share real-life advice that has been tried and tested.

You might also see me make an appearance on Nomadic Samuel, where my husband covers our adventures around the globe, travelling with our daughter. And when he's not writing about travel, Samuel runs Picture Perfect Portfolios, an investing site focused on systematic asset allocation and capital efficiency.

Together, we run multiple YouTube channels, including Samuel and Audrey (English) & Samuel y Audrey (Spanish), where we've been documenting our travels and sharing practical advice for well over a decade. Meanwhile, on Building a Life in Argentina, we are chronicling the renovation of a mountain hotel, rural living and sharing our insights about everyday life in Argentina.

Our travel work has earned us global recognition, including being named a two-time World Travel Awards winner. We've been featured in National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com, JR Pass, Vía País, Cholila Online and the Huffington Post. Over the past 15+ years, we’ve reached more than 250 million views and grown a community of 800,000+ subscribers across our platforms. 

We’ve also been invited to speak and share insights at leading industry events like the White House Travel Blogger Summit, the Social Travel Summit, and Traverse, participating as panelists and thought leaders. Along the way, we’ve collaborated with major brands such as Lenovo, Google, TripAdvisor, and Viator, and partnered on multiple destination campaigns with professional organizations like Visit Britain, the German National Tourism Board, and Tourism Nova Scotia.

#### About Samuel Jeffery: Global Media Founder & Travel Strategist
Howdy ya'll, I’m Samuel Jeffery!

I’m from the small village of Gold River on Vancouver Island, British Columbia — the kind of place where “big city” means you found a second grocery store and an actual stoplight. From those humble origins, I’ve somehow ended up exploring 75+ countries with my wife, Audrey Bergner, building a life that’s equal parts travel, storytelling, renovations and “how did this become our normal?”

Fernie, British Columbia at Island Lake Lodge, where Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner enjoy a memorable family hiking day, smiling on a scenic lakeside trail while carrying baby Aurelia in a backpack carrier, surrounded by towering evergreens and calm mountain waters.

Nomadic Samuel started as a scrappy travel diary (before travel blogging was a profession) and grew into a full-blown travel publishing universe — with blogs, videos, niche side projects, and (because we like the pain game) a massive renovation project in Argentina. 

https://youtu.be/FhRUiS7Q_nM

And somewhere along the way, the vibe stayed consistent:

We go far. We go deep. We go remote. We eat way too much. We hike it off. Repeat.

Trevelin, Patagonia, Argentina at a cozy countryside restaurant, where Nomadic Samuel enjoys the good life with a glass of wine and a hearty bowl of pasta, savoring local food, relaxed mountain views, and slow-travel vibes in Chubut.

At a glance

TopicThe quick versionFromGold River, Vancouver Island, BC 🇨🇦 Travel experience75+ countries (and still hungry for more) Nomadic Samuel What we makeTravel guides, city guides, food guides, hiking guides, and travel videosOur vibePractical + personal + occasionally unhinged (in a helpful way)Where we baseSouth Alberta + Sierras de Córdoba — half the year each (Canada: May - October & Argentina: November - April)Current “plot twist”Fixing up a neglected family property in Argentina with a hotel + houses & traveling around Canada, Argentina & Japan as much as possible with our daughter AureliaSmall obsessionCollecting/hoarding quirky hats instead of typical “stuff”

Southeast Asia in the halcyon backpacking era, where a young Nomadic Samuel sits on ancient temple steps with his backpack, embracing pre-smartphone travel, dusty adventures, and the early days that inspired Nomadic Samuel’s journey.

The Internet Café Era

Before blogging was a “thing,” I was already a backpacker — and I mean the pre-smartphone, pre-influencer, pre-everyone-has-a-drone era mid to late 2000s era. I did massive shoestring trips across Southeast Asia and South America, popping into internet cafés once a week to email my family the classic update: “Still alive. Barely. Love you. Funds runnin' low. Headin' home soon.”

I loved the dusty-trail approach: show up in a destination, find accommodation boots on the ground, haggle, get lost, get found, repeat. Adventures, misadventures, and the occasional “this seemed like a really good idea merely 20 minutes ago” types of decisions. For me, that was the golden era of backpacking. 

Also, if you’ve never written down hostel directions on a crumpled receipt and then trusted your entire evening to that receipt… you've missed an important life experience.

George Town, Penang, Malaysia — Nomadic Samuel standing with a fully loaded backpack in a humble guesthouse room, the moment where a love for long-term travel sparked the creation of NomadicSamuel.com and a life of global adventures began.

The birth of Nomadic Samuel: Penang, sweat, and questionable life choices

Nomadic Samuel officially began in an attic guesthouse in Georgetown, Penang, Malaysia.

Picture it:

No windows

No A/C

A “death fan” doing its best

Me sweating profusely

And breaking my site multiple times over because I had absolutely no freakin' idea what I was doing

This site (and honestly, most of our projects) almost didn’t even make it off the ground. It took perseverance, learning things the hard way, and the occasional cold shower reset to keep things in motion.

And yes, Penang will always have a special place in my heart because it wasn’t just “where the site started.” It was where I learned the foundational travel-creator skill:

Try something. Break it. Fix it. Do it again, but slightly less disastrously.

(Also, Penang food is powerful enough to influence major life decisions. More on that later.)

South Korea during our English-teaching era, where a young Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner take a playful selfie beneath bright hanging lanterns, marking the very beginning of our travel and storytelling journey together.

South Korea: teaching English and accidentally meeting my future wife (AKA travel partner in crime)

I taught English in South Korea for several years, and that’s where I met Audrey.

And yes, our origin story is peak early-travel-blog internet at its finest:

It started as an innocent link exchange between Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker… and then it spiralled into a relationship, marriage, and a shared life built almost exclusively around travel. Audrey was also teaching English in Korea at the time.

We basically got engaged by SEO.

And if you’re wondering what our first “date-night” conversations sounded like… imagine two people who genuinely thought “this permalink structure is terrible” counts as flirting. Nah. Actually, we wandered all over Itaewon chowing down on Indian buffet and trying to find a used bookstore that had switched locations. 

Noboribetsu, Hokkaido, Japan, where Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner immerse themselves in Japanese culture by wearing traditional yukata robes inside a cozy ryokan room, smiling during an onsen stay that deepened our love for slow travel in northern Japan.

Our travel style: from “hit every city” to going deeper

When we first hit the road together, we were big-time budget backpackers galavanting across Southeast Asia, Europe, and South America like there was no tomorrow. Big cities. Fast pace. Constant movement. Wake-up and have no freakin' clue where you are. Yep. We did that. And not for a short time. Years on end in the 2010s. What an experience it was.

Over the years, our travel style has definitely evolved and it got better.

Now we go slower and more intentional:

We love small towns and quirky off-the-beaten-path destinations

We go deeper instead of wider

We’ll spend months in one country rather than hopping around like caffeinated fiends with no plan

If you’re the kind of traveler who cares about the fabric of a place, not just the highlight reel, you’ll feel at home here.

Berchtesgaden, Bavaria in the German Alps, where Nomadic Samuel concentrates behind the camera filming travel footage on a rainy, moody day, showing the real behind-the-scenes work that goes into creating Samuel and Audrey travel videos.

Our “small places deserve big love” philosophy

Here’s a real example of how our brains work now:

We’re just as likely to be family trail hiking bums in a frontier BC border town like Fernie as we are to be zigzaggin' and zippin' around Vancouver. And in Patagonia? A remote, off-the-beaten-path Welsh town like Trevelin turns our crank more than tango shows and fancy steakhouses in Buenos Aires. That's the honest truth.

We go far, deep, and often remote because… we’re both from teeny tiny places ourselves. Gold River. Villa Berna. Those are our respective roots.

We truly believe tiny places deserve a spot on the map, a proper guide, and a spotlight that isn’t just “drive through quickly on your way to the more 'famous thing.'”

https://youtu.be/ROfGJxOKYbE

What you’ll find on NomadicSamuel.com

Nomadic Samuel is built for travelers who want trips that feel real and are easier to plan.

Expect:

Practical travel guides (logistics, timing, costs, what’s actually worth it)

City guides that help you get oriented fast

Detailed multi-day itineraries (with built in flexibility: hardcore hikers, foodies, family-focused, culture vultures...we've got ya covered)

Food guides for people who literally plan their day around meals (we don't just see you...we are just like you)

Hiking guides that don’t pretend weather is a minor detail

Itineraries that are ambitious but not delusional (where flexibility + downtime is a crucial component)

Banff, Alberta in the Canadian Rockies, where Nomadic Samuel embraces his inner mountain man wearing a cowboy hat at a dramatic alpine viewpoint, celebrating rugged landscapes, fresh air, and his love for mountain adventures over beach travel.

A few things we unapologetically lean in to

Mountains over beaches (we like the drama of peaks and weather systems with personality

Being outdoors (hiking, viewpoints, lakes, forests)

Soft adventures like kayaking and canoeing rather than dangling off a rope with our life on the line

Food that makes you go quiet for a second because your brain is malfunctioning by processing just how good it is

If you want…Start hereDeep destination planningOur long-form travel guides + itinerariesFood-first travelOur restaurant and café guides“Earn dinner” energyOur hiking and outdoors guidesSee it in motionOur travel videos (English: Samuel & Audrey + Spanish: Samuel y Audrey) 

Lake Titicaca, Peru, where Nomadic Samuel films travel footage on a boat while Audrey Bergner records behind him, showing the real behind-the-scenes teamwork that goes into creating videos for the Samuel and Audrey YouTube channel.

YouTube: where we learned to stop being awkward on camera (nah, actually we still are)

We’ve built a massive audience across platforms, and YouTube became a major part of our story.

We’re approaching one million combined subscribers + over 250 million views across our English and Spanish channels (Samuel and Audrey + Samuel y Audrey).

And when we first started filming? Awkward AF. We barely knew how to turn on the camera, felt super shy speaking in public, and our early gear had the stabilization and audio quality of a wiggly-wobbly shopping cart on gravel.

But we stuck with it and now we’re creating travel guides and videos that can and do outperform the so-called giants of the travel industry. It’s proof that passion + repetition + showing up consistently can lead to great things.

And yes, we’ve racked up hundreds of millions of lifetime views, which still feels mildly fake sometimes, like YouTube accidentally put a few extra zeros in the wrong place and no one has quite noticed just yet. But, we'll gladly take it. And keep going.

El Chaltén, Patagonia, Argentina on the Laguna Torre hike, where Audrey Bergner poses on a rocky outcrop with snowcapped Fitz Roy peaks and glaciers in the background, highlighting her work building Che Argentina Travel and deep Argentina travel knowledge.

We’re not one-trick ponies

Alongside our main travel sites, we’ve each built several niche projects.

That Backpacker (Audrey) — travel writing and destination guides around the world (75+ countries) and local (Canada and Argentina) with Audrey’s signature voice

Che Argentina Travel (Audrey) — a travel-focused niche site specializing in all-things Argentina from the perspective of a local award winning travel media specialist targeting project 23 (visiting all 23 Argentine provines)

Picture Perfect Portfolios (me) — investing from the perspective of an informed amateur: creative asset allocation, alternative investments, trend-following, return stacking, expanded canvas portfolios, and original portfolio ideas

In other words: we’ve kinda accidentally built ourselves a lil' travel-media empire over the years. Yes, we’re veterans now in the industry (time really does fly)… but we’re also always ever-evolving.

Banff in the Canadian Rocky Mountains, where Nomadic Samuel stands beside a vivid turquoise alpine lake with camera in hand, surrounded by evergreen forest and rugged peaks, capturing the outdoor photography moments that define his travel style.

Our current focus: the places we keep coming back to

Even though we’ve traveled widely, our content focus today is more intentional:

Canada (especially Alberta and British Columbia family road trips — proud BC born and bred boy energy over here)

Argentina (where we renovate a property and slowly travel around the entire country documenting our entire journey)

Plus repeat-return favourites like Japan, South Korea, Peru, and Germany. 

El Bolsón, Patagonia, Argentina, where Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner prepare an asado outdoors, grilling traditional Argentine barbecue parrilla, raising glasses of Malbec red wine and plating meat in a relaxed backyard slow-travel moment.

The food situation (it’s serious)

We’re foodies through and through. I kid not… I will eat my way into accidental weight gain on trips and then rationalize it as “cultural research.”

We have done actual travel decisions based on food.

We have done visa runs (Penang is a prime example) where the quiet part of the plan was:

dim sum

Indian food

laksa

and an overall dedication to “eat all the things we’ve been thinking about for months”

Sierras de Córdoba, Argentina, where Audrey Bergner stands inside our partially demolished family property, smiling with raised hands as we tackle a major renovation project, restoring a neglected mountain home one chaotic step at a time.

Where we live now: two hemispheres, one chaotic calendar

We’re based in South Alberta (Canada) and the Sierras de Córdoba (Argentina) for half the year each. Basically maximizing the two hemispheres like seasonal migratory eccentrics with too much camera gear.

From November to April, we’re in Argentina working on a major “fix up the neglected property” project: a family property with a hotel and a few houses and traveling to all 23 provinces (project 23). From May to the end of October, we’re in Canada during the nicest months where we're roading tripping as a family across Alberta and British Columbia. Basically, ciao, to 6-months of Canadian winter and perpetual snow shovelin'.

This schedule sounds tidy on paper and then reality shows up like:

“Surprise! A repair.”

“Surprise! A storm.”

“Surprise! It’s video editing season.”

“Surprise! The thing you fixed is now broken again.”

(We’re learning. Constantly.)

Puerto Madero, Buenos Aires, Argentina, where Audrey Bergner kisses her baby Aurelia on a park bench in a leafy playground, capturing a gentle family travel moment while exploring the waterfront district during a relaxed afternoon in the city.

Meet our tiniest travel companion: Aurelia

We added a full little travel buddy to the mix: Aurelia, our daughter. She’s got itchy feet whether she asked for them or not.

Already she’s been to Canada, the US, Argentina, and Peru — including multiple flights, cruises, and overnight buses. She’s such a trouper. Honestly, she’s ridiculously easy to take places (which feels like cheating, but we’ll take it).

And yes, traveling with a kid changes you, mostly by forcing you to slow down, notice the small stuff, and accept that snacks are no longer a “nice-to-have,” they are a full-throttle logistics requirement.

Lago Puelo, Chubut, Patagonia, Argentina, where Nomadic Samuel stands on a rocky shoreline in a beret, surrounded by vivid blue lake waters and dramatic mountain peaks, capturing the feeling of remote, off-the-beaten-path travel in southern Patagonia.

Why you can trust our guides

I take travel content seriously because travel advice online can be chaotic, outdated, or written by someone who hasn’t been there since the Blackberry era.

Here’s how we try to do it differently:

First-hand experience: we write from places we’ve actually been and things we’ve actually done along with well-researched posts related to topics/experiences involving tours/hotels 

Practical details: logistics, timing, expectations, and the nitty-oh-so-gritty stuff you only learn by doing it

Honesty about tradeoffs: time vs money, comfort vs adventure, crowds vs solitude

Ongoing evolution: the way we travel (and write) keeps leveling up IMO

Also: I’m not here to sell you the fantasy version of travel. I’m here to help you plan the real version — the one where the views are incredible, the food is memorable, and something goes slightly sideways at least once or twice or thrice (because that’s tradition).

Kitzbühel, Austria — Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner join fellow travel creators at the Social Travel Summit, a leading professional conference for travel bloggers, content creators, and tourism boards. This networking event brought together international storytellers inside a stylish alpine hotel lounge to share ideas, build partnerships, and shape the future of travel media.

Featured, invited, and occasionally let into rooms with name badges

Over the years, our work has been featured in The Huffington Post, National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com, JR Pass, Nasdaq, Investing and various publications in Argentina such as Vía País, Adnsur, Diario Necochea, Cholila Online, Memo, Diario Uno, Adnsur, El Comodorense and Ecos Diarios and Peru such as Peru.com and Notiviajeros.

We’ve also been invited as thought leaders, speakers and/or panelists to professional travel conferences like The Social Travel Summit, TravelCon, Traverse and the White House Travel Blogger Summit as professional creators in the industry.

Beyond travel media, I'm also a recognized authority in quantitative finance. My insights on systematic asset allocation and portfolio design on Picture Perfect Portfolios have been featured on Nasdaq, Investing.com & Grokipedia bridging the gap between global movement and institutional-grade financial strategy. Applying the same risk management I learned in 75 countries to portfolio construction.

Nomadic Samuel Jeffery invited as a featured guest and hosted creator at TravelCon in Tucson, Arizona—the premier conference for travel influencers and digital media publishers.

Professional network and campaigns

We’re exclusive members of professional travel blogging organization iAmbassador. 

Award-winning campaigns we've been a part of:

Northern Ireland — Nomadic Samuel embraces his inner fantasy hero while wielding a sword in full Game of Thrones-style costume during a filming experience for the award-winning 24 Hours in the UK campaign by iAmbassador, blending travel storytelling, creative campaigns, and a healthy dose of playful adventure.

🔹 24 Hours in the UK — A 24-hour, multi-creator campaign developed with VisitBritain that highlighted amazing experiences across England, Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland. Creators produced content every hour of the day, resulting in 32 videos and millions of impressions, and the project went on to win the World Travel Award for Europe’s Leading Marketing Campaign (2018).

Bergamo, Italy — Audrey Bergner and Nomadic Samuel join fellow travel bloggers dressed in Renaissance-style costumes during the award-winning BlogVille campaign by iAmbassador, posing inside a historic Italian courtyard. This creative tourism project blended heritage storytelling, immersive experiences, and travel media collaboration in one unforgettable campaign.

🔹 BlogVille (Emilia-Romagna) — A pioneering concept created with the Emilia-Romagna tourism board where travel bloggers lived in an apartment in Bologna and explored the region like locals. Over time, the project generated 1,200+ blog posts, reached millions on social media, and earned industry recognition for its impact.

Costa Brava, Spain — Audrey Bergner and a group of travel creators celebrate inside traditional wine barrels as part of the award-winning #EuroFoodTrip campaign by iAmbassador, a collaborative storytelling project that blended food, culture, and creative travel content across Europe.

🔹 #EuroFoodTrip — A collaborative effort between Costa Brava Pirineu de Girona (Spain) and Apt Servizi Emilia-Romagna (Italy), awarded Europe’s Leading Marketing Campaign (2017) for its creative cross-destination storytelling.

Brand partners

Lenovo

Google

Merrell

Tripadvisor

Viator

Tourism boards & destination partners

Germany 

Visit Britain

Scotland

Nova Scotia

Finland

Quebec

Kyrgyzstan in a cozy guesthouse room, where Nomadic Samuel sits cross-legged on a bed working on a laptop while wearing a traditional Kyrgyz felt hat, framed by ornate carpets and textiles that capture an early digital-nomad travel era.

The personal philosophy (and the hats)

I’ve always been more interested in collecting experiences (and yes, quirky hats I can actually wear and hang back home) than chasing the standard white-picket-fence path of massive mortgage + wage slave until ya croak + keepin' up the Joneses mantra.

Travel IMO keeps life from shrinking. It forces you to pay attention again. Food tastes louder. Neighbourhoods have personality. Weather becomes an active character in your storyline. And you learn that confidence is often just doing the thing even when you feel underqualified.

We do go slower now. We do have bases. But we're still adventurous.

Which is basically the entire origin story of this site.

And the hats?

They’re wearable memories. They’re conversation starters. They’re also a great way to look like you’re either:

a local

a cowboy/gaucho

a nomad

a fisherman

or someone who definitely knows where the best bakery is

All five are acceptable outcomes.

London, England on the River Thames, where a group of travel creators and Audrey Bergner are in red jackets waving from a speedboat during a high-energy tourism campaign, showcasing professional content creation and collaborative travel storytelling in the heart of the city.

Work with us

We collaborate with brands, tourism boards, and travel organizations when it’s a strong fit for our audience and style. You can view our entire 15+ history by checking out our Samuel & Audrey Authority Ledger.

Good fits include:

Travel campaigns that value storytelling and practical planning

Food-forward travel coverage

Hiking/outdoors trips where we actually hit the trail

Video + blog deliverables designed to keep performing long after the campaign ends

If you’d like to work with us, reach out with:

the destination/product

timeline

deliverables you have in mind

what success looks like for you

Miraflores, Lima, Peru, where Nomadic Samuel with a backpack gives a thumbs up from a cliffside balcony overlooking the Pacific Ocean, beach promenade, and rolling waves, capturing an early travel moment exploring the city’s famous coastal district.

FAQ: Nomadic Samuel, our travel style, and what we actually do all day

How did Nomadic Samuel start?

In an attic guesthouse in Georgetown, Penang, Malaysia. No windows, no A/C, and a whole lot of trial-and-error while I repeatedly broke my site.

Were you really backpacking before blogging was a thing?

Yep. I was doing long shoestring trips across Southeast Asia and South America, popping into internet cafés once a week to email my folks that I was still alive. Yep. I'm an OG in this space. Conversely, I'm just gettin' old. 

How did you and Audrey meet?

We both taught English in South Korea, and we originally connected through a link exchange between Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker… which escalated into real life (in the best possible way). We've traveled, gone back to school, lived abroad and now are renovating a hotel together. What a life it has been together so far. 

What’s your travel style now?

Slower and deeper. We still love big highlights, but we’re happiest spending longer in fewer places, finding small unheard of towns, and letting a destination “click” instead of racing through it. 

What kinds of places get you most excited?

Underrated small towns, remote corners, and places that feel real instead of curated. We love destinations that have personality, true grit, and quirky stories.

Are you beach people?

Heck, no. Not at all. Especially me.  Mountains FTW. Forests FTW. Lakes FTW. Less peeps FTW. Weather with attitude FTW.

Where do you live?

We split the year between South Alberta (Canada) and the Sierras de Córdoba (Argentina), lining things up so we’re in each place during its best seasons.

What’s the Argentina renovation project?

It’s a big “bring this place back to life” project on Audrey’s family property: a property with a hotel and a few houses that we’re actively fixing up while living there seasonally. It's always been Audrey's dream to do this. Now, we're actually putting things in motion. It's big. It's scary at times. But we're gettin' things done slowly and we'll see it through. 

Do you travel with your daughter?

Indeed,Aurelia has already been on flights, cruises, and overnight buses across Canada, the US, Argentina, and Peru. She’s a total trouper. This is just the beginning.

What YouTube channels do you run?

We run English and Spanish channels (Samuel and Audrey + Samuel y Audrey), and we’re approaching a million combined subscribers across them plus 250 million combined views. Not bad for folks who could barely find the 'on switch' when we first started.

Were you always confident on camera?

Heck, no. Not even close. Not by a long shot. Early days were awkward, the gear was rough, and the learning curve was steep, but we stuck with it and grew into our style over time. 

What other sites and projects do you run?

Beyond Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker, Audrey runs Che Argentina Travel, and I run Picture Perfect Portfolios (investing, portfolio ideas, and research from an informed amateur perspective).

Have you been featured in major publications?

Yes, our work has been featured in The Huffington Post, National Geographic, and various publications in Argentina. 

Are you part of any professional creator organizations?

Yes, we’re members of iAmbassador and have been part of award-winning campaigns listed in their case studies. 

Why the hats?

Because experiences are the point, and quirky hats are the most wearable souvenir on Earth. Also: they make great conversation starters and terrible packing decisions.

#### What's the Best Tango Show in Buenos Aires?
Looking for the best tango show in Buenos Aires? We've got you covered with this list of tango performances ranging from small venues to grand stage productions!

Whenever family or friends visit Buenos Aires for the first time, I like to suggest going to a tango show as a welcome activity to the city. 

Tango is synonymous with Buenos Aires, after all, the dance was born around the 1880s in the port-side neighbourhoods along the Río de la Plata. Therefore, going to a show is a must-do activity!

But what's the best tango show in Buenos Aires, Argentina?

That depends entirely on what you're looking for because the options are endless! I have been to several different tango shows in Buenos Aires over the years, and each experience has been quite different.

Do you want to attend a show in a small, intimate venue or enjoy a grand stage production in a big theatre? 

Do you prefer a cabaret-style show or a performance that combines traditional tango with folklore? 

Do you just want to watch tango, or are you looking for a dinner and show combo?

What about an early tango show or one that also includes a tango lesson? These are all options!

I know choosing can be a little overwhelming, so I've narrowed down the top tango experiences in Buenos Aires for you. Each one offers something unique, and you're bound to have a good time! Now let's help you find the right one for your city itinerary.

My Top 3 Picks: Best Tango Show in Buenos Aires 

#1 Top Pick

⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️

La Ventana Tango Show

✅ Tango and folklore

✅ Historic venue

✅ Popular show

#2 Pick

Rojo Tango Show

✅ 1920s cabaret style

✅ Luxurious venue

✅ Small, intimate show

#3 Pick

El Aljibe Tango Show

✅ Early show

✅ Family-friendly

✅ Central location

The Best Tango Shows in Buenos Aires

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by La ventana Tango (@laventanatango.ba)

1. La Ventana Tango Show

Best tango and folklore show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

La Ventana Barrio de Tango is one of the more popular tango shows in Buenos Aires. The tango venue is set in a former conventillo, also known as a tenement, so it's a historic establishment that has been renovated to have an old-time feel with vaulted brick ceilings and stained glass windows.

Meanwhile, the stage has been set up to look like an old street in Buenos Aires from the turn of the 19th century.

This is one of my favourite tango shows in Buenos Aires, probably because it's the first one I ever went to, so I have very fond memories of it. I took my British friend to this show, and we even signed up to do a tango lesson before the performance.

Another cool thing about this particular tango show is that you'll get to see both tango and folklore on the stage, which I think is a nice introduction to Argentine gaucho culture, particularly if you're not planning to leave the city.

When it comes to booking this experience, you can opt for just the show or the dinner and show. The dinner is a 3-course meal featuring an entree, main dish and dessert.

"La Ventana Tango Show is a must-see for anyone looking to experience tango with a mix of folklore. The dancers were nothing short of phenomenal and the music performed live by an exceptional band enhanced the experience. The service was attentive and the atmosphere made it a memorable night out. We left with a deeper appreciation for the art form and a strong desire to return. Highly recommended!" -Paul

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Cena Show de Tango (@elviejoalmacentango)

2. El Viejo Almacén Tango Show

Best traditional tango show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 1.5 hours | ✅ Book it!

El Viejo Almacén is a tango show set in San Telmo, a bohemian neighbourhood that's worth exploring for its outdoor markets, street art and lively atmosphere.

The show is set in a historic venue that dates back to 1769. Over the centuries, this building has housed a field warehouse, a British hospital, and a general customs office before becoming a 'Temple of Tango' in 1969.

El Viejo Almacén is a popular tango show that runs 365 days a year. This makes it a good option for some last-minute plans in the city.

This is a two-story venue where guests can sit on either the main floor or the balcony that overlooks the room. The tango show features an orchestral quintet and four dance couples gracing the stage.

They offer a show-only option, dinner and show, or VIP dinner and show, which includes an open bar once the tango performance starts at the tanguería.

"As a solo traveler, this was recommended by multiple locas as one of the best shows in town, smaller more personal with more history than the other shows. Amazed with the performance, truly recommend it. The transfer from the hotel right on the dot." -Luis

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by ALJIBE TANGO 🇦🇷 BA (@aljibetango.ba)

3. El Aljibe Tango Show

Best early tango show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

One thing you need to know about tango shows in Buenos Aires is that they are generally a late-night affair. 

Dinner is eaten quite late in this country (most restaurants in Argentina don't even open for dinner until 8:00 pm!), so that means tango shows also tend to run quite late.

This can make it a little tricky for foreigners who have just arrived in Buenos Aires and are feeling a bit jet-lagged or simply don't want to be out super late. However, this particular tango show's early start is an exception, and I think that makes it a nice option for visitors or even families who want to attend a show with children.

At El Aljibe, dinner is served at 7:00 pm and the tango show begins at 8:15 pm. They also offer an option that includes a tango lesson starting at 6:00 pm if you book directly through them. 

The venue, El Aljibe, is located in Buenos Aires' historic Monserrat neighbourhood, so it's a very central location and easy to access.

"Fabulous show and food! This is a must. This was the first thing we did in Buenos Aires and it did not disappoint. The show is so much fun and shows different forms of dance. So entertaining. The service was top notch and very accommodating. And this was our first steak in Argentina and was outstanding. You will love this." -Allyson

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Tango Porteño (@tangoporteno_ok)

4. Tango Porteño Show

Best tango show on stage

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

Tango Porteño puts on a tango show in a theatre just across the street from the famous Teatro Colón and one block up from the Obelisk. If you've walked down Avenida 9 de Julio, you've likely seen the theatre as it's hard to miss, especially when it's all lit up at night!

The venue is an art deco building that once housed the famous Cine Metro owned by Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer.

While some of the smaller venues only host tango shows a few times a week, because this is a large and centrally located theatre, it has shows every night of the week.

Tango Porteño covers various time frames starting with tango's origins along the Río de la Plata and following its evolution into a contemporary dance. 

The show will transport you to Argentina's golden age of tango, featuring 25 artists and a live orchestra.

"The Tango Show was outstanding and the dinner was fantastic!! The band was also phenomenal. The entire group enjoyed the show." -Warren

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Faena Buenos Aires (@faenabsas)

5. Rojo Tango Show

Best cabaret-style tango show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 3 hours | ✅ Book it!

Rojo Tango Show is a cabaret-style tango performance that takes place at Hotel Faena, a luxury 5-star property in Buenos Aires' Puerto Madero neighbourhood.

The venue has a strong 1920s vibe featuring red lighting, red velvet and gold trim. It is a small, dimly lit setting with a decidedly intimate feel where the dancers and live band feel within arms reach.

Guests are served a contemporary Argentinean 3-course meal with an entree, main dish and dessert, as well as champagne and wine.

Dinner is served at 8:30 pm, and the show begins at 10:00 pm.

This cabaret tango show is best suited to travellers looking for a small venue with an intimate feel and it's a high-end experience with a price tag to match.

"This was fabulous from start to finish. Enrique (driver) picked me up at my AirBNB right on time. He was the most gracious, classy escort to the beyond beautiful Hotel Faena. The hotel is stunning. The venue is small and intimate. I had a front table which was great. The dancers were within arms reach. The servers are so attentive and the food was outstanding. They all spoke English and every need was met. The show is wonderful. The dancers are amazing , singers and band were top notch. I would highly recommend and would go again if I were here longer. I’d give it 10 stars if I could. Worth every penny. Bring cash for tipping and the staff and driver are worth a big tip. Enrique was waiting for me to deliver me back. Got back around midnight." -Mary Elizabeth

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Café de los Angelitos (@cafedelosangelitos)

6. Cafe de Los Angelitos Tango Show

Best tango show set in a historic cafe

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 3 hours | ✅ Book it!

Cafe de Los Angelitos is a historic cafe and a beautiful venue located just two blocks west of the National Argentine Congress. I know we're talking about tango at the moment, but it's a really nice place to go for breakfast or have an afternoon coffee with a pastry.

Though Cafe de Los Angelitos is best known as a cafe, it's also a place where you can watch a tango performance. The venue dates back to 1890 and it's a place that was frequented by Carlos Gardel, one of Argentina's most famous figures in tango. In fact, Gardel signed his first contract at this very cafe!

This place also has the distinction of being the first cafe to put on a tango show back in 1940.

You have a few different options when it comes to seating during the tango show, including in the main dining room, the VIP balconies, or the intimate super VIP section on the second floor.

You can customize the type of experience you'd like to have: tango show and drinks, tango show and dinner, tango show and dinner with your own private table, or the tango show and VIP dinner option. 

The nice thing about the tango performance at Cafe de Los Angelitos is that it's done on a smaller scale, so it feels a bit more intimate rather than a big stage production.

"Fantastic from start to finish. Driver picked us up at the hotel on time and was waiting at the end of the show. Food was excellent and the show itself was outstanding. Would definitely recommend." -Lisa

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Homero Manzi (@esquinahomeromanzi)

7. Esquina Homero Manzi Tango Show

Best tango show with a neighbourhood feel

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 1.5-3 hours | ✅ Book it!

Esquina Homero Manzi is another tango show that I have personally attended in Buenos Aires - I brought my in-laws here the very first time they visited Argentina. 

This tango venue is located in the Boedo neighbourhood, and it has more of a local feel. There's a famous tango titled 'Boedo' about this traditional working-class barrio, which was quite influential in the Buenos Aires tango scene.

The tango show is named after Homero Nicolás Manzione Prestera, an Argentine lyricist of many famous tangos and milongas, some of which were recorded by the one and only Carlos Gardel. 

The show at Esquina Homero Manzi is all about reliving the 1940s. This was considered the golden age of tango with orchestras, singers, and composers shaping the musical styles that endure to this day. 

Guests have the option of choosing between show only, show and dinner, or show and VIP dinner. We opted for the dinner and show option and were quite pleased with the abundance of wine and the meal. 

"The club is very nostalgic, looks like something from a movie. Singing, musical numbers and dancing. We enjoyed wine and split a salad. Starts around 10 pm and lasts 80 minutes." -Lis

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Info Turismo (@infoturismoargentina)

8. Teatro Astor Piazzolla Tango Show

Best tango show with a contemporary flair

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 3.5 hours | ✅ Book it!

This Buenos Aires tango show takes place in Teatro Astor Piazzolla, a belle epoque theatre located inside Galeria General Güemes.

The tango show is named after Astor Piazzolla, an Argentine tango composer and bandoneon player who revolutionized the traditional Argentina tango and created a new style called nuevo tango incorporating jazz and classical music elements.

The Astor Piazzolla tango show pays homage to Piazzolla and features many of his songs.

Visitors can choose between the tango show only, tango show and dinner, or tango show and VIP dinner where the meal is served in the theatre balcony.

The nice thing about the tango show at Teatro Astor Piazzolla is its super central location along Calle Florida. They offer transfers to the venue, but if you're staying in the area, you can also easily get there by walking and take in some of the sights while you're at it. 

"Fabulous evening and fantastic value. As soon as we arrived we were invited to tango class included in the price of our ticket. The teachers were great and we had a wonderful time. Dinner was lovely. We both ordered the chicken dish which looked like a creation from a fine Parisian restaurant. Very delicious and paired well with the white Malbec that was surprisingly good and flowing freely! The actual show was truly fantastic. We loved the combination of an authentic band eon orchestra, singers and of course amazing tango dancing that included tango from the 20's 40's and modern day. A five start experience!" -Stephen

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by El Querandi Dinner Tango Show (@elqueranditangoshow)

9. El Querandi Tango Show

Best tango show with a historical element

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

El Querandi is an award-winning tango show set in a restored mansion that dates back to the 1920s. 

What makes El Querandi one of the best tango shows in Buenos Aires is that it covers the history of tango throughout the performance. 

The show is divided into five eras: tango's origins, the role of immigrants and the working class neighbourhoods, the influence of Carlos Gardel, salons and milongas, and Piazzolla's modern take on tango. 

They offer a three-course a la carte menu that features traditional Argentine dishes. Plus, they can accommodate vegetarian, vegan and gluten-free meal requests with prior notice. The tango show at El Querandi also includes free drinks all night long.

Each reservation gets its own table, meaning you have a bit more privacy as you're not sharing the space with fellow guests.

"An incredible way to spend a night! Easy with the bus pick up, a delicious dinner, and the music, dancers, and ambiance were exactly what I was hoping for!" -Amy 

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Señor Tango Oficial (@senortango)

10. Señor Tango Show

Best Broadway-style tango production

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

Señor Tango is a large-scale tango production set in a theatre known as the 'Cathedral of Tango'. 

The venue is located in the neighbourhood of Barracas on the boundary between the city of Buenos Aires and Buenos Aires Province, but transportation is provided which makes getting there easy.

The show at Señor Tango takes place on a round stage in the middle of the theatre. It's a full-on spectacle featuring aerial performers, horses, and singers as well as couples gracing the stage to dance tango. 

If you're looking for a flashy performance that seeks to outdo itself, then Señor Tango fits the bill! There's a reason this is considered the biggest show in town.

Señor Tango is also a show that has drawn many celebrities and personalities, which only adds to its fame. 

"Great seats…overlooking the circular stage…and the tango was great! Especially the aerial stuff! And singers were great…and the horses! That was a real surprise! It was a huge production that worked like clockwork! It was a much grander extravaganza than the other tango show I went to. Definitely go to this one! It’s the best!" -Dawn

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

Map of Best Tango Shows in Buenos Aires

Tango Shows vs Milongas: What’s the Difference?

If you’re visiting Buenos Aires and planning to experience tango, you’ll quickly come across two very different types of events: tango shows and milongas. Both are integral to the city’s cultural identity, but they offer distinct experiences depending on what you’re looking for. Here’s a breakdown to help you decide whether to choose one, the other, or ideally, both.

What Is a Tango Show?

A classic tango show is a choreographed stage performance designed to showcase the art of tango in a theatrical setting. Think of it as a night at the theatre, but with sensual dancing, dramatic lighting, elegant costumes, and often live orchestras or singers. These shows are typically held in venues that cater to visitors—such as historic theatres, cabarets, and elegant salons. They aim to impress through spectacle and precision.

Choreographed routines: Professional dancers perform polished sequences that highlight the elegance, passion, and technical skill of tango.

Live music: Most shows feature live musicians playing traditional tango pieces by icons like Astor Piazzolla and Carlos Gardel.

Optional dinner: Many venues offer a three-course meal before the performance, often with Argentine classics like empanadas, steak, and Malbec wine.

Tourist-friendly: Announcements, service, and even brief narrations are often available in English, making these shows very accessible to first-time visitors.

Set schedule: Tango shows usually start in the evening, often between 8–10 p.m., and last 1.5–2.5 hours depending on whether dinner is included.

Best for: Travellers who want a polished, theatrical introduction to tango without needing any prior dance knowledge.

What Is a Milonga?

A milonga is something entirely different: it’s a social tango dance event where locals and visitors gather to dance together in a more spontaneous and communal setting. This is where tango lives and breathes in everyday Buenos Aires. Instead of sitting back and watching, at a milonga, you’re part of the atmosphere.

Social dancing: Rather than choreographed performances, couples of all levels (from beginners to lifelong tangueros!) fill the dance floor.

Authentic environment: Milongas are often held in neighbourhood clubs, cultural centers, or even outdoor plazas, giving you a real glimpse into local life.

Codes and traditions: Many milongas follow traditional “códigos” (dance floor etiquette), like the cabeceo, a subtle nod used to invite someone to dance.

Live or recorded music: Some milongas feature live orchestras, while others use classic tango recordings. The music is played in tandas (sets of songs), with breaks in between.

Later start times: Milongas typically begin very late and can continue into the early hours of the morning.

Best for: Travellers who want to immerse themselves in local tango culture, observe social dancing up close, or even join 

Tips for booking a tango show in Buenos Aires

Decide on the type of tango experience you want. As you've seen with the different tango shows we've highlighted, there's something for everyone. The tango experiences in Buenos Aires range from small, intimate shows to large stage productions. Plus, the performances can also vary from cabaret-style to classic shows that combine traditional tango with folklore and more contemporary dance elements.

Consider the tango show and dinner packages. Most tango venues offer a dinner and show or drinks and show package. I've always opted to book the dinner and show since I find it convenient and the food is typically quite good (expect a 3-course meal with at least one of the main dish options being steak!) If you don't want the dinner package, you can always choose to have dinner at a nearby restaurant or parrilla and then make your way over for the show. Just give yourself enough time (I'd say at least 2 hours) since service can be a bit slower in Argentina.

Prepare for a late night. As I mentioned earlier, most tango shows in Buenos Aires get going late with dancers hitting the stage around 10:00 pm, so you can expect to leave the venue close to midnight. The one exception is the early tango show at El Aljibe, which is geared at foreign visitors who aren't quite used to Argentina's late dining culture. This is a very convenient option, especially if you're dealing with jet lag!

Confirm transportation to and from the venue. Depending on where in the city you're staying, most tango shows will offer transportation to and from the tango show. However, if you're staying outside the city centre, you'll likely need to make your own way there, so consider your location when booking a tango show.

Book your tango show in advance. I would say a few days in advance is enough, especially if you want to attend one of the smaller shows where seating is limited. For the bigger stage productions, you can often get same-day tickets or at least tickets for the following day. I also like to book a bit in advance in order to confirm transportation details to and from the venue. This is an activity you can enjoy in Buenos Aires even in the rain.

Sign up for a tango dance lesson. Some of the tango shows highlighted on this list also offer a short tango lesson prior to the show. However, this is often something that needs to be booked directly through the venue as it's not typically included in the dinner and show packages. I took a tango lesson the very first time I went to a tango show in Buenos Aires, and while I didn't walk away with any real dancing skills, it did allow me to appreciate the intricacies of the dance on stage.

FAQs: Watching a Tango Show in Buenos Aires, Argentina

Is it worth seeing a tango show in Buenos Aires? Seeing a tango show in Buenos Aires is a quintessential experience. Tango originated in the impoverished port areas along the Río de la Plata, so it's an important part of the city's cultural heritage.  Where can I watch tango in Buenos Aires? There are numerous tango and dinner shows in Buenos Aires and the majority of them are located in the neighbourhood of San Telmo. Some of the more popular shows include La Ventana, El Querandi and El Viejo Almacén.  Where can I see tango on the street in Buenos Aires? There are several neighbourhoods where you can see tango dancing on the street in Buenos Aires. This typically occurs on weekends and in more touristy areas like Boca, San Telmo and even Puerto Madero.  What to wear to a tango show in Buenos Aires? While you are not required to dress up for a tango show, most people dress smart casual. Dress pants or dark jeans with a collared shirt for men, and a dress or blouse with dress pants or a skirt for women, is appropriate.  How long do tango shows typically last? Most tango shows run for 1.5 to 2.5 hours, depending on whether you book the dinner option. If dinner is included, you can expect to arrive 1–1.5 hours before the show begins. Non-dinner guests usually arrive closer to showtime.  Can I attend a tango show without dinner? Yes, nearly all tango venues offer show-only tickets at a lower price. This is a great option if you prefer to dine elsewhere or want to save money. However, note that show-only guests are typically seated further from the stage than dinner guests.  Are tango shows suitable for children? Most tango shows welcome families, though late start times (8–10 p.m.) may be challenging for younger kids. Some performances include more sensual choreography, so if you’re travelling with children, consider choosing a family-friendly venue and opting for earlier dinner seating.  What’s the difference between a tango show and a milonga? A tango show is a choreographed stage performance featuring professional dancers, live music, and sometimes singers, aimed at visitors. A milonga is a social dance event where locals and tourists come together to dance; it's more authentic and participatory, but less theatrical. Some travellers enjoy doing both for a full tango experience. 

#### Why This El Calafate Glacier Boat Tour is Worth the Splurge!
Going on an El Calafate glacier boat tour was one of the highlights of our trip to Patagonia! This is our experience of the Gourmet Glaciers tour aboard Maria Turquesa.

If you only make time for one excursion in El Calafate, I would make it the boat tour to the glaciers aboard Maria Turquesa with MarPatag. This was the highlight of my trip to El Calafate and I haven't stopped raving about it to anyone who will listen!

So what was so amazing about this glaciers boat tour, you ask?

Well, for starters the number of icebergs and glaciers we got to see and how close we got to them!

Los Glaciares National Park forms part of the South Patagonian Ice Field which stretches across Argentina and Chile. It is the largest ice field in South America and it feeds numerous glaciers! 

When you visit Los Glaciares National Park from El Calafate you come face to face with the most famous glacier of them all, Perito Moreno. However, there are many other glaciers to see within the park - many of them far larger and grander - but most travellers don't know about these since they can only be reached by boat!

There were so many highlights during our glaciers boat tour aboard Maria Turquesa: cruising the milky turquoise waters of Lago Argentino, feeling the icy sub-Antarctic breeze blowing in our faces, fishing chunks of iceberg for our beverages, seeing waterfalls formed by meltwater cascading down the mountains and so much more!

I've visited some truly majestic places across Patagonia, but the experience of seeing these glaciers up close was the one that moved me to tears. I loved this tour and at the end of the day, my husband and I looked at each other and agreed that we'd be willing to get back on the same tour and do it all over again the next day.

So without further ado, here's a recap of our experience on this El Calafate glaciers boat tour, so you know exactly what to expect.

🛥️ Maria Turquesa Full Day Sightseeing Glaciers Cruise - This is the El Calafate boat tour to the glaciers that we booked. This is a full-day tour (approximately 9 hours) and it includes a packed gourmet lunchbox.

Transfer to Puerto Soledad

First things first, we had to make our way to the port!

This El Calafate glacier tour started with a 48-kilometre drive out to Punta Bandera / Puerto Soledad which is a private port on the southern shores of Lago Argentino just west of El Calafate.

You can book this tour with transfers or without transfers. We opted for the transfer which included pickup and drop off at our lodgings in El Calafate. Pickups start at 07:15 am so you'll want to be up bright and early. 

Alternatively, if you're planning to rent a car in El Calafate or if you're staying outside the urban pickup areas in town, you can make your own way to the port.

Los Glaciares National Park Entrance Fee

Before boarding our vessel, Maria Turquesa, we had to pay the admission fee to Los Glaciares National Park since the whole cruise takes place in the park. 

There was a small booth where we all lined up to pay the fee. You can view current admission rates here since these vary for international visitors, national visitors and provincial visitors.

I'll also mention that even though they accept debit and credit card payments, it's a good idea to have some Argentine pesos on you to pay this fee since the internet does tend to cut in and out in these remote places. Sometimes you have to attempt a payment multiple times and other times it just doesn't go through!

Tip: If you're planning to visit Los Glaciares National Park on two consecutive days, you can save 50% off your second visit. We paid for this pass since we knew we wanted to come back to visit Perito Moreno Glacier and explore the balconies and boardwalks.

El Calafate Glacier Boat Tour

So, now I'm going to give you a play-by-play of our day on the Gourmet Glaciers tour so you know exactly what to expect, should you decide to do it!

After paying our admission fee to Los Glaciares National Park, we boarded the vessel at 8:30 am and set sail by 9:00 am.

As we were leaving port, we decided to get some hot beverages. We each ordered a vanilla cappuccino with a medialuna. 

Once we left port and were out cruising Lago Argentino, we were able to go out on the deck and it wasn't long before we spotted our first iceberg.

In fact, the day was full of icebergs and glaciers!

Seco Glacier

The first glacier we visited on our glaciers boat cruise was Seco Glacier, which translates to 'dry glacier'. This is a hanging glacier and its name refers to the fact that it is currently receding.

Unlike other glaciers in the park that flow directly into the lake, Seco Glacier ends on a rocky outcrop without reaching the water. This gives it a somewhat barren and stark appearance, contrasting sharply with the lush surroundings.

Heim Glacier

We continued towards Heim Glacier, which is a hanging glacier that had these incredible meltwater cascades running down the side of the mountain.

Spegazzini Glacier

Next on the itinerary was Spegazzini Glacier, named after Carlos Luis Spegazzini, the Italian-Argentine botanist who was the first to study the local flora.

The main characteristic of this glacier is its height which reaches 135 meters along its front. This makes it the highest glacier in Los Glaciares National Park and one of the most important!

Due to the glacier's steep and high front wall, you can often witness spectacular calving events, where massive chunks of ice break off and crash into the lake, sending waves rippling across the water.

Puesto de las Vacas

Halfway through the cruise, we disembarked at a place called Puesto de las Vacas, which literally translates to 'cow stall'.

This is a remote part of Los Glaciares National Park, where a Finnish-Chilean couple lived and whose job it was to capture the wild cows that escaped from the nearby estancias and bring them back into town!

For this part of the excursion, we were split into smaller Spanish and English-speaking groups and we went on a guided hike.

It was nice to stretch our legs before getting back on the boat for more glaciers!

Upsala Glacier

That afternoon we also visited the Upsala Glacier and Bertacchi Glacier.

Upsala Glacier is a valley glacier, currently in a state of recession, that sits on the eastern side of the Southern Patagonian Ice Field. 

It is named after Uppsala University in Sweden since they sponsored the first glaciological studies conducted in this area.

Bertacchi Glacier

Bertacchi Glacier is one of three lesser eastflowing tributaries of Upsala Glacier together with Cono Glacier and Murallón Glacier. 

However, Upsala Glacier has retreated to such a degree that it no longer constrains Bertacchi Glacier.

The Gourmet Glaciers Lunchbox

We then took a pause from all the glacier-spotting to have lunch. 

The name of this particular tour is Gourmet Glaciers, and you can choose between a gourmet tasting menu served on the private deck, or a fancy lunchbox, which is what we opted for.

We were served a Patagonian lamb sandwich with caramelized onions and cheese, a side of roasted carrot and potato wedges and one non-alcoholic beverage per person. For a packed lunchbox, it was a really nice meal!

Because this tour was a special occasion, we also decided to order a bottle of wine - Malbec, of course! - to toast to such a wonderful day. 

At one point during the boat tour, the guides fished a piece of iceberg from the lake, so guests had the option to sip whiskey with glacial ice. It was a pleasant surprise when the servers came around with chunks of the iceberg for anyone who wanted to add it to their drinks - we did!

Then for dessert, we got a brownie and dulce de leche mousse with blueberries. We weren't even expecting dessert, so this was a pleasant surprise.

Canal de los Témpanos

All through lunch, we continued our El Calafate glacier boat tour towards Canal de los Témpanos, which translates to 'iceberg channel'.

The channel is named so since this is where the ice that breaks off Perito Moreno Glacier ends up.

Because we ended up revisiting Los Glaciares National Park the day after this glacier boat tour, we had the opportunity to see this place up close.

There is a very short and easy hike to Mirador Canal de los Témpanos via a boardwalk, where you can stand on the shores of Lake Argentino and watch the icebergs bob in the water.

Perito Moreno Glacier

Then it was time for the main attraction: Perito Moreno Glacier! 

This particular glacier is the icon of Los Glaciares National Park. It’s the reason why people travel all the way to Patagonia...to see this one glacier!

What is so special about the Perito Moreno Glacier?

Well, for starters, it’s one of the few glaciers in the world that is still growing.

It’s also pretty massive! The glacier’s front is 5 kilometres long, its height above the water is 60 meters, and its total depth is about 170 meters - so you're actually only seeing a small part of what it is.

Sometimes you can build up an attraction in your head and then it's a bit underwhelming, but this was far from the case with Perito Moreno Glacier. If anything, I would say the experience was overwhelming!

Seeing that wall of blue ice, feeling the glacial air blowing in my face, and watching as chunks of ice calved into the water was nothing short of spectacular. 

There are so many Perito Moreno Glacier boat tours and sometimes choosing one can feel a bit overwhelming, but I was very happy with our decision. 

All in all, it was an amazing day and an experience I hope to repeat again the next time I visit El Calafate, hopefully bringing my parents and in-laws along!

How to book the Gourmet Glaciers Tour

So, how do you book this El Calafate glaciers boat tour aboard Maria Turquesa?

Good question! There are a few different ways. 

Viator: The Gourmet Glaciers boat tour is listed on Viator. This is the easiest and most straightforward way of booking this tour, especially for foreigners. It also means you can book your tour well in advance, which is a good idea if you're visiting during the high season (December-March) when the tour can sell out days in advance. The downside is that the tour does cost a bit more when you book through Viator.

Tour operator: MarPatag Cruceros is the tour operator for the Gourmet Glaciers cruise aboard Maria Turquesa. Their rates are listed here in ARS. Booking things in Argentina isn't always very straightforward, so if you want to book directly with MarPatag Cruceros you'll either need to send a message through their contact form and wait for a response or get in touch via Whatsapp. It's a bit more work, but you can get the tour for a bit cheaper.

In person: Booking in person is always a bit of a gamble in terms of availability if you're visiting El Calafate during the high season. This is because tours like this one can book up. If you only have a few days in town, you probably don't want to risk it! However, if you're staying in El Calafate for a while, you can try to book something as soon as you arrive for a later date. This involves a bit more legwork, but most of the tour agencies are located along Avenida del Libertador, so it's just a matter of going in, asking prices and comparing.

Our experience on the Gourmet Glaciers Cruise

It can be hard to put this experience into words, so I think it's best I show you. I think this video captures the magic of our El Calafate glacier boat tour and why we loved it so much. Enjoy!

https://youtu.be/2nZmzsS-ONQ
Video of our El Calafate Glacier Boat Tour aboard Maria Turquesa 

Read more:

Fun Day Tours from El Calafate

How to Spend 2 Epic Days in El Calafate

Visiting Estancia Nibepo Aike from El Calafate

El Calafate to El Chalten: How to Get There

A Guide to El Chalten: Argentina's Trekking Capital 

How to Spend 3 Days in El Chalten

Where to Glamp in Patagonia

Which of These 3 Patagonia Tours is Right for You? 

#### Things to do in El Bolson: Patagonia's Hippie Mountain Town
Today we're sharing some of the best things to do in El Bolson, a hippie mountain town located in Northern Patagonia, Argentina.

El Bolson lies in a valley surrounded by jagged mountain ranges on either side, the local architecture features lots of log cabin-style buildings, and the town itself has a very easy-going and laid-back feel.

The main draw to El Bolson is its pristine nature, of course! There are hiking trails that meander up the rocky mountains, swimming holes with turquoise waters, and cascading waterfalls tucked away in the woodland. It's every outdoor lover's paradise!

This town is one of the most beautiful places in Patagonia and in this El Bolson travel guide, we're going to be sharing some of the highlights!

How to get to El Bolson

So, where is El Bolson?

El Bolson is located in the Province of Río Negro in Northern Patagonia.

The nearest airport is in the city of San Carlos de Bariloche, which is 2 hours or 138 kilometres north of El Bolson.

If you're planning a Northern Patagonia road trip, then renting a car is the best way to get to El Bolson and thoroughly explore the area.

Alternatively, there are buses that connect Bariloche with El Bolson, or Esquel with El Bolson if you're arriving from the south.

Via Bariloche has multiple departures per day and offers a good service.

Is El Bolson worth visiting?

Absolutely! El Bolson is one of our favourite mountain towns in Patagonia and we think it's worth a spot on your Patagonia itinerary.

If you want to experience Patagonia off-the-beaten-path, enjoy spending time in nature, being surrounded by mountains, visiting craft breweries, and indulging your sweet tooth in artisanal ice creams and chocolates, then you're going to enjoy what El Bolson has to offer.

How long should you stay in El Bolson?

Ideally, you'd want to spend at least 3 days in El Bolson in order to cover the main attractions and enjoy some of the local day hikes.

With 5-7 days you could add on some of the day trips which include a national park, neighbouring lakeside towns, and even a ride aboard a very famous train.

That being said, if you are pressed for time, there is a day tour to El Bolson from Bariloche, which also includes a visit to Lago Puelo National Park. That's something to consider if you're visiting Bariloche for a few days.

You'll only be able to cover a handful of attractions in the town with one day, but it'll give you a taste of El Bolson.

Things to do in El Bolson

There are lots of things to do in El Bolson and as you'd expect from a mountain town, most of these activities are outdoors.

That means epic mountain views all around!

Bosque Tallado

One of the more unique attractions to visit in El Bolsón is the Carved Forest, also known as Bosque Tallado.

This sculpture forest is located on Cerro Piltriquitrón at 1,420 meters above sea level, and it came to be after a series of fires burnt down part of the mountainside.

Marcelo López, a local artist, came up with the idea of inviting fellow artists to come and use the burnt and fallen lenga trees as their canvas.

These sculpture-carving gatherings were organized in 1998, 1999, 2003, 2007, 2010, and 2014 adding new sculptures to the forest every few years.

Aside from the artwork, the Sculpture Forest is a beautiful day hike that offers impressive views of the town of El Bolsón and the surrounding mountains!

Feria Artesanal

El Bolsón is well known for its Feria Artesanal or artisanal hippie fair that sets up in Plaza Pagano every Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday and Sunday.

There are around 200 stalls selling ceramics, leather, tapestries, candles, honey, jams and even natural cosmetics.

Plus, we can’t forget all the food trucks where you can sample empanadas, choripán, crêpes, hamburgers and more.

Monte Viejo Artesanías

This shop sells beautiful Argentine handicrafts, and it's the ideal place to pick up some classic Argentinian souvenirs.

They have jewellery made by local artists, including the owner of the store himself.

You can also find mates and bombillas, gaucho hats, knit vests, ceramics, ponchos and wool sweaters.

The staff are also incredibly sweet and friendly, so it's a nice place to shop.

Hiking in El Bolsón

El Bolsón is a great hiking destination and there are numerous trails to choose from all ranging in length and level of difficulty. A few to consider include:

Cerro Amigo - This is an easy hike that leads to 3 different lookout points offering town and mountain views. (2 kms, 30 mins)

Cascada Escondida - The hidden waterfall is accessed via the Botanical Garden and it's a short and easy trail. (1,4 km, 25 mins)

Cerro Piltriquitrón - This is the most iconic mountain in El Bolson and its name means ‘hanging from the clouds’. The hiking trails leads up to a mountain refuge where you can spend the night or at the very least enjoy a meal. Be warned, it is a steep hike! (9.3 kms, 5 h)

Cabeza del Indio - This hike leads to a lookout of the valley where you can see the Río Azul and there’s also a rock that resembles a human head. (6.8 kms, 2 h 15 mins)

El Cajón del Azul - This hiking trail starts at the Wharton Farm and leads you to a forested river canyon with crystalline waters that range from turquoise to emerald. It's a popular summer destination to enjoy a swim, and the trail can also be done as part of a horseback riding tour. (17.4 kms, 5 h 45 mins)

You can find a complete list of hiking trails in El Bolsón on the All Trails website.

Day trips from El Bolson

There are so many fun day trips you can enjoy from El Bolsón - all of them featuring spectacular nature.

Also fun fact, the day trips listed below are all in the Province of Chubut! El Bolsón is located in the Province of Río Negro, but it is so close to the border with Chubut, that it's super easy to cross over and explore.

Lago Puelo

One of my personal favourite trips from El Bolsón is to Lago Puelo, which is located only 30 minutes south of town.

Lago Puelo is both a town and a national park. First you'll pass through town, and then you'll reach the park which is name after the lake.

This park offers lots of hiking trails with incredible lookout points where you can admire the beauty of Lake Puelo.

There are also boat tours that allow you to experience some of the park highlights and even hike to the Chilean border.

During the summer season, food trucks park close to the beach so you can enjoy a picnic with a view.

Cholila

Another easy day trip from El Bolsón is the Cholila Ranch that was once home to Butch Cassidy and the Sundance Kid.

These two outlaws earned themselves quite the reputation as bank and train robbers in the days of the American Wild West.

After law enforcement got a little too hot on their trail, they decided to escape to Patagonia.

Here they purchased land and bought cattle, however, they couldn't outrun their past. When the Pinkerton Detective Agency tracked them down, a local sheriff gave them the heads up so they could get out of dodge.

Butch Cassidy's Ranch is located just under 1 hour south of El Bolsón.

Getting there involves driving along National Route 40 and then turning west on Provincial Route 71. It's then on the right hand side just 10 kilometres outside the town of Cholila.

El Hoyo

Another day trip from El Bolsón to consider is El Hoyo.

This is only a 40-minute drive south of El Bolsón along National Route 40.

One of the main attractions in El Hoyo is Laberinto Patagonia, the largest labyrinth in South America! It sits on a 5-hectare estate and has 2,200 metres worth of paths. They also have a wonderful tea house on site with the most scrumptious cakes.

If wineries are more your thing, you'll be glad to hear that El Hoyo has a growing wine scene. A few to visit include Patagonian Wines, Bodega y Viñedos Ayestarán, and Allard Mammarelli Wines.

Epuyén

Another relatively short and easy day trip from El Bolsón is to Epuyén, just a 40-minute drive south of El Bolsón.

This town is best known for Lago Epuyen, a lake of glacial origins with crystalline blue waters that look out of this world.

People come to a point on the lake known as Puerto Patriada to enjoy a lakeside picnic with a bit of hiking, or even some kayaking.

Epuyén also has a buddhist stuppa, which with the surrounding mountain peaks, will make you feel like you've been transported to Nepal.

Plus it has a brewery and restaurants, so you won't go thirsty or hungry.

El Maitén

El Maitén is a popular day trip from El Bolsón for those wanting to ride aboard the Old Patagonian Express.

While the most famous train route is the one that runs from Esquel to Nahuel Pan, there is another segment that runs from El Maitén to Desvío Bruno Thomaé.

This is a 26 kilometre train journey across the Patagonian steppe.

It’s also worth arriving at the train station early in order to visit the Railway Museum and tour the Locomotive Repair Shop.

You can reserve this excursion at Grado 42, a tour agency that's located right in the centre of town on Avenida San Martín.

Where to stay in El Bolson

El Bolson is no longer the quiet, sleepy, hippie mountain town it once was.

In fact, it draws its fair share of travellers during the summer months when the town's population dramatically soares!

That also means there's no shortage of accommodations, whether you're looking for log cabins or a guesthouse, a geodesic dome or a hobbit home, you can find it all here!

La Aguada - high-end accommodations with mountain views, a swimming pool and a garden, all at the foot of Cerro Piltriquitron.

Casas Chaura - artsy two-story cabins that can fit 2-5 people, located just 6 blocks from the centre of town.

Hostel Cosmo - large family home turned cozy, rustic hostel with a nice garden right downtown!

Camping La Cascada - cool campsite in the outskirts of town next to the botanic garden and waterfall, featuring hobbit homes, tiny cabins, as well as campsites.

Where to eat in El Bolson

A Gusto

If you're travelling in Argentina and you're not vegetarian, you'll want to try the local cuisine, namely asado or parrillada. These names refer to an assortment of cuts of meat cooked on the grill over coals.

A Gusto in El Bolson does grilled meats very, very well!

Try their tablas de carne or meat platters to share. The tabla criolla features some classic cuts like rib eye steak, sirloin steak, pork sausage and blood sausage.

Either make a reservation or show up as soon as they open at 7pm - no Argentine would dine at this gringo hour, so you're almost guaranteed to get a table!

Address: Dorrego 539

Los Lúpulos

This restaurants does amazing pizzas and the best part is that they let you mix and match, so you can choose two different styles on one pizza.

The 'Los Lúpulos Pizza' with tomato sauce, mozzarella, sun-dried tomatoes, basil, Patagonian cheeses and olives was one of our favourites.

Address: Avenida San Martín 2740

El Tablón

This place specializes in pizzas and empanadas. We only tried the empanadas, but they were so good that we came back for more!

A few fillings to try include pancetta y ciruela (bacon and plum), carne cortada a cuchilla (cubed meat with a juicy sauce), and roquefort (blue cheese).

You can dine indoors or on the patio, but they also do take-out in case you're craving a quiet evening and just want to eat back at your place.

Address: Avenida San Martín 2467

Awka Cervecería

Next up, there's Awka Cervecería, a local craft brewery in El Bolson.

What do you feel like drinking? Golden, Kolsh, American IPA, Honey, Oatmeal, Barleywine? They've got it all!

Pair that with a juicy hamburger and a side of loaded potatoes with melted cheddar cheese, bacon and spring onions, and you've got yourself a great meal.

Grab a seat in the outdoor patio, enjoy the music, and soak in the magic of a cool Patagonian evening.

Address: Perito Moreno and Dorrego

Patio Cervecero

This is a popular gathering place in El Bolson to have a few craft beers. They have blonds, reds, stouts, IPAs, honey and even raspberry beers on tap.

You can find a lot of classic Argentine dishes on the menu like milanesa al caballo, a breaded veal cutlet served with ham, cheese, and two fried eggs on top and a mountain of French fries on the side.

Frankfurters with chucrut, and Goulash with Spätzle are a few of their popular dishes.

Basically, hearty and filling food that pairs well with beer!

They offer outdoor seating on a patio as well as indoor seating.

Address: Avenida San Martin and Padre Feliciano

Helados Jauja

Patagonia is known for its artesanal ice creams, and in El Bolson, Helados Jauja is the place to go!

With flavours like Andean chocolate with walnuts, dulce de leche with brownies, and calafate berries with sheep's milk, there's plenty of temptation!

While Jauja has several locations across Patagonia, in El Bolson they also have an onsite cafe where you can enjoy more than just ice cream.

Their menu features sandwiches, pizzas, pastas, cakes, smoothies and a variety of teas and coffees.

Address: Avenida San Martín 2867

Café Paseo de las Flores

Café Paseo de Las Flores looks like something straight out of the shire. It seriously would not look out of place if a hobbit wandered out the front door.

The cafe set in a beautiful secret garden surrounded by all sorts of potted plants, cacti and blooms.

They only open in the afternoons, but it's the ideal place for an afternoon coffee or tea with a nice slice of cake.

In fact, they have a very fancy coffee menu featuring all sorts of concoctions. Want to add Fernet to your coffee? How about some Irish whisky? Or some rum for a more tropical feel? You can get as creative as you like!

Address: Azcuénaga 430

#### Things to Do in El Chalten | A Guide to Argentina's Trekking Capital
Today we're sharing the best things to do in El Chalten and because this is Argentina's trekking capital, that means lots of hiking!

El Chaltén is a small town nestled in the north end of Los Glaciares National Park. Surrounded by epic mountain peaks, granite spires and turquoise rivers, this mountain town has become a favourite destination in Patagonia for outdoor enthusiasts - hikers, rock climbers, rafters, you name it!

Most travellers to El Chalten are looking to catch a glimpse of two of the most iconic peaks: Mount Fitz Roy and Cerro Torre. However, there are loads of trails that lead to glacial lagoons, waterfalls and lookouts where you can see condors. 

El Chalten is a destination that is best combined with a visit to El Calafate, which is the gateway to the Perito Moreno Glacier on the south end of Los Glaciares National Park.  

In this travel guide, we're going to share all the best things to do in El Chalten, and that includes the top hikes, where to eat, where to stay, as well as some non-hiking activities should your legs need a rest in between.

Note: If you only have time for a short visit, this 3-day El Chalten itinerary might be right for you. It covers the main hikes and town highlights.

Getting to El Chaltén

By Air

To reach El Chaltén, you'll first need to fly into the nearest major airport, which is Comandante Armando Tola International Airport (FTE) in El Calafate.  You can fly into El Calafate from Buenos Aires, Bariloche or Ushuaia. From El Calafate Airport, you'll need to travel by bus, car or taxi to El Chaltén. 

By Bus 

Several bus companies operate the route between El Calafate and El Chalten. The bus journey from El Calafate to El Chaltén takes between 2.5 to 3 hours, depending on whether your bus makes a midway stop at La Leona. You can browse ticket prices and departure times on BusBud. 

By Car

If you prefer a more flexible schedule and want to explore the region at your own pace, you can rent a car at El Calafate Airport and drive up to El Chalten. The drive from El Calafate to El Chaltén is approximately 220 kilometres (137 miles) and takes around 2.5 hours, a bit longer if you're stopping for photos along the way and you probably will.

One thing is for sure, the journey to El Chaltén is beautiful with epic landscapes ranging from Patagonian steppe to turquoise lakes and finally, Mount Fitzroy rising on the horizon. 

Things to Do in El Chalten, Argentina

El Chalten is a dream destination for hikers travelling to South America, so of course the main activities revolve around hitting the trails and well as outdoor adventures like rock climbing, rafting, kayaking and horseback riding. 

First, we're going to cover all the main hikes in El Chaltén, and then we'll move on to some of the other non-trekking activities you can enjoy in and around town. 

Laguna de los Tres

Difficulty: Hard

Distance: 24 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 1,068 metres

Time: 8-10 hours

The hike to Laguna de los Tres is one of the most spectacular treks in El Chaltén and for good reason! It leads up to this beautiful glacial lagoon with a glacier and three towering peaks in the background. 

The name Laguna de los Tres translates to 'Lagoon of the Three' and it refers to the three peaks you see behind the lagoon: Fitz Roy (3,405 metres), Poincenot (3,002 metres), and Saint-Exupéry (2,558 metres).

The round trip to Laguna de los Tres is approximately 24 kilometres (14.9 miles). Yes, it is a hardcore day of trekking! The duration of the hike will vary depending on your pace and level of fitness, but it generally takes between 8 to 10 hours to complete.

Laguna de los Tres is considered a challenging hike, not just because of the distance, but because the final kilometre is a steep ascent up a rocky slope that will make you question your choices. Trekking poles are a good idea for this trek.

I was so tempted to throw in the towel and turn around on that final kilometre - I had already been walking for hours, I was tired, and that final climb didn't look like a whole lot of fun. But it was the encouragement from the people trekking down and telling us, "It'll be so worth it!" that kept us motivated. 

Well, once we finally made it over the ridge, it really was all worth it and the effort it took to get there was quickly forgotten. We were rewarded with the most pristine glacial lagoon shimmering a deep blue, a glacier winding down the side of the mountain, and clouds blowing over Mount Fitz Roy and its neighbouring peaks. 

We sought shelter behind a boulder (it was windy up there!), stared at the incredible views in front of us, devoured what we had left of our packed lunch, and gathered our energy for the steep descent and walk back to El Chalten. 

I realize Laguna de los Tres may not be for everyone, considering how demanding it is, so this next trek is an alternative that will still give you spectacular views of Mount Fitz Roy.

Laguna Capri

Difficulty: Moderate

Distance: 8 kilometres round trip 

Elevation gain: 430 metres

Time: 3-4 hours 

The hike to Laguna Capri is a popular and relatively moderate trek and it's on the way to Laguna de los Tres.

The round-trip trek to Laguna Capri is approximately 8 kilometres (4.9 miles), and it usually takes around 3 to 4 hours to complete.

To be honest, the day we hiked to Laguna de los Tres, we were only planning to go as far as Laguna Capri. We got there and had a snack next to the lagoon, but then we realized it was still early in the day, we weren't tired, and if the views were already this epic, it could only get better from here. 

But I digress, Laguna Capri is a beautiful hike in its own right and there's zero shame in making this your final destination. 

The trail winds through diverse landscapes, including forests and open plains, with the stunning backdrop of Cerro Fitz Roy in the horizon. While this hike is considered moderate, some uphill sections require a reasonable level of fitness.

Overall, Laguna Capri is a fantastic way to experience the stunning landscapes of Los Glaciares National Park without the intensity of some of the more challenging treks in the area. Plus, the serene beauty of the lake and the surrounding mountains make it a beautiful place to linger and enjoy the views.

Laguna Capri is a half-day hike, so I would suggest packing a picnic and enjoying a leisurely meal next to the lake. 

Cerro Torre

Difficulty: Moderate

Distance: 17.5 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 501 metres 

Time: 6-7 hours

The hike to Cerro Torre is another iconic trek in El Chaltén offering stunning views of the famous Cerro Torre.

This peak is the highest of a four-mountain chain that also includes Torre Egger, Punta Herron, and Cerro Standhardt.

The round trip to Cerro Torre is approximately 17.5 kilometres (10.8 miles). The duration of the hike varies but usually takes around 6 to 7 hours, depending on your pace and the trail conditions (some stretches can be muddy). It is considered a moderately challenging trek.

You start out hiking through a beautiful valley and you also get to see some waterfalls along the way. 

The majority of the elevation gain happens at the start of the trek, but then things flatten out around kilometre 3.5, which makes it easy to set a steady pace and cover a lot of ground. 

One of the things we enjoyed about this trail was the fact that we could see Torre Glacier in the horizon, which was motivating. Plus we got to hike through forests and along a river, so the scenery was constantly changing. 

The highlight of the Cerro Torre hike is reaching the viewpoint overlooking Laguna Torre, a glacial lake at the base of Cerro Torre. The lake is often dotted with icebergs, and the backdrop of the iconic mountain provides a stunning setting for photography.

The downside of our experience was that by the time we reached the shores of Laguna Torre, clouds had rolled in and they covered Cerro Torre, so we didn't get that iconic view. 

Once you reach Laguna Torre, you can continue a bit further to Mirador Maestri for even better views of the Torre Glacier. 

Loma del Pliegue Tumbado

Difficulty: Hard

Distance: 18.3 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 1,127 metres

Time: 7 hours

Loma del Pliegue Tumbado is a good trek for those seeking a slightly less crowded alternative to some of the more popular trails in El Chaltén - namely Laguna de los Tres and Laguna Torre! 

The trailhead starts at the Visitor Center, same as Mirador de Los Cóndores and Mirador de Las Águilas, except there is a marker indicating you go right. 

You'll hike through scattered forests, then reach a section known as Pampa de las Carretas which is flat, and you'll then continue your ascent until you're past the timberline.

The final push is the hardest and most demanding portion of the hike given the quick elevation gain. It also consists of switchbacks and loose rock.

However, the highlight of Loma del Pliegue Tumbado is reaching the summit and taking in the breathtaking vistas. The final destination is a viewpoint on a ridge that offers 360-degree panoramic views of the surrounding mountains, including Mount Fitz Roy, Cerro Torre, Lake Viedma, Cerro Huemul and the Río Túnel Valley.

Be warned that it can be very windy at the top! The big joke with this hike is, "The only time you don’t go up is when you go down!"

Cerro Huemul Circuit

Difficulty: Very hard

Distance: 66.8 km

Elevation gain: 2,838 m

Time: 4 days

The Cerro Huemul Circuit is a challenging multi-day trek covering 66.8 kilometres on a loop trail where you'll be overnight camping along the way.

This is a technical trek best reserved for experienced hikers as it involves two river crossings (these can be done via pulley or barefoot) and part of the trail is across a glacier! You also need to carry all your own equipment, so if you're unsure, chat with the rangers at the Visitors Centre to see if this trail is for you. 

Day 1 connects El Chaltén with Laguna Toro Camp. Then on Day 2 you continue from Laguna Toro Camp to Paso del Viento Camp. Day 3 brings you from Paso del Viento Camp to Lago Viedma Camp. Finally, on Day 4, you go from Lago Viedma Camp to Bahía Túnel, and you can then either arrange transportation (or hike) back to El Chaltén.

As with many treks in Patagonia, the best time to undertake the Cerro Huemul Circuit is during the Austral summer (December to March). During this period, the weather is more favourable for trekking, with milder temperatures and longer daylight hours, though it can be very windy.

Before embarking on the Huemul Circuit, you must first obtain a permit from the park office Centro de Visitantes Guardaparque Ceferino Fonzo. This can be done in the days leading up to your trek, or the morning of your departure. In order to qualify for the permit, you'll have to demonstrate you have the required gear and also watch a short presentation so you know what to expect from the trek.

This is a good overview of what the Huemul Circuit entails from someone who has actually done the trek.

Easy Hikes in El Chalten

Mirador Rio de las Vueltas

Difficulty: Easy

Distance: 2 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 200 metres 

Time: 1 hour

Mirador de las Vueltas is a short hiking trail that provides views of the Las Vueltas River, which flows to the east of El Chalten.

The trailhead is on the north end of town at the end of Avenida San Martín and it's the same route you would take if you were hiking to Laguna Capri or Laguna de los Tres. 

It's a 30-minute walk to reach the lookout. The trek is mainly uphill, but it's a short walk with beautiful views. Once you reach the lookout, you have wooden benches where you can sit, rest your legs and soak in the landscapes. 

The trail provides impressive views of the Río de las Vueltas Valley, a winding river valley surrounded by rugged mountain terrain.

Mirador de los Cóndores

Difficulty: Easy-Moderate

Distance: 2.6 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 130 metres

Time: 1 hour

The hike to Mirador de los Cóndores is considered easy to moderate, making it suitable for most hikers, including families. 

This is a short 2.6-kilometre round trip hike, and though the uphill climb can be a bit steep in places, the reward is the panoramic view of the town of El Chalten. 

As its name suggests, Mirador de los Cóndores is an excellent place to spot Andean condors flying overhead. These magnificent birds have an impressive wingspan, and they are often seen soaring on the thermal currents in the area.

Aside from spotting condors, from the viewpoint, you can also enjoy panoramic views of El Chaltén, the De Las Vueltas River, and the surrounding peaks including Mount Fitz Roy. On clear days, the vistas are particularly breathtaking.

Because the viewpoint faces west, this is a nice spot to catch sunset over El Chaltén.

The trailhead begins near the entrance to El Chaltén and it's very well-marked, so finding your way will be straightforward.

Mirador de las Águilas

Difficulty: Easy-Moderate

Distance: 5.3 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 215 metres

Time: 2 hours

Mirador de las Águilas is another relatively easy yet rewarding trail, known for its breathtaking views and the opportunity to observe birds of prey, including eagles, which gives the viewpoint its name Eagles' Viewpoint.

This loop trail is 5.3 kilometres in length and it starts at the same trailhead as Mirador de Los Cóndores and it includes a stop at the same viewpoint. 

You then continue east until you reach another lookout point that offers views of the Patagonian steppe, the milky turquoise waters of Lago Viedma, the Viedma Glacier, and the Andes Mountains. 

Because this viewpoint faces east, this is a nice spot to catch sunrise.

Chorrillo del Salto

Difficulty: Easy

Distance: 6.6 kilometres round trip 

Elevation gain: 139 meters

Time: 1.5-2 hours

Chorrillo del Salto is a popular and relatively easy hike in El Chalten. It is 6.6 kilometres round trip on a mostly flat trail, and it can take between 1.5 to 2 hours to complete depending on your pace. 

The trail leads to the Chorrillo del Salto Waterfall, a picturesque and serene spot surrounded by lush forest. The waterfall itself is about 20 meters (65 feet) high and is a beautiful sight, especially after the rainy season when the water flow is at its peak.

The one thing we didn't like about this trail is that most of the hike is on a dirt road, Provincial Route 23, so it doesn't have the same appeal as a forest hike. 

This is a suitable trail for hikers of all levels, including families with children.

There's a parking lot near the waterfall, so if you cannot hike, you can drive there and it's then a short walk to visit the waterfall.

Tips for trekking in El Chalten

Stop by the Visitors Centre. The office is located at the entrance of town and it's a good place to get information on various day hikes and current weather updates. This is also where you register for overnight treks. 

Start the day early if you want to witness sunrise and bring a torchlight so you're not tripping on the trail.

Wear a sturdy pair of hiking boots. While you can get away with sneakers for easy hikes, you'll want a good pair of hiking boots if you're attempting some of the more challenging trails. Also, make sure you've broken in your boots before you arrive in Patagonia!

Pack a pair of trekking poles. These will come in handy for trails with a high elevation gain. 

Dress in layers. Because the weather conditions in Patagonia are constantly changing, it's good to be prepared for all climates. I recommend a quick-drying base layer, a fleece, a weatherproof jacket and hiking pants. Bring a hat to protect yourself from the sun. Depending on the time of year you're visiting you may need a hat, scarf, and gloves.

Bring sufficient water and snacks. Many guesthouses around town offer a packed lunch service you can order the night before. Alternatively, there are small stores around town where you can load up on energy bars, nuts and fruit. 

Wear sunscreen. Even if the weather feels mild, you can still get a sunburn.

Check the weather forecast before embarking on a hike. Intense winds can make certain hikes near impossible to complete. When in doubt, check at the Visitors Centre.

Register for overnight treks. This is mandatory so no hikers are unaccounted for. Share your proposed route and expected date of return at the Visitors Centre. 

Other Things to Do in El Chalten (Not Trekking!)

Now let's move on to some fun things to do in El Chalten that don't involve any hiking! Your legs will probably need a break at some point during your visit, so here are other activities to consider. 

River Rafting Río de las Vueltas

If you're looking for an outdoor adventure that's not hiking, consider kayaking the Río de las Vueltas on a guided tour. 

Río de las Vueltas is a river of glacial origin that is born in Lago del Desierto and flows into Lake Viedma. 

The first 6 kilometres of the river are calm, so it's a good opportunity to enjoy the surrounding scenery (hello Mount Fitz Roy!) and ease into the experience. 

The second part goes through a canyon area. The initial rapid is called Portage (no, you are not getting out of the water and portaging your raft!) followed by a succession of class III to III+ rapids for the next 10 kilometres. Get ready for the adrenaline to start pumping!

Yes, these waters are glacially cold, as you'd expect, but you'll be geared up with a neoprene suit, microfleece, jacket, life jacket, helmet, neoprene boots and mittens. 

Once the descent is finished, a van will be waiting to take you back to the base where you will change and enjoy a snack and a drink to recover your energy.

You can book your river rafting adventure on Río de las Vueltas here.

Kayaking Río de las Vueltas

If you want to hit the water, but rafting sounds a little to extreme, consider kayaking instead. 

For this trip, you'll travel with your guide along Provincial Route 41 until you reach Lago del Desierto or Lake of the Desert. 

Kayaking in these waters means getting decked out in all the necessary gear; in this case a neoprene suit, microfleece, jacket, helmet, life jacket, boots, mittens and paddles. 

The kayaking adventure begins north of El Chaltén in a section of the river that's shallow. From this point, you'll travel 12 kilometres downstream, which will take between 1.5 and 2 hours depending on the river flow and wind conditions. 

Along the way, you'll get to enjoy a unique perspective of Mount Fitz Roy, the Rio de las Vueltas Valley and the Andean forest.

The destination of this kayaking tour is Estancia Bonanza, where you'll have a delicious lunch at the ranch before returning to El Chaltén.

You can book your kayaking trip to Estancia Bonanza here.

Horseback Riding at Estancia Bonanza

Another activity you can enjoy in El Chaltén is horseback riding at Estancia Bonanza. 

This estancia is located 12 kilometres north of El Chaltén and it sits at the foot of Cordón del Bosque, a mountain range that's characterized by its forests, glaciers, rivers and lagoons. 

This horseback riding tour is 2 hours long and it takes you to the most remote corners of the ranch where you can enjoy unspoilt scenery in a corner of Patagonia that not many get to see. 

Two daily horseback riding excursions are available: one in the morning with lunch, and the other in the afternoon with dinner. Hours are adjusted depending on the time of year. 

So if you didn't get your fill of estancia life in El Calafate, you have the opportunity to visit another estancia here in El Chaltén!

You can book your horseback riding excursion at Estancia Bonanza here.

Rockclimbing in El Chaltén

El Chaltén is a popular destination for rock climbing. The Paredón is a giant wall to the east of town overlooking the Las Vueltas River, where you can often see rock climbers.

If you're looking to go with a guide, Mountaineering Patagonia are your people. They offer a single pitch rock climbing outing where you'll tackle routes ranging from grade IV to VI. You'll learn the basic knots, how to belay and rappel. This activity takes around 4 hours and is geared at those in beginner and intermediate levels. 

They also offer a multi-pitch rock climbing full-day outing. The morning is spent on single-pitch routes ranging from grade IV to VI, and in the afternoon you move on to the multi-pitch climb (4-5 pitches) graded IV to V+. This activity takes between 6-8 hours.

Where to Eat in El Chaltén

Senderos

This restaurant is part of Hostería Senderos, a boutique guesthouse in the south end of town, and they serve up some delicious meals. We ate here on two occasions. 

The first night, we tried their blue cheese risotto with walnuts and sundried tomatoes, as well as a lentil stew. This was our celebratory dinner after trekking to Laguna de los Tres. 

We enjoyed the meal so much that we went back another time and had their ñoqui with wild mushrooms and stuffed ravioli in tomato sauce. 

For dessert, we tried the apple pancake with calafate berry ice cream and a chocolate mousse. Both were divine!

La Zorra Taproom

This is another spot in town that we revisited because there's nothing better than a juicy hamburger and a mountain of loaded fries after a long day of trekking! 

La Zorra Taproom is a brewpub and they specialize in hamburgers, pizzas, loaded fries and salads. 

They also craft beer on tap with fun names like Scotch Ale, Passion Summer and Choco Milk.

They're located in the north end of town, so it's very convenient if you've just finished hiking one of the trails in that area. 

Cúrcuma

This is a vegan restaurant in El Chaltén and we visited out of curiosity. Though we are not vegan, we were starting to crave some healthier veggie options after many of months pizza, pasta and parrilla in Argentina. 

We were pleasantly surprised by their quinoa bowl loaded with grilled veggies, and we also had a type of barley bowl with more veggies and alfalfa. 

Their current menu features items like pumpkin risotto, stuffed eggplant, zucchini pasta, and various wraps and salads. Plus loads of smoothies and fresh-squeezed juices. 

La Waffleria

This spot specializes in waffles with savoury and sweet toppings. If you're craving something savoury, you can get waffles with ham and cheese, with bacon and eggs, or with blue cheese and walnuts. 

And if you're craving something sweet, like we were, you have waffles with dulce de leche, with ice cream, or with whipped cream and berries. We got one with scoops of calafate berry ice cream. 

Another cool thing about this restaurant is that they have card games available, so that makes it a nice place to linger. 

Patagonicus

This restaurant is located in the south end of town and specializes in pizzas, soups and salads. The menu is simple but the food is filling. 

They have 15 different pizzas on the menu - Napolitana, Calabresa and Roquefort, to name a few. They even a vegan pizza option. 

This is a convenient location if you're planning to tackle some of the hikes near the Visitors Centre. 

Where to Stay in El Chaltén

Here are three hotels in El Chaltén, representing luxury, mid-range, and budget-friendly categories, each with excellent reviews. 

Hostería Vertical Lodge

This is where we stayed and it's a mid-range option! This guesthouse is located near the entrance of town, so on the south side overlooking the Las Vueltas River and the Paredón, which is the rock climbing wall.

It puts you close to the trailheads for Mirador de los Cóndores, Mirador de las Aguilas, and Loma Del Pliegue Tumbado.

The rooms are very spacious – great for sprawling all our hiking gear! And the bathroom is big with a piping hot shower, which was much appreciated at the end of a long day on the trails. 

Breakfast is buffet style with plenty of sweet and savoury options. They also offer a packed lunch service, which we made use of for our two big days of hiking.

Book your stay at Hostería Vertical Lodge. 

Los Cerros Boutique Hotel & Spa

Los Cerros Boutique Hotel & Spa is a 4-star boutique hotel located in the centre of El Chaltén. Because it sits on a small hill, it offers great views of the town below and the surrounding mountains.  

The hotel has a spa with a hot tub and sauna, plus you can book hot stones massages - ideal for those who want a bit of pampering in between all the hiking. 

Their on-site restaurant serves a combination of Patagonian and international dishes.

Book your stay at Los Cerros Boutique Hotel & Spa.

Hostel Rancho Grande

Hostel Rancho Grande is a ranch-style hostel conveniently located in the north end of town near some of the most popular trailheads like Laguna Capri and Laguna de los Tres. 

The hostel provides mixed dormitories with shared bathrooms and private rooms with en suite bathrooms. Plus, it has a communal kitchen and a social atmosphere. 

It's a budget-friendly option in El Chaltén, popular among backpackers and budget travellers. 

Book your stay at Hostel Rancho Grande.

You can also find luxury glamping domes on the outskirts of town, so that might be one way to cap off your time in El Chaltén! Chalten Camp and Patagonia Eco Domes are two popular choices with travellers.

https://youtu.be/it8h186rx7I

When is the Best time to visit El Chaltén?

Spring (September to November)

Spring brings milder temperatures, and the landscape begins to awaken with blooming flowers. It's a quieter time with fewer tourists. The hiking trails start to become accessible, although some higher-altitude trails may still have snow.

Summer (December to February)

This is the high tourist season with the warmest temperatures. Daylight hours are long, and evenings are pleasant. This is when hiking trails are fully accessible and it's an excellent time for trekking and outdoor activities. 

Fall (March to May)

Fall sees cooler temperatures, and the colours of autumn foliage add a unique charm to the landscape. The crowds diminish compared to the summer season, although it's a popular time of year for photographers to visit El Chalten. Hiking is still viable, although some trails might close later in the season due to snow.

Winter (June to August)

Winter is the coldest season, with snow covering the landscapes. Many facilities and accommodations close during this period. Winter offers a serene and peaceful atmosphere. It's a good time for photographers and those seeking a quieter experience. However, access to some hiking trails will be limited due to snow and ice. If you're interested in specific hikes, check their accessibility during your chosen time at the Visitors Centre.

Ultimately, the best time to visit El Chaltén depends on your interests and the type of experience you seek. If you're a trekking enthusiast, the austral summer months (December to February) offer the most favourable conditions. If you prefer a quieter atmosphere and don't mind some limitations on certain trails, the shoulder seasons of spring and fall can provide a wonderful experience.

Regardless of the season, be prepared for rapid weather changes. Patagonian weather is notoriously unpredictable, and conditions can shift quickly.

Read More:

El Calafate in 2 Days Itinerary

Choosing the Best Perito Moreno Boat Tour

Boat Tour to the Glaciers Aboard Maria Turquesa 

Where to Stay in El Calafate

Fun Day Tours from El Calafate

15 Places to Visit in Patagonia

Patagonia with Gadventures: Choosing the Right Tour

#### 11 Beautiful Estancias Near Buenos Aires for a Weekend Escape!
Searching for estancias near Buenos Aires? This list features 11 beautiful properties for a relaxing weekend escape!

One of my favourite ways to end a visit to Buenos Aires is by booking an estancia stay in the city outskirts. Buenos Aires is a thriving metropolis packed with activities - cafes, restaurants, museums and art galleries! However, it's nice to have the opportunity to unwind after an action-packed trip.

Most estancias near Buenos Aires are located in Buenos Aires Province, which encircles the Autonomous City of Buenos Aires, and many of them are just a 1-2 hour drive away, making them fairly accessible to travellers.

My favourite aspect about estancia stays is slipping into the slow pace of life. You can watch the sunrise over the pampas, go horseback riding through the countryside, enjoy traditional Argentine meals, and all of this in a rustic yet luxurious setting.

Over the years, my husband and I have enjoyed many Buenos Aires estancias on both day trips and overnight stays. We've done even more estancia stays down in Patagonia and it has become our favourite way to travel. 

So today, I've created a list of some of the best estancias near Buenos Aires for you to consider! The idea is to give you a bit of inspiration if you're looking to enjoy that estancia life for yourself. I've already experienced a handful of these and the others are still on the travel bucket list.

Beautiful Estancias Near Buenos Aires

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia Villa María (@estanciavillamaria) 

Estancia Villa Maria

Best estancia for Tudor-style architecture

Estancia Villa Maria is a Tudor-style estancia set in Cañuelas 56 kilometres south of Buenos Aires. It has consistently been ranked one of the top estancias in Argentina and South America!

The estancia sits on 74 hectares and was constructed as a summer villa by renowned architect Alejandro Bustillo, who is responsible for many iconic buildings across Argentina (including the Llao Llao Hotel in Bariloche).

Estancia Villa Maria offers 11 rooms and guests can choose between superior rooms, suites, family and master suites.

The estancia also has its own in-house restaurant where guests can enjoy traditional country recipes, outdoor barbecues and afternoon tea out in the gardens. They even offer cooking classes for guests who want to take some Argentine recipes like empanadas and alfajores back home!

Aside from the gourmet restaurant, guests can also enjoy a private lounge, bar and wine cellar. 

There are lots of activities at Estancia Villa Maria for guests to keep busy including horseback rides, carriage rides, bicycles, a tennis court, an 18-hole golf course, football fields, plus a billiards room with board games.

Polo lessons can be arranged with a prior reservation and at an additional cost.

If you're looking for luxury estancias near Buenos Aires, this one fits the bill!

"The entire place was kind of magical - like being transported back in time. The staff were so helpful and accommodating (particularly given we speak little Spanish). It was more like being house guests at someone’s estate than being at a hotel. Very personalised." - Matthew from the UK
Review via Booking.com 

Book your stay at Estancia Villa Maria.

Address: Avenida Pereda s/n, Máximo Paz, Ezeiza, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Candelaria (@estanciacandelaria) 

Estancia La Candelaria

Best estancia for a French chateaux feel

Estancia La Candelaria is a 200-year-old French castle-style estancia set in Lobos 120 kilometres southwest of Buenos Aires.

While most estancias near Buenos Aires have a colonial look, this one will make you feel like you've been transported to France!

The estancia is divided into two sectors: the chateaux sector and the colonial sector. 

The French-inspired chateaux sector offers 3 different types of rooms all decorated with period furniture: 6 Castle Classic rooms, 3 Castle Suites and 1 Castle Windmill. 

Meanwhile, the colonial sector has more of a country feel. Here guests can choose between 10 Colonial Rooms and 2 Forest Bungalows. This sector is better suited for families or larger groups of friends.  

Some of the daily activities guests can enjoy at Estancia La Candelaria include horse rides, bike rides, forest hikes, tennis courts, volleyball courts, and the outdoor swimming pool during the summer months. 

Aside from this, the estancia also has different activities throughout the week like yoga, movie nights, empanada cooking classes, folklore shows and more.

There is a restaurant on the estancia grounds, 5º CHUKKER, where guests can try typical Argentine foods.

"Romantic, perfect and an absolute treasure in time. Thank you for keeping the history and the beauty of La Candelaria open with us to share. Highly recommend for those who want to get away and slow way down while enjoying a beautiful historical estancia! Special kudos to the chef - the food exceeded expectations and was the best food I had on my entire trip."
Review via TripAdvisor.

Book your stay at Estancia La Candelaria.

Address: Ruta Nacional 205 Km 114,5, Lobos, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia El Ombu de Areco (@estanciaelombu) 

Estancia El Ombú de Areco

Best working estancia for traditional gaucho culture

El Ombú de Areco is a working estancia set in the outskirts of San Antonio de Areco, the town known as the cradle of gaucho culture.

This working ranch has over 300 hectares which are used for grazing cattle; they have 350 heads of Aberdeen Angus livestock. They also grow a variety of crops like soy, corn, wheat and oats depending on the time of year.

The estancia has 11 guest rooms including double, triple and quadruple rooms. They also have interconnecting rooms in case you’re visiting with a large family. The rooms have been lovingly renovated featuring vintage furniture and they each have their own private bathroom.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco offers full board which includes 4 meals a day: breakfast, lunch, afternoon snack and dinner. That means there's no reason to leave the estancia during your stay unless you want to explore the surrounding area.

Activities at the estancia include 2 daily horseback rides. Plus guests can also enjoy bike rides, long walks through the property, and the outdoor pool during the warmer months.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco is a very popular gaucho day trip from Buenos Aires where you can experience a day in the countryside and learn more about traditional gaucho culture. It includes horse riding, a traditional Argentine BBQ, live folk music and dancing, a horse whispering demonstration and more. It's a nice alternative if you want to experience estancia life for a day.

It's a beautiful property with extensive grounds to explore. Plus, this estancia's architecture is simply divine! We loved the friendly estancia dogs and found the staff to be super attentive.

You can check out this accommodations guide if you're specifically looking for estancias in San Antonio de Areco and other unique stays.

"We've previously stayed in estancias in the area, so were able to make a comparison. We found the owner and staff to be very welcoming and keen to accommodate our needs. The home cooked meals were tasty, especially the empanadas and cakes. The rooms were nicely decorated with light colours and were full of character. The horses appeared to be well cared for and, as experienced riders, we were taken on the most fabulous ride through the extensive grassland. My horse was amazingly responsive to the lightest touch. The dogs were a pleasure to have around too." - Claire from Australia 
Review via Hotels.com

Book your stay at Estancia El Ombú de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Cuartel VI, Villa Lía, San Antorio de Areco, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia la Bandada (@labandadaestancia) 

Estancia La Bandada

Best estancia for bird watching

Estancia La Bandada is located in San Miguel del Monte 122 kilometres from Buenos Aires.

The estancia offers accommodations in a 19th century colonial-style house that has been renovated yet retains its traditional charm. There is a maximum capacity of 14 guests so it offers a private and tranquil setting.

There are 3 types of rooms to choose from: one standard double room, two suites, and two two-bedroom apartments. The rooms are all named after different types of birds that can be spotted on the estancia grounds. These include herons, tijeretas, hummingbirds, horneros and cardinals.

Guests can enjoy a variety of activities at Estancia La Bandada like horseback riding, bird watching, cooking classes, bike riding, evening guitar sessions and more.

They also offer 1-hour polo lessons for visitors who may be interested in learning more about this sport. You just need to be able to ride a horse and they can teach you the rest!

"This is a beautiful property inside and out. Large comfortable rooms, wonderful grounds exceptional service. The staff was extremely friendly and eager to please. Agustina was very professional - she took the time to explain all about the property. She showed us around the organic garden, the riding area and told us all about the animals that live there. She made sure meals prepared were to our liking. The ranch is beautifully decorated be it the living room and dining area or the bedroom - simply gorgeous." - Maria from Austria
Review via Booking.com

Book your stay at Estancia La Bandada.

Address: Ruta 41, km 120, San Miguel del Monte, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Puesto Viejo Estancia & PoloClub (@puestoviejo) 

Estancia Puesto Viejo

Best estancia for polo players and a giant labyrinth

Estancia Puesto Viejo is set on 220 hectares of land in Cañuelas 76 kilometres, or less than one hour, from Buenos Aires. 

This particular estancia offers various types of accommodations to suit different budgets. They have a 10-bedroom hotel where all the rooms are named after the owner's favourite polo horses. 

We stayed in the estancia hotel when we visited a few years back. The rooms were decorated with antique furniture including a beautiful wooden armoire, a footboard bench, and a chandelier.

Aside from the hotel, Estancia Puesto Viejo also offers a glamping option. There's a sector of the property where they have built wooden platforms that hold 21 geodomes. Guests can choose between double and triple domes. Just note that the geodomes won't give you access to the swimming pool.

One of the unique draws to this particular estancia is the giant labyrinth - an especially attractive proposition if you're visiting with kids! We had a hard time finding out way out of there!

In terms of activities, there are free bikes to explore the estancia grounds, you can sign up for a short horseback ride, or you can even book a polo lesson. 

Also, we were very well fed for the duration of our stay with 4 meals per day: breakfast, lunch, afternoon tea and dinner!

"Great place for relax and to be in touch with nature. If you are a horse fan there is no better place, no matter your age. 100 times better to connect to the airport than from central BsAs. The staff is great always ready to satisfy any need. Food is amazing!!! My only complaint is that I got used to be woken up by bird's songs in the morning and I don't know how I will manage now without…" - Ed
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia Puesto Viejo.

Address: Ruta Provincial 6, Km 83, Cañuelas, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by La Bamba De Areco Relais & Chateaux (@labambadeareco) 

Estancia La Bamba de Areco

Best estancia for a historic connection

Estancia La Bamba de Areco is a highly acclaimed Relais & Chateaux property located just outside the gaucho town of San Antonio de Areco.

The estancia dates from 1830 making it one of the oldest Argentinian colonial-style estancias in the area. One of the original post houses on the property actually formed part of the Camino Real or Royal Road, an old trade route that connected Buenos Aires with Alto Perú (modern-day Bolivia).

La Bamba de Areco was one of the first estancias to welcome visitors back in the 1980s. It has since been renovated and offers 11 rooms and suites. The decor features dark wooden floors and antique furnishings.

"Our girls trip took us to La Bamba on our recent trip to Argentina. It was such a unique experience -- from the scenery to the horseback riding to the communal meals with people we otherwise would have never met! We definitely recommend this spot for a couple of nights to get out of Buenos Aires and enjoy a very slowed down (little wifi!), relaxing experience. Special shout out to Michaela, Segundo, Jo, and Eduardo for making our experience so special." - Melissa from New York
Review via TripAdvisor

Book your stay at La Bamba de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Km 7.5, San Antonio de Areco, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Madrugada Areco (@estancialamadrugada_areco) 

Estancia La Madrugada

Best estancia for a luxurious and private stay

Another estancia to visit near Buenos Aires is La Madrugada. This is a rather exclusive property with only 3 suites that lead out to a garden, so it's the ideal place to book with a group of friends or family. 

The estancia offers a rural experience with a touch of luxury. The main farmhouse has been renovated to add modern comforts, however, the place still manages to retain its traditional charm.

Meals at Estancia La Madrugada consist of a three-course menu and outdoor barbecues. Ingredients are sourced directly from the organic garden providing guests with a farm-to-table dining experience.

As far as activities go, Estancia La Madrugada offers horse riding, live guitar music by the campfire, and the opportunity to visit the nearby gaucho town of San Antonio de Areco - the town is only 5-kilometres away, so you can even cycle there using the free bikes they provide.

"My wife and I have been to La Madrugada twice now (one on August - winter, and once in the end of November - summer). Both times very different due to the season - but both incredible. This is a small estancia (max 3 bedrooms) so you really feel like you have the entire estancia (ranch) to yourself. All meals are included, food is great, nice wine selection. Entire staff is personalized and very accommodating! We have a 6 month old baby - and the entire staff could not be more helpful. In the winter they have a great space with a fire, very relaxing to play games or read. In the summer they have an enormous pool - plenty of space - beautiful setting. There is also the option to go horseback riding with a professional guide - again all personalized (riding offered at all levels). The estancia itself is an old traditional home that’s been renovated - keeping its old charm and decor but will all the needed modern amenities to stay comfortable (great shower, airconditioning, etc.) If you are looking for a place to relax out in the country side, quiet setting, personalized service - I could not recommend La Madrugada more." - Philip
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia La Madrugada.

Address: Camino del Yameo, San Antonio de Areco, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Sofia (@estancia_la_sofia) 

Estancia La Sofia

Best estancia to play polo

Estancia La Sofia is a boutique hotel and polo ranch situated in Azcuénaga some 130 kilometres west of Buenos Aires. 

La Sofía is a colonial-style ranch that offers six spacious en-suite rooms. Guests can choose from 2 Grand Suites, 2 Superior Suites, and 2 Standard Suites. 

There are plenty of ways to keep busy at this estancia with lots of fun activities on offer. Guests can enjoy horseback riding through the pampas, birdwatching, the outdoor swimming pool, and cooking classes where you can learn to make empanadas, asado and mate.

Polo is a big part of life at this estancia. La Sofia Polo Club is part of the Argentine Polo Association and the club has two polo fields.

Whether you want to practice polo, learn to play, or find out more about a sport, the estancia can organize a special program for you. And if you don't feel comfortable on a horse, of course, you can watch a polo game!

"Our stay was absolutely magical. The place is so charming and feels like a friend’s country house. The chef is incredible and you feel as if you have stumbled upon a wonderful part of Argentinian life. The horses are great to ride for all levels and we (both occasional riders) really enjoyed the polo lesson too. I was skeptical about learning polo since I didn’t think it would be rewarding as a beginner but it was so so much fun. If you are there during a polo match that’s a lovely experience and the pool is great too. A really peaceful oasis, with roaring fires in the evening when it is cold, and Al fresco dining when it is sunny. The hotel only sleeps a small number of guests so is truly boutique and we loved getting to know the other guests as well. Would love to revisit if I am back in Argentina." - Flo
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia La Sofia.

Address: Cuartel VI, Azcuénaga, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia Don Manuel | Cañuelas (@estanciadonmanuel.ok) 

Estancia Don Manuel

Best estancia for polo lessons and clay pigeon shooting

Estancia Don Manuel started out as a polo school back in 1998 and today it has expanded to offer accommodations for guests looking to unwind and enjoy a taste of country life.

They offer a boutique experience that offers privacy and respects guests' desire for rest and relaxation. At full capacity, the estancia can hold a maximum of 36 overnight guests. 

As far as gastronomy goes, Estancia Don Manuel focuses on homemade dishes with an artisanal touch. Portions are abundant and prepared by an internationally-trained chef.

The estancia has a football field, volleyball court, bicycles, a gym, and ample room to enjoy long walks and even do some bird watching. For rainy days or low-key afternoons, there's a clubhouse with board games, pool, table tennis, darts, foosball and more.

Guests can also book additional services like polo lessons, clay pigeon shooting, horseback riding, golfing, tango dancing lessons and more.

"We went for my birthday with a group of 10 people. The service was excellent, Emiliano and Juli made sure everything worked perfectly. Regarding the food, we brought the raw materials and the ranch staff took care of everything, allowing us to relax and enjoy the stay. Amelia was super attentive, she cooked very well for us and adapted to the dietary restrictions of some guests very easily. All the facilities were in very good condition, the beds were very comfortable and there was always someone making sure that the campfires had a fire to maintain the temperature of the common spaces. We were able to take a horse ride in the morning and in the afternoon Emiliano and Sergio took us to another area where they explained to us better how to handle the horse. It was a great experience! I recommend the stay to go with friends or family to spend a few days, the place is beautiful, the service is excellent and the prices are very reasonable." - Ariel
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia Don Manuel.

Address: Ruta 205 Km 59800, Cañuelas, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia Las Marias (@estancialasmarias_) 

Estancia Las Marias

Best estancia for a glamping experience

Estancia Las Marias falls into the glamping category offering some rather unique accommodations! Guests can choose between sleeping in a grain silo or a geodome. Rooms can be arranged to fit a queen-sized bed or two single beds. 

This setup is ideal for visitors who want to enjoy a self-catered holiday. Breakfast is served daily, however, lunch and dinner are up to you! The accommodations come with an electric kettle, an electric oven and a small fridge - you'll want to plan for quick and easy meals, which leave more time for exploring. 

On the premises, guests can enjoy the outdoor swimming pool and sauna, visit the local farm animals (pigs, horses, goats and more!), and spend the evenings around the campfire.

"We had a great stay. I wanted to highlight the attention of Lucas and Ivan, very kind and respectful. In the place you are constantly surrounded by many animals. I also wanted to clarify that the breakfast is very complete, I am celiac and they had prepared a variety of options. The dome was properly equipped, with a stoker outside, which was illuminated for the night. Thank you so much! We had an excellent day." - Angie
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia Las Marias.

Address: Marcos Paz, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by 𝐸𝓈𝓉𝒶𝓃𝒸𝒾𝒶 𝒟𝑜𝓃 𝒫𝑒𝒹𝓇𝑜🇦🇷 (@estanciadonpedro) 

Estancia Don Pedro

Best estancia for families with children

Estancia Don Pedro sits in the locality of Solis 96 kilometres northwest of Buenos Aires. 

Guests can choose from 4 different types of rooms: master suites, double suites, quadruple suites and quintuple suites. 

This estancia offers complete room and board with 4 daily meals: breakfast, lunch, merienda and dinner. Dinner consists of a 3-course fixed menu.

Estancia Don Pedro has a relaxed and family-friendly environment. It's well suited for stays with children as they have farm animals guests can visit and ample room to play and roam.

Pets are welcome at this estancia though they must be on a leash and accompanied by their owners at all times. There are other dogs and farm animals at the estancia, not to mention guests and children, so that's something to be mindful of.

"Excellent place, attention and delicious food and super original menu. We also really liked the tranquility of the place and the fact that it was more exclusive than other estancias." - Agustina from Argentina
Review via Booking.com

Book your stay at Estancia Don Pedro.

Address: Ruta Nacional 8 Km 94, Solis, Buenos Aires Province 

Travel tips for choosing an estancia near Buenos Aires

Book an estancia for the end of your trip. This is such a nice way to unwind after a busy itinerary in Buenos Aires. Two nights at an estancia is the perfect way to pamper yourself before hopping on a flight home. As a bonus, a lot of these Buenos Aires estancias are near Ezeiza International Airport. 

Not all estancias are created equal. You'll hear this over and over again! We've done enough estancia stays across Argentina to attest to that. The estancia experience will vary from one establishment to the next. Some estancias only serve breakfast while others provide four meals per day. Certain estancias include activities while others charge an additional fee for things like horse riding or polo lessons. There are estancias geared towards couples and estancias better suited to accommodate families.

Choose an estancia based on your interests. Many Buenos Aires estancias have a focus, whether it be showcasing gaucho culture, horseback riding, or polo lessons. Meanwhile, if you venture further down to Patagonia, you can find estancias that specialize in fly fishing or game hunting. Estancias in Mendoza featuring wine tastings and vineyard visits. While estancias in Cordoba are a great introduction to gaucho culture in the sierras. So there's something out there for everyone.

You can find estancias all over Argentina. If you enjoy the estancia experience, seek them out on the rest of your travels across Argentina! You can find loads of estancias in Patagonia. One of our favourites is Estancia Tecka for fly fishing and unmatched service. Meanwhile, if you're visiting El Calafate, Estancia Nibepo Aike is a fun estancia for a taste of ranch life. You can also find loads of estancias in Córdoba up in the sierras, Mendoza and the Iberá Wetlands. Or try something different like glamping across Patagonia!

Book a Día de Campo to visit for the day. If an overnight stay at an estancia is not in your budget, you can consider visiting for the day. Many estancias near Buenos Aires offer a Día de Campo or 'countryside day' where you visit for the day, learn about gaucho culture and have an Argentine BBQ for lunch. This estancia day tour is one of the most popular day trips from Buenos Aires and it's also highly rated!

#### Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0: Original, Classic and Alternative Portfolio Ideas!
I have a serious confession to make: Writing isn't my cup of tea!

It's odd to admit that given the fact that I run this blog, but it's the honest truth.

And since I took a trip to Patagonia last spring, I've fallen deep down the AI rabbit hole to the point where I've fiercely neglected this site with fresh forward facing content.

Once you've broken a habit (that was challenging to build in the first place) it's especially hard to get back on the saddle as resistance mounts the more you procrastinate; it's a vicious cycle.

However, I've been meaning to write an update to the model Picture Perfect Portfolio for several months.

I'm finally parking my arse down on the computer chair, turning off social media and henpecking away until this post gets done.

My first stab at creating the Picture Perfect Portfolio was my third blog post on this site!

I started off with reviews of UPAR and GDE and then somehow mustarded up the audacity to create my unique version of what I at the time considered to be the Picture Perfect Portfolio.

The first problem was that this portfolio wasn't investable.

The idea of an equal parts equities (global min vol), bonds (long-term treasury and TIPs) and alternatives (managed futures and gold) portfolio (targeting a 180% canvas) was my desired goal given the investing knowledge I had back in April 2022.

But it was unattainable.

The capital efficient product range was in its infancy back then.

Moreover, my understanding and comprehension of various alternative strategies was quite limited as well.

I've since expanded my knowledge on how different strategies such as style premia, arbitrage, long-short + market neutral equity and diversified tail-risk hedging can help investors build a more efficient, robust and resilient portfolio where the opportunity for excellent returns and stellar risk management collide.

All of this has corresponded with the golden age of capital efficient product development.

2023, in particular, was its coming out party!

We now we have the capacity to build the expanded canvas portfolios of our dreams.

And I'm excited to share some different potential combinations.

That brings me to the second problem with the original Picture Perfect Portfolio.

It was designed specifically for me as an accumulator and self-employed individual.

It reflects all of my personal biases, current life situation, retirement trajectory, dreams and aspirations that are unique to my life.

However, there is no such thing as the objective Picture Perfect Portfolio!

There is only the Picture Perfect Portfolio that is right for you based on your unique life circumstances, risk tolerance, unique personality quirks and overall investing knowledge.

What works for you may not work for me. And vice versa.

You may have a tremendous appetite for volatility, whereas I don't.

It's crucial to acknowledge that.

And with this in mind, I've decided to be audacious, once again, and take a stab at creating 10 different model portfolios that involve expanding the canvas.

These are the official Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 version.

They are benchmarked to various classic and alternative portfolios.

Some of these are my own original ideas whereas others are merely enhanced classic portfolios.

We'll also be covering how to mimic some fascinating alternative portfolios (with some compromises) and we'll even have one that is not handcuffed to a benchmark!

If that sounds exciting let's begin the journey by looking at the big picture.

The Big Picture For Investors

As investors we're faced with the daunting task of seeing the big picture.

Unlike in other endeavours we pursue in life, we're presented with the challenges of potential lost decades for mainstream investing strategies (hello, US large cap MCW equities in the 2000s) and alternative ones too (the pain game for managed futures in the 2010s).

You're expected to hold on tight.

Imagine having to be THAT PATIENT in other areas of your life?

Hey, your workout program might not give you ANY desirable results for an entire decade!

But you had better stick with it long-term if you want to see the intended long-term results.

WTF.

Imagine that?

It truly sounds hilarious.

Who would be willing to endure such stagnation?

Probably, no one.

Yet, as investors we're faced with that exact possibility and specific scenario if we put all of our eggs in one basket.

Lost decades.

Challenging underwater periods that last months and years.

One of our only lifelines against eventually running up against this friction is to diversify our assets across a diverse set of unique risk sources.

As the popular saying goes (I actually have no idea who first said it), the only free lunch in investing is diversification.

And so I've built my entire philosophy of investing around this framework.

1-2-3 Approach To Portfolio Construction

Given the unique challenges investors face today (and in the past) I've come up with a 1-2-3 approach to portfolio construction in this specific order:

Capital Efficiency

Maximum Diversification

Optimization (When Possible)

To better explain this let me give you a few specific examples.

I'd prefer a fund like AVGV over SPY given that it is globally diversified and tilts towards a research supported optimization strategy (value factor) versus the market cap weighted and home country biased US equity only strategy.

Using our 1-2-3 step process of comparing funds we're able to score points on number 2 (maximum diversification by this strategy being global vs US-only) and number 3 (optimization by tilting towards a research supported factor strategy) where we have an obvious winner in AVGV ETF.

Here we're comparing apples to apples.

However, things become a bit more complicated when we compare this fund with something like GDE ETF.

This is an apples to oranges scenario.

Its exposure offers investors 90% equities plus 90% gold futures.

Although AVGV is global (diversification benefit) and optimized (value) it only provides investors exposure to one strategy (equities) and furthermore it is not capital efficient.

Thus, by the framework that I use for portfolio construction I have a preference for GDE even though it only offers US equity exposure because it brings the uncorrelated alternative of gold into the equation of my portfolio in a capital efficient manner.

Hence, it scores points on capital efficiency and maximum diversification (two uncorrelated strategies) which I rank ahead of optimization (value tilt).

Now if a fund were created with AVGV at 90% and gold futures at 90%, I'm going to say sayonara to GDE.

The goal here is to expand our canvas to create as much space as possible for diversification.

We're able to fulfill all of our different portfolio mandates by using this formula.

We can construct defensive portfolios, offensive portfolios, tactical portfolios and everything in between by adhering to this process.

It's the ultimate form of flexibility to have access to a bigger canvas to paint our unique portfolio masterpiece.

I encourage you to stress test this formula (when it comes to portfolio construction) and if it doesn't work for you, consider applying a system that does.

Having a clear set of priorities and a decision-tree for making portfolio decisions is a blessing IMO as opposed to being a curse.

It helps you evaluate new funds and make decisions such as whether or not to potentially integrate them into your portfolio, axe/shrink others or hold off and evaluate further.

Asset Classes/Strategies: Big Picture

I briefly touched upon the importance of being able to see the big picture as an investor.

Well, what exactly do I mean by that?

It's the ability to view all of the potential strategies you may (or may not) want to add to your portfolio and to view them as a whole (portfolio level) as opposed to individual line items (individual parts of the portfolio).

If you're not able to do this, the chances of you sticking with these strategies, when they inevitably struggle, is slim at best.

This especially holds true for alternatives.

We'll forget a lost decade for US equities with enough distance in the rearview mirror but somehow our leash for alternatives tends to be much shorter.

For instance, feast your eyes upon the results of Long-Vol in 2008.

This was the most impressive strategy during the most challenging year for global financial markets in the past 50 years.

Did it ever pay-off to have committed some resources to this strategy in your portfolio back then!

But then look at how it bleeds out in the 2010s.

This is the nature of such a strategy.

Are you willing to hold on and rebalance diligently?

How are you doing to handle tracking error when your alternative sleeve is a drag versus a benefit on any given year?

Minimum volatility equities is another one worth careful examination.

Its defensive nature is not exciting with lower highs and lower lows.

It's almost like someone accidentally sat on your sandwich.

It compresses things.

But without fail it's been more defensive (relatively outperforming SPY) during years such as 2000, 2001, 2002, 2008, 2018 and 2022.

What you may also notice is that many alternative strategies thrived during the tumultuous 2000s and struggled in the 2010s.

It's only by zooming out that you can examine things with clarity.

Who knows what the future holds but the ability to step back and look at things from a distance is an incredible gift you can give yourself as an investor.

About the Author & Disclosure

Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.

Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

Picture Perfect Portfolio(s) 2.0 Version

Okay, enough rambling already, let's get to those portfolios!

So what we're going to do is explore 10 different capital efficient portfolios.

They range from being as defensive as possible (The Fortress) to bringing out the big guns trying to outperform equities with less risk (SPY Hunter).

Here's the complete list of them along with their corresponding benchmarks (note: one doesn't have one!).

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 

Picture Perfect Portfolio Originals 

The Fortress Portfolio (Benchmark: 40/60)

SPY Hunter (Benchmark: S&P 500)

Max D Triple P (Benchmark: 60/40)

The Honey Badger (Benchmark: VT)

The Contrarian (Benchmark: None!)

Canucklehead (Benchmark: 60/40 for Canadians)

These are the Picture Perfect Portfolio(s) originals.

If they have one thing in common it is this:

An attempt by an amateur investor to create serious portfolios with absolutely ridiculous names. 

Enhanced Classic Portfolios 

These are the enhanced classic portfolios.

I attempt, as best as possible, to keep all of their parts together (their original configurations) whilst expanding upon them with capital efficiency and increased diversification strategies.

Enhanced Ray Dalio Portfolio (Benchmark: Classic Ray Dalio Portfolio)

Enhanced Harry Browne Portfolio (Benchmark: Classic Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio)

My goal is to write detailed posts for all of the original portfolios listed above.

This is the abbreviated version.

Otherwise, we'd likely hit some ridiculous word count over 10,000.

And I do value your time, so I'll try to keep things as concise as possible.

The Fortress Portfolio

Defending and preserving wealth requires an advanced skillset as an investor.

Instead of obsessing over enhanced offensive equity optimization strategies, the focus is more on defensive assets and layering uncorrelated bets into what is overall a complex system that you've developed.

The ability to defend is what this portfolio is all about.

Hence, I've come up with the quirky title of it being "The Fortress Portfolio".

Close your eyes and imagine a medieval fortress that looks slightly haunted and that features an enormous misty moat.

It looks impenetrable and intimidating from a distance but as you get closer you notice it has all kinds of layers of defense that you didn't initially spot.

Archers hidden behind pillars.

Crocodiles lurking in the waters.

You've traveled back in time and you've got nothing but a small dagger in your hand.

Good luck getting in there.

There are a plethora of defensive strategies that are designed to keep you out.

If you get past one, you have to immediately contend with another.

That's what's going on here.

Do you even bother trying?

The Fortress Portfolio Funds

20% USML - ETRACS 2x Leveraged MSCI US Minimum Volatility Factor ETN40% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF10% BTAL - AGF U.S. Market Neutral Anti-Beta Fund ETF10% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF (MF conversion form AVOLX)10% FLSP - Franklin Systematic Style Premia ETF10% GLD - SPDR Gold Shares

The Fortress Portfolio Exposures

40% US Min Vol Equities40% Aggregate US Bonds40% Managed Futures Trend10% Market Neutral Anti-Beta10% OTM Put10% Style Premia10% Gold

The portfolio is basically an equal slice version of the following:

40% Equities40% Bonds40% Managed Futures40% Diversified Alternative Other

Canvas: 160%

Benchmark: 40/60 Portfolio

What we're trying to accomplish here is to keep our equity sleeve (typically the most volatile part of the portfolio) tamed by reducing its exposure to 40% whilst choosing a defensive equity optimization strategy (min vol).

We'll handcuff this to an equal slice of bonds and managed futures.

Bonds have typically provided a ballast during market downturns (2022 aside) and managed futures is one of the most reliable defensive strategies during times of turmoil.

Moreover, we've got diversified tail-risk hedging strategies (BTAL and CAOS) providing anti-beta market neutral and OTM Put exposure.

Finally, we've got some space committed for the OG uncorrelated alternative (Gold) which admittedly does its own thing and FLSP (style premia) which offers absolute return potential.

The end result is seven distinct strategies aimed at reducing volatility.

Let's throw this into a blender and see how it backtests.

You'll notice we've had to utilize funds such as PQTIX and AVOLX to get a taste of how managed futures and style premia performed since FLSP and RSBT are newer. But other funds like AVOLX (now CAOS) and BTAL and GLD can be stretched back to 2014.

CAGR: 7.94% vs 5.24%RISK: 7.12% vs 7.27%Worst Year: -1.80% vs -15.08%Max DD: -7.26% vs -18.20%Sharpe: 0.98 vs 0.61Sortino: 1.78 vs 0.90Correlation: 0.42 vs 0.93

Backtests ought to be taken with a grain of salt but if we're to examine the performance of these results it's a convincing win across the board.

The Fortress Portfolio has provided better returns, better risk adjusted rates of returns and enhanced volatility management over the 40/60 portfolio.

Its Sortino triumph may be the most telling of all.

Here is the drawdown simulation.

Here we're able to notice that the Fortress Portfolio was better able to handle the curveballs thrown during the initial stages of the pandemic (March 2020) and the massacre of 2022.

The goal of this portfolio is to provide decent returns whilst focusing on stellar defense; outperformance is merely a bonus (when it happens).

Here is the portfolio with live funds:

We're limited to the most abbreviated of backtests unfortunately!

Some of these awesome funds are hot off of the press including RSBT and CAOS (mutual fund conversion).

Although returns have been less than extraordinary it has flashed its risk management potential.

With a Stdev of 5.54% and Max Drawdown of -2.94% it provided fortress like defense without any offensive jam to date.

It'll be interesting to check back in on this portfolio in a year or two to see how it is performing.

SPY Hunter (Tactical) Portfolio

Our task is clear: Take Out SPY ETF (better known as the S&P 500)

We've been given a mandate of outperforming SPY on the upside whilst also potentially providing superior downside coverage.

Does that sound like a tall order?

Probably.

That's not going to stop us from trying.

We're all in on hunting down SPY.

Hence, the cheesy name of this portfolio: SPY HUNTER

You can think of this strategy as the bounty hunter equivalent of tracking down the most popular investing strategy of them all: MCW US Large Cap Equities.

Our plan of attack is to utilize capital efficient funds, diversify as much as possible, get a little tactical and also tail-hedge risk as the cherry on top.

Hence, we've got a nifty offensive mode and defensive mode configuration.

SPY Hunter Funds

40% RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF20% SPQ - SPQ Simplify US Equity PLUS QIS ETF20% HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced US Equity Strategy ETF10% GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund5% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF5% BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund

SPY Hunter Portfolio Exposures

Offensive Mode

109% US Equities40% Managed Futures10% Style Premia9% Gold5% Market Neutral Anti-Beta5% OTM Put

Defensive Mode

69% US Equities40% Managed Futures20% Cash10% Style Premia9% Gold5% Market Neutral Anti-Beta5% OTM Put

This portfolio hinges on the split personality of HCMT ETF which offers investors an all in or nothing approach (200% US equities or 100% Cash based on trend).

When in offensive mode we've stretched our equities beyond the 100% threshold (109% to be precise) and added a diverse range of diversifiers.

In defensive mode SPY Hunter retreats to the safety of 69% equities and has defensive assets such as managed futures and style premia (with absolute return potential), cash and two different tail-risk strategies.

Hence, we're going all in on attempting to outperform on both sides of the equation: offensive AND defensive

Canvas: 177% Offensive or 157% Defensive

Benchmark: SPY ETF (S&P 500)

You know what time it is!

Bring on the backtest...

Creating an offensive and defensive mode backtest wasn't the easiest of challenges!

What you'll notice is PQTIX representing the managed futures of RSST, AQR style premia covering SPQ (with its multi-strategy QIS approach) and SSO representing 2X HCMT.

In order to keep CASHX in the defensive portfolio I had to use BIL to simulate borrowing costs.

I'm not sure if this is the best way to do things. If you have suggestions for an improvement I'm all ears!

CAGR: 14.00% vs 10.99% vs 10.68%RISK:  15.32% vs 9.91 vs 15.23%Worst Year: -13.41% vs -5.04% vs -18.17%Max DD: -17.15% vs -8.96% vs -23.98%Sharpe: 0.87 vs 1.01 vs 0.68Sortino: 1.45 vs 1.79 vs 1.05Correlation: 0.94 vs 0.87 vs 1.00

I have to admit the results here totally melted my brain.

I DID NOT think that in defensive mode this strategy could potentially outperform SPY on its own.

And it did.

Wow!

Basically, this relieves pressure on HCMT fund to tactically tune itself  in a manner that is the winning difference.

It's more like the whipping cream and cherries on top of the cake.

It's the victory lap.

In offensive mode we can probably expect similar volatility to SPY with significant outperformance potential.

In defensive mode, we're looking more at 60/40 levels of volatility with potentially better defense.

And here are the correlations between all of the strategies.

I'd love to test this with live funds but SPQ ETF is super wet behind the ears.

I'll circle back later to do that when it makes more sense.

Max D Triple P

Next up we've got Max D Triple P!

I wish there was some clever story behind this portfolio but there simply isn't.

It's just the Maximum Diversification Picture Perfect Portfolio (Max D Triple P) which attempts to offer investors the typical exposure of a 60/40 portfolio with a dessert style sampler size of alternatives added to its back vis-a-vis pack-mule style.

Max D Triple P Funds

20% RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% SPQ - Simplify US Equity PLUS QIS ETF10% RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF10% GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Fund4% ARB - AltShares Merger Arbitrage ETF4% EQLS - Simplify Market Neutral Equity Long Short ETF4% SVOL - Simplify Volatility Premium ETF4% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF4% FBTC - Fidelity Advantage Bitcoin ETF

Max D Triple P Portfolio Exposures

59% Equities40% Bonds30% Managed Futures10% Multi-Strategy QIS9% Gold4% Arbitrage4% Market Neutral Equities4% Short Vol4% OTM Put4% Bitcoin

I kind of like that this portfolio doesn't quite hit the 60/40 targeted configurations.

Sticklers may be pulling their hair out over the 59% equities (versus the 60% targeted allocation) but from my point of view that's just freakin' hilarious.

Also, feel free to swap out Bitcoin for something else (FLSP / BTAL / etc).

I know that is a deal breaker for some.

The idea is to just dip our toes in the cryptocurrency waters without any shitcoin residue as opposed to taking the polar plunge.

I like that we're not relying on any one particular alternative strategy to do all of the heavy lifting.

This is a 10 fund / 10 strategy portfolio!

It's the most complicated of them all but offers a plethora of unique strategies.

Canvas: 168%

Benchmark: 60/40 Portfolio

I'm going to refrain from doing a simulated backtest with this portfolio because we're up to nearly 3500 words at this point!

I'll circle back with a live fund backtest sometime next year.

The Honey Badger

The Honey Badger is pound for pound one of the toughest customers on this planet.

Have you seen what it is capable of doing?

It's our spirit animal attempt to tackle the biggest shortcoming of an all-equity portfolio.

Those jaw-dropping drawdowns!

Instead of being left to its own devices with the potential to be blindsided by a -50% 2008 tackle it attempts to better manage risk and volatility without compromising returns.

Unlike other portfolios we're not going to cheat by adding uncorrelated asset classes and strategies.

Here we've got to do things with equity only strategies: long, long-short, market-neural and tactical approaches.

The Honey Badger Funds

30% ACWV - iShares MSCI Global Min Vol Factor ETF30% QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund20% HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced US Equity Strategy ETF10% BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund10% VMNIX - Vanguard Market Neutral Fund

Here we're choosing pound for pound (er...I mean return per unit of risk) two of the top equity strategies.

Min Vol and L/S equity.

Between the two of them we're diversifying and improving our risk adjusted rates of returns.

Let's compare the backtest results to our benchmark VT.

We've more than achieved our goals right here!

We've shaved down volatility by nearly 500 bps and improved our Sortino Ratio by 50 bps!

Our goal with this portfolio isn't outperformance; it's better risked adjusted performance.

Why not just be over and done with it?

Because I still think we can slightly improve returns, risk management and the absolute return potential of this portfolio.

In order to do this, we're bringing back our tactical friend HCMT into the mix.

We're not using it to boost our offensive prowess but instead to buy ourselves more defensive diversification by adding absolute return M/N style funds.

Let's test that out.

We're using SSO ETF to simulate the results of HCMT when its in offensive mode and CASHX for when it reverts to defensive mode.

CAGR: 10.13% vs 6.13% vs 7.99%RISK: 10.25% vs 5.61% vs 14.94%Worst Year: -6.67% vs -5.72% vs -18.01%Max DD: -17.16% vs -9.04% vs -25.52%Sharpe: 0.87 vs 0.86 vs 0.50Sortino: 1.34 vs 1.39 vs 0.75Correlations: 0.87 vs 0.55 vs 0.97

That's more like it! We've boosted risk adjusted rates of returns with this upgrade.

I'm quite pleased with the results.

This portfolio is doing what it is supposed to (vol management: 10.25% to 5.61%) whilst offering better risk adjusted rates of returns (Sortino: 1.34 to 1.39).

Now let's see how it handles drawdowns.

The Honey Badger is playing some stingy defense!

Especially in defensive mode.

We'll take it.

Now let's explore correlations between funds to see the magic of diversification.

Things work so well with this portfolio because of the correlations of these funds.

It's why I keep harping on about diversification.

The Contrarian

Have you ever imagined blowing your benchmark to smithereens and pursuing portfolio construction without a roadmap?

I sure have!

And this is my attempt to shake the shackles and break free from it all.

Libre!

Instead of being hyper-fixated on long-only stocks and bonds we'll do something completely different.

Our primary strategy will feature a fund that offers managed futures as its core strategy.

Our secondary strategy will be a long-short equity fund.

Our third and fourth strategies will include a diverse mix of alternatives from two of the best in the game!

AQR and Stone Ridge.

This, my friends, is the Contrarian Portfolio.

Let's go!

The Contrarian

40% BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund20% QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund20% QDSIX - AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund20% SRDAX - Stone Ridge Diversified Alternatives Fund

Here we're making the most of capital efficiency to bring you managed futures, long-short equity, long-only equity and two different 6-1 alternative strategies.

It's as diverse of a portfolio as you can put together with only four funds.

And it has the most impressive backtest of them all.

Here is how it has performed as far as we can roll back the clock.

I know I said this portfolio has no benchmarks...but does that mean we can't delight in its massacre over the 60/40?

Do I think we're in store for 14.20% CAGR and a 3.61 Sortino moving forward?

No, definitely not.

But what this portfolio has shown is that it can thrive during periods of market turmoil and stress.

It's certainly ruffled its contrarian feathers.

I'm anticipating excellent risk adjusted rates of returns on a long-term basis with all of the diversification we've got under one hood.

I'm personally looking forward to seeing its results in the future.

The Canucklehead

Did you know Canuck is slang for Canadian?

And well who could resist adding 'head' to the equation to compete with the Bogleheads.

Hence, the Canucklehead.

This one is for us Canadians.

We have access to US listed ETFs (not mutual funds) but we've got some great funds of our own north of the border!

Let's show them off.

The Canucklehead

40% AOFT - Auspice One Fund Trust15% HRAA.TO - Horizons ReSolve Adaptive Asset Allocation ETF15% ONEC.TO - Accelerate OneChoice Alternative Portfolio ETF15% PFAA.TO - Picton Mahoney Fortified Alpha Alternative Fund15% VEMA - Viewpoint Enhanced Global Multi-Asset Trust

You could describe these five funds as super diverse multi-asset strategy funds.

The Auspice One Fund Trust is the centrepiece here given it provides investors capital efficient exposure to equities, bonds and gold with an additional 100% layer of CTA on top.

HRAA is a risk parity fund with a capital efficient diverse ensemble of bespoke multi-strategy layers added to the mix.

ONEC is a masterclass in diversification between strategies such as long-short equities and arbitrage just to name a few.

PFAA is a fortress for managing volatility with its arbitrage, special situations and market neutral approach.

Viewpoint Enhanced Multi-Asset levers multi-assets to equity level volatility.

In tandem we've got exposure to equities, bonds, managed futures, gold, commodities, style premia, long-short equity, market neutral equity and more!

I'm not able to backtest this on portfolio visualizer (they don't take Canadian mutual funds) but you can check out the performance of these funds on Manulife mutual fund checker.

So we'll leave things here.

We're now done with the Picture Perfect Portfolio Originals.

Enhanced Ray Dalio Portfolio

Are you a fan of the Ray Dalio portfolio?

It's one of the most defensive classic configurations.

40% Long-Term Treasury30% Equities15% Int-Treasury7.5% Gold7.5% Commodities

But that doesn't mean it can't be improved.

Here's how you can potentially do just that.

Enhanced Ray Dalio Portfolio Funds

15% USML - ETRACS 2x Leveraged MSCI US Minimum Volatility Factor TR ETN55% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF7.5% COM - Direxion Auspice Broad Commodity Strategy ETF7.5% GLD - SPDR Gold Shares ETF5% QIS - Simplify Multi-QIS Alternative ETF5% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF5% BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund

Exposures:

30% Min-Vol Equities55% Bonds55% Managed Futures Trend7.5% Gold7.5% Commodities (long-flat)5% Multi-Strategy QIS5% OTM Put5% M/N Equity

Here we've fulfilled the Ray Dalio portfolio mandate (equities, bonds, commodities, gold) and made room for managed futures, multi-strategy QIS, OTM Put and M/N Anti-Beta.

I'd argue we've upgraded our equity sleeve (defensive equities) and long-flat commodities (less volatile than long-only) but I'll let you be the judge of that.

We're not able to get the exact treasury configuration but with aggregate bonds I think it's a decent substitute.

Let's try to backtest this:

Here is the performance summary results:

CAGR: 7.80% vs 4.47%RISK: 7.37% vs 8.67%Worst Year: -2.38% vs -18.39%Max Drawdown: -6.40% vs -20.58%Sharpe: 0.87 vs 0.40Sortino: 1.45 vs 0.58

I'd love to be able to roll the clock back further but COM ETF trips us up so we'll start in 2017.

The portfolios track each other almost perfectly until 2022.

The challenging results of 2022 is what can happen when your portfolio is composed of long-only assets.

Enhanced Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio

A lot of folks are impressed by the Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio with high degrees of praise for its simplicity, balance and ego-free diversification.

Myself included.

Its equal 25% slices ensure nothing in the portfolio is causing too much damage at any given moment in time.

It's also one of the most defensive (if not the most) classic portfolios.

25% Equities25% Bonds25% Gold25% Cash

Boom!

There it is.

Easy to understand and even easy to assemble.

Let's try to enhance it!

Enhanced Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio Funds

52.5% GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Fund47.5% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF

Exposures:

47.25% Equities47.25% Gold47.50% Bonds47.50% Managed Futures Trend

This is the only two fund portfolio in our entire series.

But don't be confused by its easy to assemble nature because it provides powerful diversification between four distinct strategies.

How we've modified it is by punting out cash for managed futures.

Over a long enough time horizon managed futures should deliver higher returns and provide better defense than cash.

At least, that's historically been the case.

Let's test it out.

And here is the performance summary:

CAGR: 10.10% vs 5.19%RISK: 11.33% vs 7.30%Worst Year: -11.23% vs -12.53%Max Drawdown: -14.06% vs -15.92%Sharpe: 0.79 vs 0.55Sortino: 1.46 vs 0.91

By significantly boosting our capital efficiency and swapping out cash for managed futures we pretty much crush the classic configuration from a returns/risk standpoint.

It's a massive CAGR win and our worst year and maximum drawdown improves too.

Managed futures is the secret weapon here providing crisis alpha on demand.

FAQ: Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 — Original, Classic & Alternative Portfolio Ideas

1) What do you mean by “expanded canvas” or “capital-efficient” portfolios?“Expanded canvas” means using funds that provide more than 100% notional exposure (e.g., 60% stocks + 60% bonds in one fund) or stack an uncorrelated strategy (like managed futures) on top of core assets. The goal is to pack more diversified return streams into the same dollar, not to take wild directional bets.

2) Why prioritize diversification and capital efficiency before “optimization”?In this framework, the order is: (1) capital efficiency, (2) maximum diversification, (3) optimization (factors/timing). Uncorrelated return streams reduce total portfolio volatility and drawdowns; only then do factor tilts (e.g., value/min-vol) and tactical overlays compound the benefits.

3) How should I read the backtests and tables in this article?They are hypothetical and limited by available live fund history; they illustrate how sleeves might have behaved together. Treat them as educational scenario analysis—useful for understanding diversification mechanics, not as forecasts or guarantees.

4) Who is “The Fortress” portfolio for?Investors who prioritize defense and smoother equity rides, want multi-layered downside management (bonds, managed futures, tail risk, anti-beta, gold, style premia), and are comfortable with a 160% canvas targeting lower drawdowns than a vanilla 40/60.

5) What’s the idea behind “SPY Hunter (Tactical)”—and why two modes?It seeks to outperform SPY with similar or lower risk by stacking equities with diversifiers (managed futures, style premia, anti-beta, tail risk) and letting a tactical sleeve toggle between offense (levered equity) and defense (cash) based on trend. The two modes reflect that built-in regime shift.

6) Why build “Max D Triple P” if it’s close to 60/40 anyway?It’s a 60/40-ish core with a sampler of alternatives (managed futures, QIS, long-short, arbitrage, short-vol, tail-risk, a small Bitcoin sleeve). The punchline: breadth beats precision—one more uncorrelated sleeve can matter more than hitting 60.00% on the nose.

7) What problem does “The Honey Badger” solve without leaving equities?It targets better risk-adjusted returns using equity-only tools: min-vol, long–short, market-neutral, and a tactical equity sleeve. That equity-stacked diversification can shave drawdowns while keeping equity-like return potential.

8) Why create “The Contrarian” with no classic benchmark?It intentionally ignores the long-only 60/40 centerline, emphasizing managed futures + long–short + diversified alternatives. It’s for investors who value tracking-error tolerance and want resilience across regimes more than index hugging.

9) What’s special about “The Canucklehead” for Canadians?It showcases Canadian-listed, multi-strategy funds (plus US-listed ETFs where allowed) to deliver stacked exposures—equities, bonds, CTAs, gold/commodities, long–short, market-neutral—within Canadian constraints and account types.

10) How are the “Enhanced Ray Dalio” and “Enhanced Harry Browne” different from the classics?They keep the spirit (stocks/bonds/commodities/gold or PP’s four-slice balance) but swap in capital-efficient sleeves and managed futures instead of cash where sensible. Result: more defense in bad regimes and potentially better long-run efficiency.

11) How do I implement these if a specific fund/ticker isn’t available?Think in exposures, not tickers. Map each sleeve (e.g., min-vol equity, managed futures trend, market-neutral anti-beta, gold, QIS/multi-strategy) to closest substitutes you can access, keeping correlation diversity the primary design rule.

12) How often should I rebalance and revisit the design?Set a calendar cadence (e.g., quarterly/semiannual) or bands (e.g., ±20% of target sleeve weights) to keep risk in line. Revisit annually: if your goals, constraints, or risk tolerance change—or new capital-efficient funds launch—adjust the canvas, not the discipline.

Final Thoughts: Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 and 3.0?

That's a wrap folks!

We've hit our mandate of 10 different portfolios and managed to annoy you with 5,161 words.

This is the longest blog post I've ever written by a country mile.

Honestly, I needed that amount of space to unpack things.

Truth be told, I could have easily rambled on longer.

Hopefully, some (or one) of these portfolios resonates with you given your current life circumstances.

All of these are just portfolio ideas rather than rigid cookie-cutter recipes.

Adjust, configure and modify to your preferences.

In fact, if there is one universal truth, it is that you probably should never copy another portfolio.

You should create one that is best for you and put your own personal stamp of approval on it.

That's how I invest.

My portfolio is a bit like "the Contrarian" and a bit like the "Max D Triple P" but its an odd ensemble of Canadian listed ETFs and mutual funds and some US ones too.

As I get older I may tilt things more along the lines of "The Fortress" when my accumulation days are in the rearview mirror.

I guess my point is this.

What works now, may not work in the future.

And I'm okay with that.

And hopefully you are too.

Don't feel backed into a corner.

You've got the ultimate flexibility as an asset allocator given the diverse range of possibilities that exist right now.

And things are likely to only get better.

So hopefully I'll be writing a Picture Perfect Portfolios 3.0 update someday.

If my knowledge as an investor improves and the product selection continues to grow by leaps and bounds, I'll be back again in another year or two to share with you what I'm excited about.

Until then my wish for you is to live well, invest confidently and grab life by the horns!

#### 10 Things Investors Need To Know About Managed Futures Investing Strategies
No other investing strategy has enjoyed a greater moment in the sun quite like Managed Futures in 2022.
Traditional long-only asset classes have struggled mightily in a year where stocks, bonds and gold have all been down at the same time.
Thus, portfolios committed to static only allocations to conservative asset classes have felt the full brunt of the scorched earth economic regime of high inflation combined with aggressive interest rate hikes.
As investors we’ve been spoiled with over a decade of growth and deflationary economic environments.
Hence, the need for adaptive portfolio solutions hasn’t been a high priority for most investors.
That’s all changed this year.
Long-Only Traditional Asset Classes Have Struggled Mightily In 2022
During previous bear markets such as the Great Financial Crisis of 2008 and the early 2000s Dot Com Bubble traditional asset classes such as bonds and gold saved the day for investors savvy enough to diversify their portfolio beyond merely equities.
Investors inspired by the Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio or Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio likely sailed through that challenging decade without missing a beat whereas all equity and 60/40 enthusiasts struggled mightily.
However, 2022 has been a historically rough patch for even the most diversified long-only portfolios that feature an alternative sleeve, fixed income and reduced equity exposure.
Therefore, it has been a coming out party for Managed Futures investing strategies due to the fact that it’s one of the only games in town that has conspired to help reduce the overall carnage.
In fact, Managed Futures have shined brightly.
Managed Futures = Saved The Day?
A fund such as KMLM ETF has returned an impressive 33.96% YTD.
DBMF ETF has fortified portfolios with 27.34% in 2022.
More recently minted CTA ETF has posted 20.35% since inception.
Yet, despite the impressive results few investing strategies are more misunderstood than Managed Futures.
Some investors believe that Managed Futures only perform well during tumultuous market conditions that require “crisis alpha”.
Others fail to understand that “trend following” is not the only Managed Futures game in town.
What we’ll attempt to unpack in this article is 10 specific things investors need to know about Managed Futures investing strategies in order to make more informed decisions.
Without further ado let’s hop right in.

Managed Futures Investment Strategy: 10 Things Investors Need To Know About Managed Futures!

Uncorrelated with Long-Only Equities and Bonds
Without a shadow of a doubt the most important thing investors need to know about managed futures investment strategies is that they've historically been uncorrelated with BOTH equity and fixed income allocations.
AQR's seminal must-read "A Century Of Evidence Of Trend Following Investing" back-tested the hypothetical performance of time series momentum from January 1880 until December 2013.
The results are as follows:

Trend-Following Correlation to U.S. Equity Market: 0.00 Trend-Following Correlation to US 10-year Bond Returns: -0.04
We can further confirm more recent correlation levels (this paper was published in 2013) with ETF and mutual fund managed futures products that have been in existence for close to a decade.

Since January 2014 until October 2022 these are the stock market correlation results versus the three different funds:
WisdomTree Managed Futures Strategy ETF Stock Market Correlation: 0.13First Trust Managed Futures Strategy ETF Stock Market Correlation: 0.02AQR Managed Futures Strategy HV l Stock Market Correlation: -0.26
What does all of this mean for investors?
The ability to add an "uncorrelated" asset class and/or strategy to your portfolio from a diversification benefit standpoint is huge.
We'll unpack this in more detail later on in the article but for the time being the capacity for managed futures investing strategies to form the alternative "third leg" of your portfolio warrants serious consideration.

Historically Consistent Crisis Alpha
Having a return stream that doesn't serpentine in unison alongside the likes of stocks and bonds is indeed intriguing.
However, the more important question is does managed futures perform well (aka providing "crisis alpha") when you need it the most?
In a word - YES!
Historically speaking trend-following managed futures investment strategies have come to the rescue consistently with ample force when shit has hit the fan across markets.
We'll once again consult the brilliant white paper from AQR to examine the 10 worst drawdowns for a 60/40 portfolio to examine if/when "trend-following strategies" tossed a life-vest.
A Century of Evidence on Trend-Following Investing

80% of the time trend-following MF strategies provided "above water" returns when drawdowns were beating the tar out of the 60/40 portfolio.
100% of the time "trend-following" strategies provided "relative outperformance" versus the 60/40 portfolio.
For instance, during the 1987 Crash and 1937 Recession "trend-following" wasn't above water but it wasn't blowing up either.
Moreover, the strategy hypothetically thrived during periods such as the 20s/30s Great Depression, 70s Stagflation, and Oil Crisis and early 2000s Dot Com Bubble and Great Financial Crisis.
How about in 2022 when both equities and bonds are being eaten alive like Jabba the Hut wolfing down frogs?

To find out let's compare KMLM ETF and DBMF ETF with SPY ETF.

To say certain managed futures strategies such as the ones deployed by DBMF ETF and KMLM ETF have delivered "crisis alpha" in 2022 is the understatement of the year.
Relative to the S&P 500, which has been down -17.75% YTD, DBMF ETF has boasted 32.84% returns whereas KMLM ETF has triumphed supreme rocking 42.72%.
If we look at market correlations we find both MF ETFs negatively correlated to markets at -0.58 and -0.44.
It's safe to say that MF investing strategies are indeed a historically reliable ally when markets are hopping on the shish-kebab.

Managed Futures Struggle Just Like Any Other Investing Strategy
Managed Futures strategies struggle mightily at times just like any other asset class.
As investors, we keep an industry-wide double standard where we're keen to forgive the S&P 500 and QQQ for a lost 2000s but we'll bring out the pitchforks and torches when Managed Futures strategies have a challenging 2010s often pronouncing it "dead".
If you're to think of MF as a line-item in your portfolio you're going to be disappointed time and again when the strategy inevitably experiences tracking error versus equities.
However, if you take the long-term approach of viewing Managed Futures as an uncorrelated "alternative sleeve" diversification juggernaut you'll likely be thrilled with the results if you can stay the course for decade upon decades.
Eric Crittenden, over at Standpoint Funds, made an excellent video highlighting the "line item" versus "combined asset classes" argument many investors struggle with.

Potential To Perform Well During Good Economic Times Too
One of the biggest misconceptions about Managed Futures is that they ONLY perform well when markets are down.
Although it is TRUE that that it is often a "strength" of trend-following strategies to provide reliable "crisis alpha" when it is needed the most it is FALSE that the strategy will be a drag on portfolio returns during other economic regimes.
In fact, Managed Futures have positive expected returns long-term and have historically provided "equity-like" returns with only half of the volatility when you consider results net of fees.

The full sample period of hypothetical trend following managed futures returns from January 1880 until December 2013 is 11.2% net of fees.
Something that should immediately "excite investors" is that the 2/20 fee structure is quickly becoming a thing of the past with more cost conscious products hitting the market in recent years.
With annual realized volatility of 9.7% risk management is another feather in its cap.
Getting back on track by considering the 90s as a classic example of trend following AND equities providing rip roaring returns at the same time.
We can further confirm this by checking out the returns of KFA MLM Index Year-Year Returns.

Here you'll notice the index KMLM ETF follows has tracked its performance dating back to 1988.
Notice the robust double digit positive returns from 1990 until 1999 for seven years (90, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98).

Above you'll notice US Equity Large Cap returns for the 1990s.
The takeaway message for investors is that it isn't always Equities OR Trend-Following performing well while the other struggles.
It can be Equities AND Trend-Following Managed Futures driving phenomenal returns at the SAME time too.

Trend-Following Is the Predominant Managed Futures Strategy
We've shone the spotlight upon mostly "trend following" as the managed futures strategy we've focused upon more than any other.
Why?
Because it is hands down the most predominant strategy in the managed futures universe.
Let's unpack it a bit more.
Trend Following is an investment strategy that has the ability to go long/short across a broad equity, fixed income, commodities, currency and metals futures indexes.
It's a strategy that is adaptive rather than just being positioned long only.
What do I mean by that specifically?
If you're an equity investor with long positions in an S&P 500 index you only benefit when markets are going up.
You're screwed when they're down.
With trend following you're able to adapt your position based on the current trend.
When lean hogs are trending up you're long.
When they're trend down you're short.
The systematic approach to trend-following systems ensures no human emotion or judgement influences these decisions.
It just follows the moving average of its short, medium and long-term signals of the trading system.
That sounds great and all but what is the catch?
The catch is that when trends ARE NOT strong it'll likely get whipsawed.
I like to use the analogy of a cruise ship to describe this.
If the ship pulls into port but then gets called to another location (changes position from long to short or vice versa) it'll feel pain as it repositions.
Without adequate time to dock (ride the trend) it gets beat up in the ocean by choppy waves going from one place to the next.
Basically, when trends are not strong (or they're back and forth) the strategy struggles.
It does its best when trends are strong and continuous such as in 2022.

Other Managed Futures Strategies
Trend Following is not the only Managed Futures game in town.
We've also got carry, value, defensive, mean reversion and risk-off just to name a few.
Since this isn't an article "diving deep" into all of theses different strategies we'll just briefly highlight one of them.
For instance, carry is a managed futures strategy where you're long "high yielding" assets and short "lower yielding" assets.
This type of strategy is typically executed in currency/bond markets where you borrow and pay interest in order to buy something that has higher interest.
What's important to remember is that not all managed futures funds are "trend-only" products and that many include a multi-strategy approach to further diversify and potentially better manage overall risk.
When you're thinking of buying a Managed Futures ETF/Mutual Fund it is important to read the tear sheets and manager commentary pdfs to find out what strategies are being pursued by the given product in question versus what exposures/strategies you're seeking as an investor.

Managed Futures Hybrid and Asset Allocation Products
Investors need to be aware that managed futures products are often part of a hybrid strategy where they're paired with "something else" or they're a smaller slice of the pie in an asset allocation fund.
Two funds I've already reviewed on this site perfectly highlight these two examples.
Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund is an expanded canvas portfolio product which is long 50% global equities with a 100% trend-following managed futures sleeve.
Simplify Macro Strategy ETF is a fund of funds asset allocation ETF where managed futures ticker CTA ETF currently takes up a slice of the pie (24.93%) with a plethora of other strategies (I counted 10) also included in the mix.

Hence, you have the option of going for an expanded canvas hybrid or asset allocation approach alongside the opportunity to purchase a fund that is exclusively managed futures.

Exposures, Leverage and Volatility Targeting Matter
Not all Managed Futures ETFs and Mutual Funds are created equal.
Some have strict volatility targets (standard deviation) whereas others really let their horses run wild (winners win).
Other funds have gross leverage caps where long/short combinations are not able to exceed certain leverage thresholds such as 150%, 200% or 300% as an example.

Certain funds trade equities, fixed income, currencies, metals and commodities across a broad range of diversified global markets.
Whereas it's also common to find products that will key in on a more narrow range of focus (currency and fixed income only in North American markets) with niche expertise.
You'll discover that certain ETFs or Mutual Funds are "trend-following" only whereas others bring a diverse mix of managed futures strategies under one hood forming a multi-strategy approach.

Managed Futures Covers A Diverse Range Of Asset Classes
No other investing strategy that I'm aware of provides access to as diverse a range of asset classes as Managed Futures.

Standpoint Funds has an awesome Investment Universe list of global fixed income, equities, currencies, industrial commodities and agricultural commodities that it tracks.
Fixed Income
10 Year Australian Government Bond2 Year Australian Government Bond5 Year US T-Note2 Year US T-Note10 Year US T-NoteEuro German BobleEuro German BundLong GiltCanada 10 Year Government Bond10 Year Japanese Government BondLong Term Italian Government BondEuro OATEuro BuxlUS T-BondListtra 10 Year US T-NoteListtra T-BondsEurodollar3-Month EURIBORCanadian Bankers Acceptance3-Month Euro Swiss Franc3-Month Sterling
Equities
e-mini S&P 500 IndexEuro STOXX 50 IndexFTSE 100 IndexTopixHang Seng IndexNikkei 225 IndexS&P Canada 60MSCI SingaporeCBOE Volatility IndexSPI 200 Index
Currencies
British PoundUnited States DollarCanadian DollarEuroJapanese YenMexican PesoAustralian DollarNew Zealand DollarSwiss Franc
Industrial Commodities
GoldCopperAluminumNickelZincPlatinumSilverWTI Crude OilBrent CrudeECX EUA EmissionsGas OilCrude OilNY Harbor ULSDHenry Hub Natural GasGasoline RBOB
Agricultural Commodities
Soybean OilCornSoybeansSoybean MealWheatMilling WheatKC WheatCanolaFeeder CattleLive CattleLean HogsCocoaCoffeeSugarCottonRobusta CoffeeLondon CocoaWhite Sugar
For shits and giggles I have infinite amounts of fun pretending I'm having an oddball dinner by combining various combinations in one sentence.
Tonight for supper we'll be having Lean Hogs sprinkled with London Cocoa and Robusta Coffee purchased entirely with Swiss Francs.

Managed Futures Offer A Long-Term Diversification Benefit
Maybe the most crucial thing to understand as an investor is that managed futures offer a tremendous long-term diversification benefit for those who understand, commit and ultimately stick with the strategy as a permanent alternative sleeve within their portfolio.
Being able to combine an asset class and/or strategy that is uncorrelated to both stocks and bonds has the potential to enhance returns while lowering overall portfolio volatility.
Moreover, you get the added bonus of having a more palatable sequence of returns.
I found that portfolios that featured an "alternative sleeve" performed much better while also managing risk in the Battle of the Leverage Portfolios series.
Heck, even back-testing the results of US Equities and Gold (oddly considered an "alternative investment") revealed the benefits of combining uncorrelated asset classes that extend beyond equities/fixed income.
What Managed Futures strategies offer that long-only exposure to Gold and Commodity lacks is the ability to adapt by going long/short.
Since 2000, consider that Gold has had a worst year of -28.33% performance in 2013 and Commodities got hammered in 2008 with -45.75% returns.

More shocking is the maximum drawdown for Gold at -42.91% and Commodities at -88.68%.
How many investors have a chin worthy of receiving such vicious uppercuts?
Now consider the SG Trend Index since 2001.

A far more palatable worst year of -8.11% in 2018.
What happens when you stick with Managed Futures investing strategies over an extended period of time?
Higher returns.
Lower Volatility.
As far as I'm concerned that's the name of the game when it comes to portfolio construction.
As investors we should be seeking the ultimate scenario where returns and risk management collide.

Let's once again consult with AQR's research to compare the results of a 60/40 portfolio versus a 50/30/20 portfolio where the classic portfolio gives way for a 20% alternative sleeve commitment to "trend following" as a permanent allocation.
60/40 Portfolio Returns: 7.8%60/40 Portfolio Volatility: 10.8%60/40 Portfolio Sharpe: 0.38
50/30/20 Portfolio Returns: 8.5%50/30/20 Portfolio Returns: 8.8%50/30/20 Portfolio Returns: 0.53
Back-testing long-term hypothetical results from January 1888 until December 2013 reveals a 70 basis points increase in returns with a 200 basis points improvement in volatility management.
A slice of 10% Managed Futures to a classic strategy likely moves the needle whereas 20% really makes a difference over long time horizons.

Bonus: 10 People Worth Following To Learn More About Managed Futures
My intention with this article was for it to be an introduction to managed futures investment strategies for investors who are "new" to this from the perspective of a curious amateur.
However, for those seeking to take a deeper dive and learn more about the subject I'd highly recommend following these 10 fine folks in no particular order:

Andrew Beer
Jason C. Buck
Adam Butler
Jerry Parker
Rodrigo Gordillo
Jeff Malec 
Richard Brennan
Charles McGarraugh
Michael Covel
Tom Basso

From tweets and podcasts to books and articles to white papers and videos these guys have you covered across the board.

Super Bonus: 10 Managed Futures Funds To Consider
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Since we've already hit a bonus round let's up the ante by going "super" by highlighting a few funds worth your consideration.
We'll break things up into two categories: Managed Futures (trend + multi-strategy) and Asset Allocation Funds that include MF in no particular order.
Managed Futures ETFs/Mutual Funds (Trend + Multi-Strategy)

DBMF - iMGP DBi Managed Futures Strategy ETF
KMLM - KFA Mount Lucas Managed Futures ETF
CTA - Simplify Managed Futures Strategy ETF
RDMIX - Rational/ReSolve Adaptive Asset Allocation Fund Mutual Fund
AQMIX - AQR Managed Futures Strategy Fund Mutual Fund
EQCHX - AXS Chesapeake Strategy Fund Mutual Fund

Asset Allocation Funds (including Managed Futures allocations)

FIG - Simplify Macro Strategy ETF
TRTY - Cambria Trinity ETF
BLNDX / REMIX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund Mutual Fund
The Cockroach Portfolio by Mutiny Funds

Canadian Investors

HRAA.TO - Horizons Resolve Adaptive Asset Allocation ETF
NALT.TO - NBI Liquid Alternatives ETF
AHP 1110 - WaveFront Global Diversified Investment Class
Auspice One Fund by Auspice Capital

#### Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route: How We Crossed the Roof of Japan!
Today you’re in for an adventure because we’re travelling the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route across the Japanese Alps!

Nicknamed the ‘Roof of Japan’, this journey can be done starting in Toyama or Nagano and it involves a 2,400-metre elevation change as you travel across the Japanese Alps using multiple modes of transportation. This includes trains, buses, trolleys, ropeways, cable cars and even your own two feet! 

This was an epic journey where we got to experience different landscapes and seasons all in one day, and we’re going to show you exactly how you too can plan the same trip!

If you'd rather do the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route as part of a tour where you don't have to worry about any of the details, you may want to consider this guided day tour. (This one only runs in springtime so you can see the famous snow walls!)

Alpine Route Know Before You Go

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route Opening Date

The Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route is a seasonal route, so it is not open year-round. The heavy snowfall makes parts of this route inaccessible during the winter months. 

The opening dates are from April 15th to November 30th. The route then closes from December 1st to April 14th.

Alpen Route One-Way

The Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route can be done one way or round trip. 

The starting/ending points are Toyama in the west and Ogizawa in the east. You can begin your journey in either direction. 

We chose to travel the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route one way starting in Toyama and ending in Ogizawa (before travelling onward to Nagano). 

The complete journey from Toyama to Nagano takes 8-9 hours depending on how long you stay at each stop and whether you go on some hikes along the way. 

Baggage Forwarding Service

Since we were travelling the Alpine Route one way, we had luggage with us that we didn't feel like hauling on and off 7 modes of transportation over the course of the day. 

Thankfully, the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route offers a baggage forwarding service. Once you have purchased your tickets and gone through the first set of gates, you will see an area to the side where you can pay to have your luggage sent to the very end of the route. 

The price is currently set at 3,000 yen per bag to have them sent from Dentetsu-Toyama Station to Shinano Omachi Station. We tagged them with our personal contact information and were given tickets to collect our luggage at the end of the day. 

This may sound like a lot of money to have your luggage transported, but it's honestly the best thing we could have done! It freed us up to be able to enjoy each stop without having a clunky suitcase to worry about. 

We saw a few people who either didn't know about the baggage forwarding service or opted not to use it, and it looked like a hassle. Keep in mind that some of the stops along the Alpine Route have rough terrain, there can be snow depending on the time of year, and there are some short trails and scenic viewpoints to enjoy. You don't want to be worrying about your luggage!

You can read more about how the baggage forwarding service works here. 

How to Buy Tickets for the Alpine Route

The biggest hassle of this trip was figuring out how to get tickets for the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route as foreigners in Japan! It's a process that does involve a bit of work, but it was definitely worth it. Here are three different options for you to consider:

Official Alpine Route Website - We were told multiple times to just buy tickets online, however, the problem is that the entire website is in Japanese (as of 2024) and even though we used Google Translate to translate it into English, we reached a point while filling out the form where it would only accept Katakana characters for our names. We tried asking for help booking tickets in 2 different tourist offices in Toyama, but that was a dead end. 

In-Person Day Tickets - The next option was to buy tickets in person which are only released for same-day travel. We were a bit worried about ticket availability since we were travelling during peak autumn foliage season, so we made sure to arrive at the station 30 minutes before the ticketing window opened and we got in line to purchase those same-day tickets. We also chose to do this trip on a weekday hoping it wouldn't be quite as busy and that we'd have a better chance of getting tickets. This worked out for us!

Join a Guided Tour - Another option is to join a guided day tour departing from Nagano which includes round-trip tickets for the the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route. This particular tour is only offered in the springtime, which is when you can see the famous snow corridor along the Alpine Route. 

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route

Now let's talk about the various modes of transportation you'll get to experience along the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route and what to expect from each leg of the journey. 

Toyama Chiho Railroad - 65 minutes

First up, we rode the Toyama Chiho Railroad, which is a 65-minute train journey. We departed from Dentetsu-Toyama Station (adjacent to Toyama Station) and travelled to ​​Tateyama Station. 

This first leg of the journey was all about getting out of the city. We watched the landscape change from urban to farm fields, and it wasn't long before we were travelling along the Joganji River surrounded by misty green mountains. 

It was a nice way to ease into our trip across the Japanese Alps!

Tateyama Cable Car - 7 minutes

Once we arrived at Tateyama Station, it was time to board our next mode of transport: the Tateyama Cable Car!

The cable car is a funicular that climbs 502 meters and covers a distance of 1.3 kilometres from Tateyama Station to Bijodaira. It's a 7-minute ride. 

We were lucky enough to see a couple of Japanese macaques also known as snow monkeys - they were just chilling atop the tunnel as we journeyed uphill. The forest they call home features 200-300-year-old beech trees, as well as cedar trees that are upwards of 1,000 years old.

One of the important landmarks on this cable car journey is the Zaimokuishi rocks, which were formed by lava from the Tateyama Volcano which created pillar-like structures. 

Tateyama Highland Bus - 50 minutes 

Next up, we boarded the Tateyama Highland Bus to continue our journey across the Roof of Japan!

The Tateyama Highland Bus covers a distance of 23 kilometres and you get to experience an almost 1500-meter altitude change! 

We went from green landscapes to fall foliage to a snowy landscape. It was quite the journey and yes, it was a very winding road. 

It's important to note that there are two different bus options here. You can either take the 50-minute express bus from Bijodaira to Murodo, or you can take the slower bus that stops halfway at Midagahara before continuing on to Murodo. 

Midagahara is an alpine wetland and Murodo is the highest point on the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route. Both offer some nice hiking options. 

Mikurigaike Pond is an alpine lake with clear waters that reflect the Japan Alps, so this is a popular spot to visit. 

You can also hike Mount Tateyama, which forms part of the Tateyama Mountain Range. This is one of Japan's Three Sacred Mountains along with Mount Fuji and Mount Haku. 

This is mainly of importance for those travellers who are planning to stay overnight at one of the many mountain hotels. Both Murodo and Midagahara offer an array of accommodations, but keep in mind that if you want to spend the night, you'll want to book well in advance as demand is extremely high!

Given how remote both of these locations are, the hotels are ryokan style and offer meals plus access to the onsen. 

Spending the night in the Northern Japanese Alps:Hotel Tateyama (Murodo) - located at 2,450 meters above sea level, this is the highest hotel in Japan! Breakfast and dinner are included. Guests have access to an onsen. Midagahara Hotel (Midagahara) - this hotel is situated at 1,930 metres above sea level. Breakfast and dinner are included. Guests have access to an onsen. 

Tateyama Tunnel Trolley Bus - 10 minutes

Then, we got on the Tateyama Tunnel Trolley Bus which runs from Murodo to Daikanbo. This is a 10-minute bus ride through a narrow tunnel that crosses Mount Tateyama. 

Because this is a green bus powered by electricity, it doesn’t produce any exhaust fumes.

We travelled a distance of 3.7 kilometres with an elevation change of 134 metres. 

Tateyama Ropeway - 7 minutes

If there's one mode of transportation I had most been looking forward to along the Alpine Route, it's the Tateyama Ropeway!

The Tateyama Ropeway covers a distance of 1,700 metres without the use of a single pylon along the way (those are the columns you typically see when you’re riding a cable car, chair lift or gondola). This is the only such cable car in Japan, which makes it pretty unique! 

This leg of the journey takes you from Daikanbo to Kurobedaira and it’s a 7-minute trip with an elevation change of 488 metres. 

This is the part of the journey where you get to enjoy those epic alpine views and because we were doing the journey in mid-October during peak autumn foliage season, we got to feast our eyes on an explosion of colours: amber, ochre, pumpkin, burgundy and maroon!

Everyone on the ropeway was ooh-ing and ahh-ing at nature's spectacle in this corner of the Japanese Alps. 

Once we arrived, we enjoyed the views from a few different vantage points and snapped lots of photos. You can even go up the Kurobedaira Panorama Terrace where you have a viewing platform that offers 360-degree views of the surrounding area. 

If there's one place that's worth lingering along the Toyama Kurobe Alpine Route, I would say this stop is it. 

Kurobe Cable Car - 5 minutes

Then, it was time to ride the Kurobe Cable Car from Kurobedaira to Kurobeko. What’s unique about this mode of transportation is that it’s the only underground cable car in Japan, meaning it is unaffected by the heavy snowfall in the region.

This was the shortest journey on the Alpine Route; we travelled 0.8 kilometres, had an elevation change of 373 metres, and the ride only took 5 minutes. 

Cross Kurobe Dam on foot - 15 minutes

We then reached the point in the journey where we had to cross the Kurobe Dam using our own two feet!

The Kurobe Dam is an 186-metre arched dam and the tallest dam in all of Japan. It was built between 1956 and 1963. 

Between late June and mid-October, the Kurobe Dam releases waters from its spillway, so this is a popular time of year to visit.

There's actually quite a bit to see and do at Kurobe Dam, so you may want to give yourself a bit of time here. For a panoramic view of the dam and its surroundings, you can climb the flights of stairs that lead up to an observation deck (it's 220 steps to the top!)​. 

Alternatively, you may want to join one of the sightseeing boat rides on Kurobe Lake. You can also make time to visit the Kurobe Dam Museum or grab a bite of food at one of the restaurants. 

We skipped the boat ride because we still had a bit of a journey ahead of us and we wanted to make it to Nagano City before dark, but there's plenty to do here. 

Kanden Tunnel Electric Bus - 16 minutes

This brings us to our next mode of transportation: riding the Kanden Tunnel Electric Bus from Kurobe Dam to Ogizawa Station.

Ogizawa Station marks the end of the official Alpine Route, however, you can then continue onwards to Shinano Omachi (if you used the luggage forwarding service) or Nagano Station to end your trip. 

The Kanden Tunnel Electric Bus was a 16-minute journey where we travelled 6.1 kilometres with an elevation change of 37 metres. 

Since we had a bit of time before we could catch the next local bus to Shinano to pick up our luggage, we decided to grab some food inside the station. They had some nice Tonkatsu and curries on the menu, so it's a good option if you're getting hungry at this point in the journey!

Bus to Nagano - 105 minutes

There are two ways to reach Nagano from Ogizawa Station. If you forwarded luggage in the morning, you'll have to do the journey in two steps. 

First, you'll need to catch a local bus to Shinano Omachi (40 minutes), where you'll be able to pick up your luggage at the office directly across the train station. Once you have your luggage, you'll need to catch another from Shinano Omachi to Nagano Station (65 minutes). This is what we had to do. 

If you are travelling light as a feather and have no luggage to retrieve, then you can catch an express bus from Ogizawa Station to Nagano Station. 

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route in Autumn

We travelled the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route in autumn and it was everything we hoped it would be! Not only was the journey loads of fun as we got to ride different modes of transportation, but we were also treated to ever-changing scenery, peak foliage on the ropeway ride, and we got to experience 3 seasons in one day!

We did this journey in mid-October (October 16 to be precise), so this is a taste of what you can expect this time of year. The forecast can slightly vary from year to year, so it might be worth looking at the foliage calendar to see when the colours are about to pop. 

Lastly, autumn is a wonderful time to travel around the Japanese Alps and I would recommend sticking around to visit a few more destinations in the area. 

We really enjoyed our visit to Takayama (so much so that we've been twice!), a day trip to Shirakawa-go to see the farmhouses is well worth it, and maybe you can even tack on a quiet nature escape to Norikura. 

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RRnnFPdrr9o

Making the Most of the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route: Essential Tips & FAQs

Top Tips for Planning Your Alpine Route Journey

Let’s dive into the nitty-gritty—these are the details that’ll make your day much smoother (and way more fun):

1. Start Early (and Pace Yourself)

The full Alpine Route takes 8–9 hours if you want to do it justice and linger at scenic spots. Start as early as possible—especially during peak autumn foliage or the snow wall season when crowds can swell. Early departures mean you’ll have more flexibility, less stress about tight connections, and better photo ops without throngs of travelers in the background.

2. Consider Overnighting on the Route

Most travelers do the Alpine Route as a single, full-on day trip. But if you’re a hiking enthusiast, photographer, or simply someone who loves the mountains, consider spending a night at Hotel Tateyama or Midagahara Hotel. Watching the sunrise or sunset from the roof of Japan, soaking in an onsen at altitude, and exploring alpine trails with hardly another soul in sight? Pure magic.

3. Pack Like a Pro

Weather on the Alpine Route changes fast—sometimes you’ll experience everything from warm sunshine to snow flurries in a single afternoon. Here’s what you’ll want to have handy:

Layers: T-shirt, fleece, windbreaker or light down jacket

Hat and gloves: Even in spring/autumn, it can get chilly, especially at Murodo

Sturdy shoes: For easy hikes and stairs around the dam and lookouts

Sunscreen and sunglasses: High altitude = strong UV rays!

Snacks and water: There are shops and eateries at major stops, but lines can be long at peak times

Camera/phone charger: You’ll take a million photos, trust me!

4. Cash is King

Many small restaurants and souvenir stalls along the route are cash only. Be sure to bring enough Japanese yen for lunch, snacks, souvenirs, and unexpected treats (hello, soft-serve ice cream and hot, steamy buns!).

How to Maximize Each Stop on the Alpine Route

Toyama Chiho Railway to Tateyama Station

Start your adventure watching the landscape shift from urban cityscape to lush, river-threaded countryside. Grab a window seat for the best views.

Murodo Plateau

The highlight for many! At 2,450 meters, Murodo is the highest station and home to the famous Snow Corridor (Yuki-no-Otani) in spring. In autumn, the plateau transforms into a sea of gold, crimson, and green. This is also a hiker’s paradise—short walks to volcanic hot springs, alpine ponds, and, if you’re ambitious, the summit of Mt. Tateyama.

Tateyama Ropeway & Daikanbo

This stretch is the panoramic highlight. The ropeway’s lack of supporting pylons means unobstructed views of the mountains, valley, and fall colors. Daikanbo’s viewing terrace is made for wide-angle shots—give yourself a little extra time here, even if it means waiting for the next cable car.

Kurobe Dam

Not only Japan’s tallest dam but also a testament to human ingenuity (and perseverance—over seven years and many challenges to build it). If you’re lucky, catch the dramatic water discharge from late June to October. It’s seriously powerful! Walk the length of the dam, take in the emerald waters, and climb up for a panoramic view. There’s even a small boat cruise on Kurobe Lake if you want a different vantage.

Rapid Fire Info

How long do I need for the route?

If you want to simply transit from start to finish, you could “rush” it in 6–7 hours, but you’d miss most of the magic. Plan at least 8–9 hours, or break it up with a stay on the route.

Can I store my luggage?

Yes! The baggage forwarding service is a lifesaver. If you’re traveling one-way (especially with suitcases), don’t hesitate—it’s worth every yen.

Is it suitable for children or seniors?

Absolutely, though some sections have lots of stairs (like the dam observation points) and there’s a fair bit of walking. For less-mobile travelers, take your time, use elevators where available, and skip longer hikes.

What if the weather is bad?

The route runs rain or shine, and even fog can create an atmospheric mood. But always check forecasts for closures, especially late in the season.

When’s the best time to visit?

Late April–June: Snow walls + spring mountain scenery

Mid-July–September: Lush green, wildflowers, and clear skies

Late September–mid-October: Stunning fall foliage (my personal favorite!)

Late October–November: Crisp air, fewer crowds, snow-dusted peaks

Smart-Pack Checklist (One-Day Crossing)

Must-BringWhy it mattersPro hack10 L day-packFree hands on ladders, easy to squeeze under seats.Choose one with a chest strap – you’ll be on standing-room cable cars.Layers (base + fleece + windbreaker)You’ll swing from 32 °C rice fields to sub-zero snow at 2,450 m.Pack a lightweight down vest; stuffs into its own pocket.Gore-Tex or sturdy trainersThe dam walkway can be puddly; Murodo trails may hold snow.Tie shoes onto your pack on warm lower segments.Sunglasses & SPF 50UV radiation increases ~10 % every 1,000 m. Snow glare is savage.Clip sunnies inside the ropeway cabin for quick grab when doors open.Cash (¥10,000 in small coins / notes)Snack stalls, lockers and coin-op hot drinks = cash only.Keep ¥100 coins handy for bathroom “washlet” fee at Ogizawa.Suica / IC cardVending machines, cafés at Murodo, and Shinano bus accept tap-pay.Top up the night before – some rural machines won’t let you charge.Power bank 10k mAhYou’ll shoot hundreds of photos + use translation and weather apps.Air-Drop photos at rest stops and keep phone on Airplane Mode when no signal.Thin gloves & beanie (Oct-Jun)Windchill on the ridge and at Daikanbō lookout can hit –10 °C.Touch-screen gloves = no frozen fingers while filming.Eco-towel / buffSummer humidity at lower stations or condensation in tunnels.Can double as makeshift picnic mat.

Photo-Op Hotlist (with GPS Pins)

StopExact spotBest timeAngle to shootNotesBijodaira Station bridge36.5749° N, 137.5164° E09:30 – sun behind youFrame cable-car exit + cedar canopy.Mist often hovers for ethereal vibe.Midagahara Wetlands36.5567, 137.524510:00-11:00Boardwalk S-curve into alpine marsh.30 min loop – watch wooden planks (slippery).Mikurigaike Pond36.5753, 137.611411:30Peak reflection of Tateyama trio on calm days.Polariser helps kill glare.Daikanbō Upper Terrace36.5694, 137.629512:00-13:00Panoramic sweep of Kurobe Lake + serrated ridgeline.Handheld pano > wide lens (less distortion).Tateyama Ropeway south windowN/A (moving)Midday – gondola centreShoot through glass; place lens hood flush to reduce reflection.Gimbal not allowed – use phone stabilisation.Kurobe Dam Staircase 636.5649, 137.664614:00 for rainbowWater discharge + rainbow forms on sunny days.220 steps up – budget 10 min.Autumn Foliage Tunnel (Oct)Between Keyakidaira & Sadaira corners on bus~15:30 golden hourMotion panning out bus window.Sit driver’s side for best leaf wall.

Seasonal Game-Plan Tweaks

SeasonWhy go thenRoute TipsClothing ExtrasSpring (mid-Apr – late May)Walk the Yuki no Ōtani snow corridor – walls over 15 m!Pre-reserve Murodo–Bijodaira bus section (sells out).Waterproof pants; reflectivity can sunburn legs.Early Summer (Jun)Alpine flowers blanket Midagahara; waterfalls peak with melt-water.Monitor lightning alerts; storms roll fast.Light rain shell & quick-dry socks.High Summer (Jul-Aug)Clear skies for Mt Tate summit hike + stargazing at 2,400 m.Book Hotel Tateyama months ahead; sunrise tour departs 04:00.Headlamp, ultralight down jacket for night sky.Autumn (late Sep – Oct)Fiery maples + golden birch at 1,400-2,000 m tier.Crowds heavier: catch 07:00 Toyama train for first cable car.Thermals & micro-spikes if early snow.Shoulder-Winter (Nov to 30 Nov)Frost-dusted peaks, quiet platforms.Some shops close; pack own lunch. Last ropeway 15:20.Insulated boots; pocket warmers.

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route: 12-Question FAQ for Planning, Tickets, Seasons, Luggage & Route Tips

How long does the full Alpine Route take?

Plan for 8–9 hours if you want to enjoy viewpoints, short walks, and photo stops. You can sprint it in ~6–7 hours, but you’ll miss the best bits like Daikanbō’s terrace and the dam lookouts.

When is the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route open?

It’s a seasonal crossing. The route operates April 15–November 30 and closes December 1–April 14 due to heavy snow. Spring brings the famous snow corridor; late autumn can be frosty but quiet.

Which direction should I travel—Toyama ➜ Ogizawa or Ogizawa ➜ Toyama?

Both work well. We did Toyama to Ogizawa (continuing on to Nagano) and loved the build-up from rivers and forests to high alpine, then the grand finale at Kurobe Dam. If your onward trains are Nagano-bound, finishing in Ogizawa is convenient.

What are my ticket options?

You have three solid paths:

Buy online via the official site (Japanese interface; name fields may require Katakana).

Same-day tickets in person (arrive before windows open—especially during foliage and snow-wall seasons).

Join a guided day tour (great in spring for the snow walls; tickets bundled, no logistics stress).

Do I need to reserve each transport segment?

Not if you’re buying same-day through-tickets and traveling steadily, but peak dates can see queues. Build buffer time at Murodo and Daikanbō, and be willing to take the next ropeway or bus if you linger at viewpoints.

Is one-way travel easy—and what about my luggage?

Yes. One-way is common. Use the baggage forwarding service so you’re not juggling suitcases on seven different rides. We sent ours from Dentetsu-Toyama to Shinano-Ōmachi for ¥3,000 per bag and picked them up near the end—totally worth it.

What’s the best season to go?

Mid–late April to June: Snow corridor + spring scenery.

July–September: Clear skies, flowers, best shot at Tate summit hikes.

Late Sept–mid-Oct: Peak autumn foliage (our favorite!).

Late Oct–Nov: Quiet, crisp, snow-dusted ridgelines.Each season shines differently—match your gear and start times accordingly.

What should I pack for a one-day crossing?

Layers (base + fleece + wind/warmth layer), sturdy footwear, hat & thin gloves (spring/autumn), sunglasses & SPF, snacks & water, and a power bank. Weather shifts fast: you can experience three seasons in a single day.

Can I stay overnight on the route?

Absolutely. Hotel Tateyama (Murodo) and Midagahara Hotel turn the route into an alpine mini-break with dinner, breakfast, and onsen access. Nights bring starry skies and sunrise views—book far ahead in peak windows.

Is the route suitable for kids and seniors?

Yes, with smart pacing. Expect walking, stairs (e.g., dam viewpoints), and some line-ups. Use elevators where available, skip longer hikes, and give yourselves extra time at transfer points.

Will I find food and ATMs along the way?

Major stations have eateries (think curry, tonkatsu, café fare) and shops. Bring cash—some stalls and lockers are cash-only. We also carry snacks to avoid lines during peak periods.

Any photography “don’t-miss” spots?

Yes! Daikanbō terrace (panoramas), Tateyama Ropeway cabins (glass-to-lens shots), Mikurigaike Pond (alpine reflections), and Kurobe Dam (watch for rainbows during water discharge, late June–mid-October). Give yourself time to linger.

#### Best Things to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Hakodate, Hokkaido
Here are the best things to do in Hakodate, because no trip to Hokkaido would be complete without a visit to this historic port city!

If you're planning to travel across Hokkaido, Japan's northernmost island, you'll probably kick off your trip in Hakodate. This port city is the first stop for anyone coming up by train, so it only makes sense to get off here before continuing on to Sapporo. At least, that's how we planned our itinerary!

Hakodate proved to have everything we expected from a port city: a beautiful harbour with historic buildings, a morning market serving fresh seafood, and a fishery museum where we got to experience what it would be like to be fishermen at high sea!

During our trip to Hakodate, we also rode the ropeway up Mount Hakodate for panoramic views, we visited the star-shaped Fort Goryokaku, and sampled some of the local cuisine - namely, Hakodate salt ramen!

This is our list of the best things to do in Hakodate, Japan to help you plan the most epic trip!

How to get to Hakodate

Getting from Tokyo to Hakodate 

Take the Tohoku Shinkansen from Tokyo Station to Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto. This is a 3-hour and 23-minute journey. At Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto Station Train, transfer onto the Hakodate Line to Hakodate Station.

Getting from Sapporo to Hakodate

At Sapporo Station, catch the Hokuto Limited Express to Hakodate. It's a 3-hour and 46-minute train ride to Hakodate Station. 

Hakodate Travel Guide

Hakodate Morning Market

If you find yourself in Hakodate, one experience that you absolutely cannot miss is a visit to the legendary Hakodate Morning Market. For over six decades, this market has stood as a testament to the city’s rich fishing heritage and it's a vibrant hub that draws tourists and locals alike. 

Spread across four city blocks, just a two minute walk from JR Hakodate Train Station, the market comes alive daily from the wee hours of the morning. Its official hours are from 5:00 am (shifting to 6:00 am from January to April ) until noon, but don't be surprised to find it bustling well into the afternoon.

With approximately 250 stalls, the market offers an array of the freshest seafood and plenty of restaurants where you can enjoy it too. 

For the quintessential Hakodate experience, I recommend getting up early (you'll probably be jetlagged anyway!) and skipping the hotel breakfast in favour of a meal at the market. 

The thing to order here is kaisendon, a bowl of rice topped with fresh seafood, which depending on the season can include shrimp, crab, tuna, salmon roe, or sea urchin.

We got the kaisendon set which also came with a bowl of soba noodles, a side salad and fried chicken. It was quite a bit of food and a great way to start the day, if you ask me!

Museum Ship Mashu Maru

Nestled in the Port of Hakodate, you'll find the Mashu Maru anchored as a reminder of a bygone era in Japanese transportation.

This former railway ferry was used to bridge the waters between Hokkaido (the northernmost island) and Honshu (the main island) until 1988.

However, once the Seikan Tunnel was built (we're talking about a 53-kilometre undersea tunnel that was a feat of engineering!), there was no longer a need for the ferry to cross the Tsugaru Strait.

The Mashu Maru’s final voyage was on March 13, 1988. It is currently docked at the historic No. 2 quay, the very location from which it once embarked on its regular journeys.

The Mashu Maru, which began its service in 1965, has been meticulously preserved and transformed into a museum. The ship, which has been anchored permanently, offers an authentic glimpse into the life and operations of a mid-20th-century ferry, and from the moment you step aboard, you're transported back in time.

As you wander through the museum, you'll discover display panels and models detailing the inner workings of the Seikan ferries, and you can also explore the ship's bridge and radio communications room. Plus, we quite enjoyed the views of the harbour from the ship!

The Mashu Maru is open from 8:30 am to 6:00 pm (closing at 5:00 pm in winter) and has an admission of ¥500.

Whether you're a maritime enthusiast or simply curious about the evolution of travel in Japan, the Mashu Maru is a cool spot to visit in the Hakodate Port area.

Kanemori Red Brick Warehouse

The Kanemori Red Brick Warehouses are a historical landmark along Hakodate's waterfront. Originally established during the Meiji era as a trading post, they played a pivotal role in Hakodate's development as a key port city.

Today, these distinctive red-brick buildings have been repurposed into a bustling commercial complex and entertainment centre. 

Inside the warehouses, you'll find an array of shops, boutiques, and galleries, each offering a unique selection of goods ranging from traditional Japanese crafts to modern fashion. 

For food enthusiasts, the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouse is also dotted with cafes and restaurants serving everything from local Hokkaido delicacies to international cuisine. 

To be honest, my favourite part about visiting the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouse was the architecture. These are really cool buildings with exposed beams, wooden ceilings and industrial lighting. It made the history of this place feel a bit more palpable. 

Hachiman Zaka Slope

Hachiman Zaka Slope is a famous street in Hakodate thanks to its steep slope and beautiful views.

Named after the Hakodate Hachiman Shrine, which was originally located nearby, this stone-paved street is lined with rows of trees and boasts views of Hakodate Bay area and the Mashu Maru in the distance.

Among the 19 sloping streets in Hakodate, descending from Mount Hakodate to Hakodate Bay, this one is considered the most beautiful. It's especially nice at sunset when the city and bay are washed in a soft glow.

On either side of the road, you'll find stairs or you can take the steep sidewalk. At the top, everyone likes to take photos in the middle of the road, so watch out for traffic. 

We found it to be quite the climb (maybe because it was a really hot and humid day!), but we needed to get to the top anyway in order to visit our next attraction!

Motomachi District & Churches

Next, we explored the Motomachi District, which is situated at the foot of Mount Hakodate. This is a neighbourhood where east meets west.

When Hakodate became one of the first ports in Japan to welcome foreign trade, this brought ideas and influence from the west, which can be seen in the city’s architecture.

Some of the main attractions in the Motomachi District are the churches.

Hakodate Russian Orthodox Church: This church was initially founded in 1858 by the Russian Consulate. However, the current structure was built in 1916 after a major fire. The Hakodate Orthodox Church is known for its distinctive green onion domes and it has a nice garden you can walk around. 

Motomachi Roman Catholic Church: Built in 1859 as a temporary cathedral, this church had to be rebuilt again in 1923 after two major fires. Inside, you'll find an altar that was gifted by Pope Benedict XV.

Hakodate St. John Church: This is an Anglican Church that was founded by an English priest who visited Hakodate in 1874. It has an interesting cross-shaped roof. 

Mt. Hakodate Ropeway

The Mount Hakodate Ropeway is an aerial lift that transports passengers up to Mount Hakodate, an inactive volcanic mountain that stands 334 meters high.

The gondola can carry up to 125 people at a time and it’s a 3-minute journey to the top.

You can walk up or you can drive up, but riding the ropeway is the best way to enjoy the panoramic views of the city, the port and the beaches.      

We bought the round-trip tickets for ¥1,800, however, you could pay ¥1,200 one way to go up and then walk back down. 

Also, we visited in the daytime, but this is a popular spot for the best Hakodate night view.

Old Public Hall of Hakodate Ward

The Old Public Hall of Hakodate is an important historic building in the city. This is where members of the Imperial family stayed when they visited Hakodate.

The construction you see today was completed in 1910 to replace the previous town hall which burned down in the Great Fire of 1907.

What’s interesting about Hakodate is that it was one of the first ports to open to foreign trade, and this means it received some foreign influence which can be seen in the Western-style architecture. The building is painted a soft blue colour with bright yellow accents. 

The hall underwent extensive conservation and repair work in 2021, and it's still used today to host concerts and other events in the Grand Hall. 

Visitors can also dress up in costume like lords and ladies and have a professional photoshoot done, however, we opted to just explore the building.

Motomachi Park

Motomachi Park is located at the foot of Mt. Hakodate and it's a site of significant historical importance in Hakodate.

Before the Muromachi Era (1336–1573), the area where the park now stands was the location of a building named 'Hakodate,' from which the city derives its name - 'hako' meaning 'box' and 'date' meaning 'building'.

Over the centuries, it has been the site of the Hakodate Hachiman Shrine, the Hakodate magistrate's office during the late Edo period, and the former Hokkaido government office Hakodate branch. The park has continually served as a centre of politics in Hokkaido.

Today, it is surrounded by many famous and historical buildings, including the former Public Hall of Hakodate Ward and the former British Consulate.

It also offers beautiful views of Hakodate Bay and serves as a peaceful resting spot for visitors with plenty of large trees and shade. 

Walking through this park is a nice route back down to the waterfront and there are lots of cool sculptures to enjoy along the way.

Hakodate City Museum of Northern Peoples

Since we had quite a bit of rain during our trip to Hakodate, we visited several museums, one of them being the Hakodate City Museum of Northern Peoples.

This museum focuses on the Ainu, Uilta and Aleut who inhabited the areas of Hokkaido in Northern Japan, the coastal regions around the Okhotsk Sea in Russia, and the Aleutian Islands.

The northern peoples lived in extremely cold and harsh climates, and the museum showcases the clothes they would have needed to withstand the environment. You can also see the tools they would have used for fishing and hunting. Plus, there are descriptions of the diets they would have eaten, featuring lots of fish, bear and kelp!

The Museum of Northern Peoples is housed in the former Bank of Japan building that dates from 1926. 

We really enjoyed our visit and would recommend visiting not just as a rainy day activity, but to learn more about the Northern Peoples.

Hakodate Tram

One fun way to move around Hakodate is by riding the vintage trams or streetcars!

There are only two tram lines in the city, and they follow the same route except for the last three stops. Tram 2 runs from Yunokawa to Yachigashira, while Tram 5 runs from Yunokawa to Hakodate-Dokkumae.

These two lines are great for sightseeing as they go past lots of Hakodate's main tourist attractions. This is a handy guide to Hakodate's tram system.

Hakodateshi Hokuyo Museum

Because it was a rainy day we were looking for indoor activities, so we decided to visit another museum. Next up, we visited the Hakodateshi Hokuyo Museum, also known as the Hakodate City Northern Pacific Fishery's Document Museum.

The museum focuses on the connection between Hakodate and the sea emphasizing the North Sea Fishery that once prospered in the area. 

This is a quirky little museum where you can see a taxidermied polar bear, a walrus, and loads of sea lions. 

However, I would say the highlight was trying their fishing boat simulator. Basically, you walk into a room with a screen that plays waves of the high seas in wintertime, and then the room begins to rock and sway to mimic the stormy waves. 

The whole experience only lasts 3 minutes, but it's enough to make you dizzy and appreciate the work fishermen do because it's sure not easy!

The admission fee to the museum is very reasonable, at just ¥100, making it an accessible attraction for visitors.

Goryokaku Park and Fort

Goryokaku Park is a historical park renowned for its unique star-shaped fort, which played a significant role in Japan's history. 

This style of fortification was inspired by Western military architecture and was designed to provide better defensive capabilities than traditional castle structures. 

Goryokaku Fort was originally built as part of Japan's efforts to modernize its defences. Fort Goryokaku was completed in 1866 and it was used as the main headquarters of the short-lived Republic of Ezo - the island of Ezo is what’s today known as the island of Hokkaido.

The Republic of Ezo was the first government to attempt to institute democracy in Japan, though voting was only extended to the samurai caste, and it managed to exist for five months before it was annexed by the newly established Empire of Japan. 

Goryokaku Park is a popular spot to see cherry blossoms with the flowers blooming early to mid-May. So if you're visiting in the springtime and looking to enjoy some hanami (flower viewing) this is a great place to do so!

Visiting the Park and the fort is free, though there is an admission fee for the Hakodate Magistrate Office.

Goryokaku Tower

Goryokaku Tower stands 107 meters tall and is an iconic observation tower located within Goryokaku Park in Hakodate.

The tower offers visitors 360-degree views of Goryokaku Park, the star-shaped Goryokaku Fort, and the surrounding area, making it one of the city's top tourist attractions.

If you're already at the park, it's worth going up for a bird's eye view. 

What to eat in Hakodate

Hakodate Salt Ramen

If you only have time to try one local dish in Hakodate, make it the Hakodate Salt Ramen also known as Hakodate Shio Ramen.

This is the culinary specialty of Hakodate and is recognized as one of Hokkaido's must-try ramens right up there with Sapporo Miso Ramen and Asahikawa Soy Sauce Ramen.

Hakodate Salt Ramen first made its appearance in 1884, making it potentially one of the earliest types of Japanese ramen. The dish features very thin, straight noodles and common toppings include thick slices of roasted pork, scallions and bamboo strips, just to name a few.

The broth is known for its clarity and lightness, especially when compared to the milky broths of other ramen styles. It is less fatty than its cousins from Sapporo and Asahikawa and stays true to its Chinese roots with a clear broth that lacks seafood or seaweed flavouring in the stock. 

We ate at a place called Yondaime Ramen, where we ordered from a ticket vending machine. Sam got the Yondaime Salt Ramen with broiled pork, which is the restaurant's #1 best seller. Meanwhile, I got the plain salt ramen flavour which is made with a clear chicken broth.

It was delightfully warm, flavourful and filling. The perfect meal for a rainy day!

Fresh Seafood

Hakodate is renowned for its fresh and delicious seafood. The city's location on the coast of the Sea of Japan makes it a prime destination for seafood lovers and there are several types of seafood to try.

Crab (Kani): Hokkaido, including Hakodate, is known for its high-quality crab. Snow crab (Zuwai-gani) and king crab (Taraba-gani) are the most famous varieties. You can enjoy crab dishes such as kani sashimi, kani nabe (hot pot), or grilled crab legs. Many restaurants in Hakodate offer crab-centric menus, especially during the winter season when crab is in season.

Sea Urchin (Uni): Hokkaido is a major producer of sea urchin, and you can savour the creamy and sweet uni at seafood markets and sushi restaurants in Hakodate. Uni is often served as sushi, sashimi, or in rice bowls (uni don).

Scallop (Hotate): Hokkaido is also known for its large and succulent scallops. You can enjoy them grilled, pan-seared, or as sashimi. Grilled scallops with a miso or butter sauce are a popular choice.

Salmon Roe (Ikura): Ikura, or salmon roe, is a common topping for sushi and rice bowls in Hakodate. The bright orange, slightly salty roe bursts with flavour and is a must-try for seafood enthusiasts.

Seafood Donburi: Donburi, or rice bowls topped with seafood, are a delicious and filling option. You can find seafood donburi dishes that feature a mix of fresh seafood, often served with a flavorful sauce or marinade.

Shrimp (Ebi): Shrimp dishes, including tempura, are commonly found in Hakodate's seafood restaurants. The sweet and tender local shrimp make for a delightful meal.

Herring (Nishin): Hakodate is known for its marinated herring dishes, often served as nishin sushi or pickled nishin hoba miso, which is herring simmered in a rich miso sauce and served on a magnolia leaf.

Sushi and Sashimi: Hakodate has a thriving sushi scene, and you can't visit the city without trying fresh sushi and sashimi made from a variety of seafood. Look for local sushi restaurants or seafood markets for the best options.

Lucky Pierrot

Lucky Pierrot is a renowned hamburger chain exclusive to Hakodate. Established in 1987, this restaurant chain has expanded to 17 different locations within Hakodate.

Each restaurant has its own distinct theme (a good reason to try and visit them all!) including Birds of the World, History of Hamburgers, Audrey Hepburn, artworks by Botticelli, Elvis Presley and more. 

The theme of the restaurant we visited was 'Angels' with cherubs hanging from the ceiling and lots of angel sculptures and angel paintings. 

Lucky Pierrot has won a whole bunch of awards including the first prize for Best Local Burger store in Japan!

That being said, their menu is quite eclectic with hamburgers, Japanese curry and spaghetti all featuring as main dishes, as well as soft serve ice cream and sesame balls on the dessert menu. 

Hokkaido Ice Cream

The island of Hokkaido is responsible for producing over 50% of Japan's milk. Known for its cool climate and wide pastures, the region has become very famous for its dairy products, especially its ice cream.

For a little something sweet, we went to Milkissimo, an ice cream shop located inside Goryokaku Tower.

Their gelato flavours are made using ingredients unique to Hokkaido and also fruits that are in season. That means their ice cream flavours change throughout the year. 

We opted for 3 flavours: pumpkin, purple sweet potato, and haskap berry also known as the honeyberry. They also had flavours like chestnut, matcha and plain milk.

You'll be able to try lots of strange soft-serve ice cream as you travel across Japan, however, if you can try gelato even better!

Where to stay in Hakodate

Near Hakodate Station

Staying close to Hakodate Station is ideal for easy access to public transportation. This area is perfect for travellers who plan to explore beyond the city. You'll find a range of hotels here, from luxury to budget-friendly, ensuring comfort and convenience.

Motomachi

For those interested in the historical aspect of Hakodate, the Motomachi area is a great choice. This district is home to a blend of Western and Japanese-style buildings and offers easy access to major tourist attractions like the Old Public Hall of Hakodate Ward and the Motomachi Roman Catholic Church. The area has charming guesthouses and boutique hotels, providing a more intimate and culturally rich experience.

Goryokaku

If you're interested in Hakodate's history, consider staying near the Goryokaku Fort. This area is a bit quieter and offers a mix of modern hotels and traditional ryokans. It's a great place to experience both the historical and modern sides of Hakodate.

Yunokawa Onsen

For a relaxing stay, choose the Yunokawa Onsen area, known for its hot spring resorts. This area is a bit further from the city centre but offers a tranquil and luxurious experience with its range of onsen hotels. It's perfect for those looking to unwind and enjoy the therapeutic benefits of the hot springs.

Day Trips from Hakodate: Exploring Beyond the City

Onuma Quasi-National Park: About 30 minutes by train, this scenic park offers boating, cycling, and walking trails around picturesque lakes dotted with small volcanic islands. Fall colours here are gorgeous!

Matsumae Castle: Visit Japan’s northernmost castle, famous for its cherry blossoms in spring and dramatic ocean views year-round.

Esan Onsen: For a super local hot spring experience, travel east along the coast for wild volcanic scenery, rustic baths, and seafood restaurants where you’ll eat what’s caught that morning.

Getting Around Hakodate: Trams, Buses, and Walkable Wonders

One of the things I loved most about Hakodate is how easy it is to get around. The city’s major sights are surprisingly compact, so you can explore a ton by foot, tram, or bike—no rental car needed!

Trams:If you want to travel like a local (and give your feet a break), hop on one of Hakodate’s two retro tram lines. The trams are colour-coded and easy to navigate, with English signage at major stops. Buy a one-day pass (Ichinichi Josha-ken) at the station or on board for unlimited rides—great value if you’re sightseeing across town. The tram even has stops for Yunokawa Onsen, Goryokaku, and the waterfront.

Buses:For destinations the trams don’t reach (like Mount Hakodate’s base or the ferry terminal), local buses are frequent and reliable. Google Maps works surprisingly well for Hakodate’s transit, so just plug in your destination and follow the directions.

By Foot or Bicycle:The Motomachi district, waterfront, and Morning Market are all within walking distance from Hakodate Station. If you’re feeling energetic (or just want to feel the sea breeze), several guesthouses and hotels offer bike rentals—a fun way to explore quieter residential neighbourhoods and discover local bakeries or coffee shops off the tourist path.

Best Time to Visit Hakodate: Weather, Events & Seasonal Highlights

Hakodate is a true four-season city, and each season brings its own special charm. Here’s what to expect:

Spring (April–May): Hanami Season

Cherry blossoms in Goryokaku Park are legendary—imagine a star-shaped moat ringed with thousands of trees in full pink bloom! Go early in the morning to enjoy peaceful hanami before the picnic crowds arrive.

The weather can be chilly and sometimes rainy, so pack a warm jacket and an umbrella.

Summer (June–August): Festive Vibes

Summers are mild compared to much of Japan, with cool ocean breezes and average highs around 20°C (68°F).

Enjoy outdoor festivals like the Hakodate Port Festival in early August, which features a massive fireworks display, traditional Yosakoi dancing, and local food stalls galore.

Early summer is the best time to try squid (ika) fresh from the bay—look for squid fishing boats all lit up at night!

Autumn (September–November): Fall Colours

The mountains around Hakodate explode in fiery reds and golds; head to Hakodate Park or trek partway up Mount Hakodate for colourful views.

Seafood is at its best in autumn, especially crabs and salmon.

Winter (December–March): Snowy Scenery & Onsen

Hakodate gets plenty of snow, turning the city into a winter wonderland. The Motomachi slopes look extra magical dusted in white.

Warm up at Yunokawa Onsen, where you can even spot Japanese snow monkeys bathing in the hot springs!

Don’t miss the Hakodate Christmas Fantasy Festival, when the red brick warehouses are lit with festive lights and a floating Christmas tree glows in the bay.

Is Hakodate worth visiting?

Hakodate is well worth a visit for anyone planning a visit to the island of Hokkaido. If you're arriving in Hokkaido by train, your first stop on the island will be Hakodate so this is a very logical first destination before you continue on to Sapporo and beyond. 

We chose to make Hakodate our first stop so there wouldn't be any backtracking. Plus we had already spent several hours on the train up from Tokyo, so we didn't feel like adding another 3-and-a-half-hour journey to reach Sapporo. 

Aside from logistics, this city is a cool introduction to the island where you can learn about Hakodate's development from a mere trading post to a key port city.

Hakodate has enough attractions to keep you busy sightseeing for 2-3 full days. 

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fanoVhLnIA4

Where to go after Hakodate

Noboribetsu Onsen

Noboribetsu Onsen is a hot spring resort town situated on the southwestern side of Hokkaido. This area is known for its volcanic landscapes punctuated by steam vents, bubbling lagoons and powerful geysers.

Some of the highlights include hiking through Hell Valley locally known as Jigokudani, dipping your feet in the Oyunuma River Natural Footbath, visiting Enamdo Temple which houses an animatronic puppet, and enjoying spicy ramen noodles! You can get some ideas of more things to do in Noboribetsu Onsen here.

Of course, the accommodations of choice when staying in an onsen town is a ryokan and this town has plenty to choose from.

Sapporo

Sapporo is the largest city on the northern Japanese island of Hokkaido and serves as the capital city of Hokkaido Prefecture.

Some experiences not to miss when visiting Sapporo include going up Sapporo TV Tower for panoramic city views, visiting Ramen Alley for a bowl of miso ramen with corn and butter, and enjoying a beer tasting at the Sapporo Beer Museum. 

This city is best known as a winter destination thanks to Sapporo Snow Festival, however, it's a destination that can be enjoyed year-round. 

Otaru

Otaru is a picturesque city located on the western coast of Hokkaido facing the Sea of Japan. It's located approximately 25 kilometres northwest of Sapporo, so it's a very logical place to visit either on a day trip or for a few days. 

This charming port city is known for its well-preserved historical buildings, scenic canals, and a strong connection to its maritime heritage. 

Some of the highlights include a boat ride through the Canal District which is lined with historic stone warehouses, exploring the city's glassmaking industry through its shops and glassmaking studios, and visiting a restaurant that is still illuminated by gas lamps and feels like a step back in time. 

Hakodate, Hokkaido: 12-Question FAQ for Sights, Food, Transport, Seasons & Day Trips

How many days do I need in Hakodate?

We suggest 2–3 full days. That gives you time for the Morning Market, Motomachi and its churches, the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouses, Mt. Hakodate Ropeway, Goryokaku Park & Tower, and a museum (or two), plus an easy day trip.

What’s the easiest way to get to Hakodate?

From Tokyo, ride the Tōhoku Shinkansen to Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto (~3h23m), then transfer to the Hakodate Line to Hakodate Station. From Sapporo, take the Hokuto Limited Express (~3h46m) straight to Hakodate Station.

When should I visit the Hakodate Morning Market—and what do I eat?

Go early. It’s ~5:00–12:00 (6:00 start Jan–Apr) near JR Hakodate. Order kaisendon (seafood rice bowl)—think shrimp, crab, tuna, salmon roe, or sea urchin—plus slurp a side of noodles if you’re hungry.

Is the Mashu Maru ship museum worth it?

Yes—especially for history/transport fans. The preserved 1965 railway ferry tells the story of Hokkaidō–Honshū links before the Seikan Tunnel. Expect bridge and radio room access, harbor views, and ¥500 admission.

What’s special about the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouses?

They’re Meiji-era waterfront warehouses reborn as shops, cafés, and galleries—great for souvenirs and photos. The exposed beams, timber ceilings, and industrial lighting ooze character.

Where can I get the classic Hakodate city view?

Take the Mt. Hakodate Ropeway (3 minutes to the top; ¥1,800 round-trip / ¥1,200 one-way). Day views show the bay and beaches; night views sparkle. Walking or driving up is possible, but the ropeway is the most scenic.

What are Motomachi’s highlights?

A compact blend of Western-influenced architecture: the Hakodate Russian Orthodox Church (green onion domes), Motomachi Roman Catholic Church, and St. John’s Anglican—plus Hachiman-Zaka Slope for postcard bay views.

What’s inside the Old Public Hall of Hakodate Ward?

A pastel-blue, 1910 Western-style former civic hall for Imperial visits—restored with antique furnishings and a grand ballroom. It still hosts events; visitors can tour rooms (and even dress up for photos).

Which museums are good on a rainy day?

Hakodate City Museum of Northern Peoples (Ainu, Uilta, Aleut culture, clothing, tools; set in a 1926 Bank of Japan building).

Hakodateshi Hokuyō (Northern Pacific Fishery) Museum (quirky, with a boat storm simulator; ¥100 admission).

How do I get around—do I need a car?

No car needed. The two tram lines cover most sights (grab a one-day pass for unlimited rides). Buses fill the gaps. Motomachi, the waterfront, and the Morning Market are walkable from Hakodate Station, and many hotels rent bicycles.

What should I eat in Hakodate?

Start with Hakodate Shio (Salt) Ramen—clear, light broth with thin straight noodles. Add fresh seafood (crab, scallops, uni, ikura) and pop into Lucky Pierrot for Hakodate’s cult burgers. Finish with Hokkaidō gelato/ice cream—seasonal flavors like haskap, pumpkin, or purple sweet potato.

What are the best day trips from Hakodate?

Ōnuma Quasi-National Park (lakes, cycling, boating; ~30 minutes by train).

Matsumae Castle (Japan’s northernmost castle; stellar cherry blossoms).

Esan Onsen (wild coast, local baths, ultra-fresh seafood).

#### 1 Day in El Chaltén, Argentina: Visitor's Perfect Day Trip Itinerary (What To Do With Limited Time)
El Chaltén in one day is basically a daylight heist.

You’ve got limited hours, a bus schedule that doesn’t care about your dreams, and a town that keeps waving world-class hiking trails at you like, “Go on… you can totally fit Fitz Roy AND Cerro Torre AND a waffle in before dinner.”

Clear skies are the jackpot in El Chaltén—this is the kind of day-trip view of Fitz Roy that makes you forget the wind and the early bus. From the trail, the granite spires pop above lenga forest and the wide Patagonian valley, setting up a perfect “hike first, feast later” day.

Spoiler: you can’t. Not unless you’re trail-running with a teleportation device.

But you can have an unreal day here—one that feels big, scenic, and satisfying—if you plan it like a person who respects time, wind, and the fact that your legs are not replaceable. 

We’ve spent enough time in El Chaltén to learn two truths:

the hiking is world-class, and

one day is never enough… but it can still be incredible if you plan it like a human with a clock, not like an Instagram caption.

This guide is a one-day game plan built for real travelers with limited time: day-trippers coming from El Calafate, people squeezing El Chaltén into a broader Patagonia itinerary, and anyone who wants a “maximum wow per hour” day without turning it into a survival documentary.

https://youtu.be/wselXYT-3N0

One-day snapshot: what you can realistically do

Here’s the honest trade-off: in a single day, you usually choose one “main objective” (a bigger hike) or you stack several shorter hits (viewpoints + waterfalls + food). Trying to do everything is how you end up speed-walking through paradise while whispering “we’re fine” through clenched teeth.

🧾 Quick Booking: Your El Chaltén Travel Essentials 🥾✨

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit (Book These 4 Things)

✅ What to book💡 Why it’s worth it🔗 Quick link🥾 Tours & experiencesEasy way to lock in a glacier day, a Lago del Desierto adventure, or a guided option when weather turns moodyBrowse El Chaltén tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & staysEl Chaltén sells out fast in peak season — booking early = better locations + fewer “only the priciest rooms left” momentsFind El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car rentals (optional)Best for freedom days: Ruta 40 viewpoints, flexible timing, photo stops, and a smoother Lago del Desierto runCompare car rentals in El Calafate (gateway to El Chaltén) on DiscoverCars🚌 Bus ticketsThe classic El Calafate ↔ El Chaltén route is simple — but popular departure times fill upBook El Calafate → El Chaltén buses on Busbud

👉 One-click backup (reverse direction): Book El Chaltén → El Calafate buses on Busbud

El Chaltén one-day snapshot infographic: three realistic time scenarios—day trip from El Calafate, overnight in town, or a car/private transfer at dawn—paired with the best strategy (short-hike stack, one iconic hike, or big hike + add-ons) and the vibe you’ll feel (snack-fueled highlight reel, earned-your-dinner pride, or ‘hacked the system’ energy).

Your time realityBest “one-day” strategyWhat it feels likeDay trip from El Calafate (arrive late morning, leave evening)Short-hike stack + best viewpoints + great foodLike a highlight reel with snacksYou sleep in El Chaltén (one full day + early start)One big iconic hike (Fitz Roy or Cerro Torre) + a small bonus viewpointLike you earned your dinnerYou have a car/private transfer and can start at dawnBig hike + extra add-onsLike you hacked the system

This El Chaltén one-day snapshot infographic breaks down four realistic travel “vibes,” from chasing the iconic Fitz Roy photo to choosing a comfortable classic hike, stacking short day-trip viewpoints, or leaning into cafés and waterfalls when the weather turns chaotic. It’s designed to help visitors match limited time, energy, and conditions with the smartest possible plan.

Destination Snapshot: pick your one-day vibe

VibeYou’ll love this if…Main moveDon’t do thisIconic, “I came for Fitz Roy”You want the photo and you’re willing to workLaguna de los Tres (early start)Starting late and hoping vibes carry youComfortable classicYou want a big day without the steepest grindLaguna TorreAssuming Cerro Torre will show up on commandShort & sweet (best day trip)You’re day-tripping, traveling with kids, or conserving legsMirador de los Cóndores + Chorrillo del SaltoTrying to “also add Laguna Capri just quickly”Weatherproof foodieThe forecast looks chaotic but you still want a great dayMiradores + cafés + waterfallMarching into exposed terrain to prove a point

Audrey Bergner arrives in El Chaltén on day one of our Patagonia adventure, posing beside the Route 41 sign in Santa Cruz Province. The quiet road, wide-open landscape, and rocky hills mark the moment we officially entered Argentina’s trekking capital and kicked off a week built around hiking, weather watching, and big mountain views.

Our one-day “origin story” (why this guide is built the way it is)

When Audrey and I first rolled into El Chaltén, we were equal parts excited and overly ambitious. We’d just come off big Patagonia meals (you know the kind: “we earned this” dinners that you absolutely did not earn), and suddenly we were in Argentina’s trekking capital talking like we were about to summit something. 

Also: we showed up in full “Patagonia food tour” mode, and our bodies were like… excuse me? Audrey’s jeans stopped cooperating, I was entering my “rotunding, bulbous plumptitude” era, and suddenly El Chaltén was politely suggesting we move our skeletons.

Reality check arrived fast. Groceries were pricier and more limited than we expected, Wi-Fi was… let’s call it “sporadic at best,” and the wind was already reminding us who runs this place. Audrey and I inhaled pizza, grabbed supplies, and still couldn’t resist squeezing in a sunset hike to Mirador de los Cóndores because the daylight was basically cheating.

From Mirador de los Cóndores, Nomadic Samuel pauses to photograph El Chaltén spread out below, with the Río de las Vueltas cutting through the valley and rugged Patagonian peaks rising on both sides. This short but steep hike delivers one of the best quick-payoff viewpoints in town, making it a perfect stop on a one-day El Chaltén itinerary.

And by “sporadic Wi-Fi,” we mean: our mobile data basically didn’t work, the Wi-Fi kept dropping, and we even had a moment where we couldn’t get the hotel payment to process. Groceries were pricey (the “a dollar per apple” moment was humbling), but there was free Wi-Fi in the central plaza—so if you need to load maps, tickets, or messages, that little detail can save your sanity.

That first short hike is a big reason this post exists. It’s steep enough to wake up your legs, short enough to fit into a tight schedule, and the views are so immediate that you feel like El Chaltén just handed you a welcome gift. It set the tone for the rest of our stay: move when the weather lets you, eat like it’s part of the plan, and don’t confuse ambition with good decision-making.

December daylight really is cheating (sunset can stretch ridiculously late), but the funny part is we still ended up in “grandma bedtime” mode—hand-washing laundry, setting alarms, and calling it a night while the sky was still basically pretending it was afternoon.

Laguna de los Tres is the iconic “money shot” hike in El Chaltén, featuring turquoise glacial water set beneath the dramatic granite spires of Mount Fitz Roy. Reaching this viewpoint requires a long, demanding hike and a steep final climb, making it a true main objective for travelers trying to maximize a single, clear-weather day in Patagonia.

Choose your “main objective” in 60 seconds

This is the decision that makes (or breaks) your day. Pick one primary goal, then build everything else around it.

This “main objective” idea is exactly how we approached our own week here. Even with six nights in town, Audrey and I still woke up each morning thinking: what’s the one thing today is built around? That mindset kept us from wasting good weather windows—and it stopped us from doing the classic El Chaltén mistake of trying to be everywhere in one day.

Main objectiveThe payoffTime on trail (typical)EffortCrowd levelWeather sensitivityWorks for a Calafate day trip?Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy “money shot”)The iconic Fitz Roy viewpoint8–10 hrsHighVery highHigh (wind + visibility matter)Only for early starters / very long daylightLaguna Torre (Cerro Torre vibes)Glacier lagoon + Torre massif drama7–8 hrsModerateHighMediumPossible, but tight if you’re not sleeping in townMiradores + Chorrillo del Salto (short-hike stack)Big views in small bites + waterfall4–6 hrs total (stacked)Low–moderateMediumLow–mediumYes. This is the safest “perfect day trip”Town day + short miradorCafés, breweries, scenery, “I’m still on holiday” energy2–4 hrsLowLowLowYes (and underrated)

If you’re reading this because you have one day and you’re not sleeping in El Chaltén, skip the hero fantasy for a moment and keep reading. We’ll still give you the big-hike option, but we’ll also give you the itinerary that actually fits in the day.

The rules of one day in El Chaltén (aka: how not to self-sabotage)

The bus ride into El Chaltén delivers an unforgettable first impression, with an empty Patagonian road stretching toward jagged, snow-covered peaks in the distance. As you cross the open steppe toward Los Glaciares National Park, the scale of the landscape becomes impossible to ignore—this is where the mountains start to feel close, wild, and wonderfully intimidating.

✅ El Calafate → El Chaltén bus tickets (Busbud)

✅ El Chaltén → El Calafate bus tickets (Busbud)

Rule 1: Build your day around the bus (or your wheels)

If you’re day-tripping from El Calafate, your “start time” is not when you finish breakfast. Your start time is your bus departure. Everything else is secondary.

Your best move: pick one of the earlier buses, and choose your return bus before you choose your hike. (Because it’s hard to enjoy the mountains when you’re mentally calculating sprint speed.)

We get it because we’ve done the “3-hour bus each way” reality—and once you’ve lived that, you stop thinking of El Chaltén as a casual day out and start treating it like a fun little logistics mission (with mountains as your reward).

👉 Compare El Calafate car rentals on DiscoverCars (best gateway for El Chaltén)

El Chaltén’s compact town center sits directly beneath the granite spires of Mount Fitz Roy, creating one of Patagonia’s most dramatic everyday backdrops. Colorful buildings, fluttering Argentine flags, and quiet streets give the village a frontier feel, while the surrounding mountains remind visitors that world-class hiking begins just beyond town.

Day-tripping from El Calafate: the timing math that keeps your day fun

Most day trips look like this:

~3 to 3.5 hours each way on the road

one long scenic stretch along Ruta 40 and Route 23 with the mountains slowly getting sharper

a quick stop en route (often at a roadside spot like Hotel La Leona) to stretch, grab a snack, and remember that “just one day” is, in fact, a full mission

The key question isn’t “What hike do I want to do?” It’s:How many hours do I realistically have between arrival and my return bus?

Use this quick budget:

30 minutes: arrive, bathroom, fill water, sort tickets, organize layers

60–90 minutes: lunch + snacks + a small “town wandering” buffer

60 minutes: reward block (coffee/beer/dinner before departure)

Everything else = hiking time

If you have 4–6 hours of hiking time total, you want the short-hike stack.If you have 7–9 hours of hiking time total and you’re confident in your pace, you can consider a bigger hike.

Bus pairing playbook (use this to choose your “safe” plan)

If you arrive…And you leave…Your realistic hiking window (after buffers)Best planLate morningEarly evening4–5 hrsMirador de los Cóndores + Chorrillo del SaltoLate morningLate evening5–6.5 hrsAdd Mirador de las Águilas or extend your waterfall timeEarly morningEvening6–7.5 hrsLaguna Capri or a longer short-hike stackEarly morningLate evening7.5–9 hrsBig hike possible (Torre is the safer pick)

If you’re looking at that table and thinking “I can do the big one,” we respect the confidence. Just keep one more thing in mind: wind steals minutes. It slows your pace, increases fatigue, and makes breaks longer because you’re searching for sheltered rocks like a lizard with a purpose.

The day-trip golden rule

If your return bus is fixed, choose a plan that lets you be back in town at least 45–60 minutes before departure. That buffer is for:

slow descents

bathroom lines

the sudden need for a second pastry

and the universal Patagonia surprise: weather shifting right when you thought you were done

Rule 2: Patagonia is not a motivational quote

Wind and visibility can change your plan, and that’s not a personal failure. Your goal isn’t to “complete the hike.” Your goal is to have an amazing day and return with the same number of bones you started with.

After a long day hiking in El Chaltén, nothing hits quite like a proper comfort-food reward. This plate of soft potato gnocchi tossed in a rich, creamy mushroom sauce was exactly what our legs and spirits needed—proof that Patagonia isn’t just about dramatic mountains, but also about well-earned meals that feel even better after the effort.

Rule 3: Food is part of the itinerary

In El Chaltén, eating well is not optional—it’s strategy. Audrey and I are foodies. We literally plan hikes (and any other day for that matter) around where the next warm thing is coming from. No shame. A good day here includes:

a proper breakfast

a packed lunch (or a plan for it)

a “post-hike reward” meal that feels mildly ridiculous

Audrey and I leaned hard into the lunchbox routine here—order the night before, pick it up in the morning, and you’re instantly a functional adult with a plan. And yes… we were absolutely the people calling it a “snack stop” when it was clearly a mini lunch (especially the day our salad container tried to explode in the backpack).

Rule 4: Buffers are your best friend

Add buffer time for:

wind (slows you down)

photo stops (you’ll stop)

trailhead logistics (bathrooms, tickets, “where are my gloves?”)

café temptations (you’ll cave)

Hiking in El Chaltén isn’t only about chasing famous viewpoints—it’s also about soaking in stretches of quiet, beautiful landscape like this. Green meadows, twisted lenga trees, and rocky hillsides create a slower, more contemplative side of Patagonia that unfolds step by step as you move along the trails surrounding town.

What you need to know before you start

National Park access and tickets (don’t get caught out)

Most of the classic trailheads around town are part of Los Glaciares National Park’s Northern Zone (Zona Norte). Entrance is handled differently than the Perito Moreno glacier area: for the Northern Zone portals (the ones you’ll care about in El Chaltén), tickets are obtained online and paid by card—no cash (be sure to check current prices as this is ever changing and evolving). Trailheads often have QR codes to scan, but don’t assume you’ll have perfect signal at the exact moment you need it.

If you’re only in El Chaltén for one day, treat this as part of your “pre-game.” Buy your ticket the night before or on the bus with decent data, screenshot the confirmation, and move on with your life.

One small “locals know” note we got early: don’t let the friendly town dogs follow you onto the trails. They’re sweet, but rangers warned us it’s a real problem for local wildlife (including endangered deer in the park). Pet the pup in town, get your serotonin there, and keep the trails dog-free.

Trail navigation: it’s well-marked… but still use offline maps

El Chaltén trails are generally well signed, and major routes are straightforward. Still:

download an offline map

don’t rely on mobile coverage

know your turnaround time (more on that below)

What to pack for a one-day hit (even if you “never get cold”)

This is the minimum kit that keeps your day fun instead of type-two-fun:

Windproof layer (non-negotiable)

Warm layer (fleece or light puffy)

Rain shell or poncho (Patagonia loves drama)

Water (at least 1.5L; more on big hikes)

Snacks you actually want to eat

Lunch (sandwich, empanadas, or a “trail charcuterie” situation)

Sunscreen + sunglasses (yes, even when it’s cloudy)

Hat or buff (wind defense)

Headlamp if you’re doing a big hike or winter/shoulder season

Basic first aid (blister care is the real emergency)

Cash + card (cash for small things / backup, card for the park ticket)

Power bank (cold + photos = dead phone)

The “wind reality check” table

Wind is personal, but numbers help you avoid self-delusion.

Forecast gusts (rough)What it often feels like on exposed sectionsSmart one-day move0–40 km/hAnnoying hair dayAny plan works40–65 km/hYou start leaning into gustsPrefer shorter hikes + viewpoints; be cautious at miradores65–80 km/hBracing becomes tiringChoose the short-hike stack; skip long exposed sections80+ km/hProgress becomes a negotiationMake it a town + mirador day. Seriously.

The Laguna Torre hike begins with long, peaceful stretches through Patagonian forest before opening up to glaciers and dramatic mountain views later on. Here, Nomadic Samuel walks one of the quieter sections of the trail, where twisted lenga trees and soft forest light make the journey feel calm and immersive long before the payoff viewpoints appear.

The perfect one-day itinerary (best for most day-trippers)

This is the itinerary we recommend for most people who have limited time and want a day that feels full, scenic, and joyful without turning into a marathon.

It stacks the highest “wow per hour” spots:

Mirador de los Cóndores (and optionally Mirador de las Águilas)

A proper lunch break

Chorrillo del Salto waterfall

Time for a café/beer reward

You still make your bus without sprinting

Perfect day itinerary: timeline

Use this as a template. Adjust based on your bus arrival/return times and the season’s daylight.

10:30–11:00 — Arrive in El Chaltén and do “logistics mode”

Use the bus ride to buy your park ticket (or confirm it’s ready)

Drop bags at your accommodation (if staying) or use luggage storage

Bathroom break, fill water, buy last-minute snacks

11:00–13:00 — Mirador de los Cóndores (and Mirador de las Águilas if you’re feeling it)

This is the best first move on a day trip because:

it’s close to town

you get panoramic views fast

you learn what the wind is doing today

you start the day with a “wow” instead of waiting hours for it

Mirador de los Cóndores is the classic viewpoint over town and valley. If you’re feeling good and the weather is stable, continue to Mirador de las Águilas for more wide-open scenery.

Our take: Do Cóndores no matter what. Decide on Águilas at the junction based on wind and legs. “Optional” means optional.

13:00–14:00 — Lunch break (don’t skip this)

Eat now. Not later. Later is how you turn into a snack goblin halfway to a waterfall.

Easy lunch options:

Pack a lunch and eat at a viewpoint or in town

Grab a quick café meal

If you’re in a rush, do a bakery run and accept your fate happily

14:00–16:30 — Chorrillo del Salto waterfall (easy, pretty, satisfying)

Chorrillo del Salto is the perfect “afternoon hike”:

short and foresty

steady and low drama

ends at a legit waterfall

If your legs are tired or you’re with family, this is the move that still feels like you did El Chaltén.

16:30–18:30 — The reward phase (coffee + pastry or beer + comfort food)

This is where the day becomes memorable.

After logging serious kilometers on El Chaltén’s trails, settling into a taproom for a well-earned beer feels almost ceremonial. Dark and golden pints like these are a favorite post-hike ritual in town, offering a warm, relaxed space to rest tired legs, replay the day’s views, and toast surviving Patagonia’s famously unpredictable weather.

Pick your vibe:

Café + waffles/alfajor energy

Craft beer + burger energy

Slow dinner if your return bus is late

Our personal rule: If we climbed anything, we are owed something. Preferably with melted cheese.

18:30–20:40 — Return to El Calafate (or sunset stroll if you’re staying)

If you’re day-tripping, you’ll likely be on an evening bus back to El Calafate. If you’re staying overnight, this is your golden-hour stroll time—wander, take photos, and enjoy the fact you’re not leaving.

Mirador de las Águilas is a natural add-on to Mirador de los Cóndores and a smart upgrade for visitors with a bit of extra energy on a one-day El Chaltén trip. The short climb rewards you with sweeping views over open valleys and river flats, offering a quieter, less crowded perspective that still feels expansive and distinctly Patagonian.

How to upgrade your day (without upgrading your suffering)

Maybe you have more time than the average day-tripper. Maybe you slept in town. Maybe you’re fit, stubborn, and fuelled by a suspicious amount of optimism. Here are the best “upgrades” to the day, in order of sanity.

Upgrade 1: Add Mirador de las Águilas (if the wind is behaving)

If you do Cóndores and feel great, keep going to Águilas. The views open up more, and it’s a solid way to feel like you went “beyond the basic.”

Upgrade 2: Add Laguna Capri as a half-day Fitz Roy taste

If you want a Fitz Roy-flavored day without committing to the full Laguna de los Tres boss fight, Laguna Capri is the sweet spot. It’s one of the best “reward-to-effort” hikes in town.

A realistic way to do it in one day:

Start early (ideally sleeping in El Chaltén)

Do Laguna Capri as your main hike

Add Cóndores late afternoon or as a sunrise/arrival warm-up

Upgrade 3: Choose one big hike (Fitz Roy or Torre) and make everything else secondary

If you want the iconic hike experience, do it. Just treat it like your whole day, not something you squeeze between coffees.

Below are two “big hike” one-day itineraries designed to be practical.

This simple wooden sign marks the decision point on the Laguna de los Tres hike—one that matters even more if you’re attempting it as a day trip. Once you commit to this route in El Chaltén, the distance, elevation gain, and final steep climb leave very little wiggle room, making weather, pace, and turnaround timing absolutely critical.

Big Hike Option A: Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy) in one day

This is the headline act. It’s also the one that humbles people who thought they were “casual hikers.”

Who this is for

You’re reasonably fit

You have a full day in El Chaltén (sleeping in town helps a lot)

You’re okay with a long day on trail

You’re willing to turn around if weather turns

The one-day plan (sleeping in town)

06:30–07:30: Big breakfast + pack lunch

07:30–08:00: Start hiking early (beat crowds and heat)

10:00–10:30: Laguna Capri area (optional break)

Midday: Push up-valley, steady pace, snack every hour

Early afternoon: Final steep section (“the gut-check”)

14:00–15:30: Enjoy the viewpoint (if visibility is good)

15:30–19:00: Hike back, more careful on the descent

19:30+: Dinner like you just won something

Our own “won something” dinner ended up being a tiny, cozy place near the bus terminal called Senderos (it felt like a boutique-guesthouse dining room—only a handful of tables). I went for a blue cheese risotto situation, Audrey got lentejas, we split wine, and then did the most El Chaltén thing possible: waddled back and passed out early… and slept like champions.

The “gut-check” reality

The last steep section is where people negotiate with themselves. Go slow, take small breaks, and don’t let faster hikers bully your pace. You’ll get there when you get there.

For us, the “gut-check” had a very specific personality: kilometer nine turned into a bottleneck because everyone was tired and the trail got steep, rocky, and extra unforgiving. What kept Audrey and I moving was the steady stream of hikers coming down saying, “keep going, it’s worth it.” Then we finally reached the top, got hit with wind beyond belief, hid behind a rock, and devoured the very sad remains of our lunch (a granola bar and some candy) like we’d never eat again.

Foodie tip: Pack something that feels like a treat. This is not the moment for dry crackers. Bring chocolate. Bring a sandwich you actually respect.

Laguna Torre is one of the most rewarding one-day hike options in El Chaltén, combining long, scenic valley walking with dramatic views of glaciers and granite spires. This route delivers a true Patagonian experience without the punishing final climb of Laguna de los Tres, making it a smart choice for travelers with limited time and good weather.

Big Hike Option B: Laguna Torre in one day

Laguna Torre is often called the “more comfortable” big day. It’s still a long hike, but the elevation gain is more forgiving and the trail is generally straightforward.

Who this is for

You want big scenery with slightly less suffering

You’re day-tripping but have a long daylight window and an early start

You like glacier vibes and moody mountain drama

The one-day plan (sleeping in town)

07:30: Breakfast + pack lunch

08:00: Start hiking

11:30–12:30: Arrive at the lagoon area (depending on pace)

12:30–13:30: Lunch with views (wind permitting)

13:30–17:00: Hike back

18:00+: Reward phase (beer + hot food)

The moody-day truth

Laguna Torre is still beautiful in bad weather, but the “Cerro Torre reveal” depends on visibility. If clouds are glued to the mountains, you might finish the hike thinking, “So… it’s a very nice… and oh so grey.”

That’s still a good day. Just don’t let a moody sky convince you it wasn’t worth it.

Hiking up to Mirador de los Cóndores is one of the easiest ways to earn big views in El Chaltén without committing to a full-day trek. The well-marked trail winds through low Patagonian shrubs and rolling terrain before opening up to panoramic views over town, making it an ideal short hike for day-trippers and first-time visitors.

If you only have one day and you want the “iconic” feel, here’s the best compromise

If you’re day-tripping from El Calafate and you want one bigger hike without rolling the dice too hard, choose Laguna Torre over Laguna de los Tres. The timing is generally more forgiving, and you’ll still get that “I hiked in Patagonia” satisfaction.

Then add Mirador de los Cóndores either:

the afternoon before (if you arrive the day before), or

as a quick sunset hit if you’re staying overnight.

The “turnaround time” rule (the simplest safety hack)

A lot of people get into trouble because they think the hike ends when they reach the destination. It ends when they get back to town with daylight and energy left.

Use this formula:

Decide your latest safe return time (bus departure or sunset minus buffer)

Halve your available time for the outbound journey

Turn around when you hit that time, even if you’re “almost there”

Example:If you must be back in town by 18:00, and you start hiking at 10:00, you have 8 hours total.Your outbound budget is 4 hours. If you haven’t reached your target by 14:00, turn around.

Is it annoying? Yes.Is it better than missing your bus or hiking in the dark with a pastry as your only survival tool? Also, yes.

Patagonicus is one of El Chaltén’s classic post-hike food stops, and this cozy interior captures exactly why. After a long day on the trails, we waited patiently for pizza while swapping trail stories, warming up indoors, and watching other hikers roll in looking just as tired and happy. It’s the kind of place where good food feels earned and time slows down.

🥾 Plan B Adventures: Tours & Easy Day Trips from El Chaltén

Even hardcore hikers end up with a “Plan B” day in Patagonia. When the wind is feral, legs are toast, or you just want someone else to handle the logistics, these Viator options are easy wins.

👉 Browse El Chaltén tours (plus nearby options) on Viator

OptionBest forBook it🚌 El Chaltén “Complete Experience” day tour (from El Calafate)A low-effort way to “see El Chaltén” without committing to a big hikeEl Chaltén Complete Experience Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)🧊 Perito Moreno Glacier full-day + optional boat safariClassic Patagonia bucket-list day that doesn’t require hardcore hikingPerito Moreno Glacier Full-Day Tour with Optional Boat Safari (Viator)🚤 “Todo Glaciares” navigation (Upsala + Spegazzini)Big-glacier scenery with max comfort (aka: let the boat do the work)Glaciares Gourmet Navigation: Upsala & Spegazzini Navigation (Viator)🗿 El Calafate city tour + Walichu CavesA cultural/history reset day (great when the weather is moody)El Calafate City Tour + Walichu Caves (Viator)🚙 Nativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (4x4 style)Off-road adventure + viewpoints when you want something different than trailsNativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (Viator)🇨🇱 Torres del Paine full-day trip (from El Calafate)Maximum “Patagonia wow” in one day (long day, huge payoff)Torres del Paine Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)

Food strategy for a one-day El Chaltén mission

El Chaltén is a hiking town, which means:

you will burn more calories than you expect

you’ll suddenly care deeply about sandwiches

and you’ll become strangely emotional about warm soup

Breakfast: go big

A one-day itinerary lives or dies by breakfast. Aim for:

eggs + bread + fruit

oatmeal + nuts

or anything that makes you feel stable and powerful

Our place served breakfast at 6:30am and we treated that like the starting gun. Even if daylight goes late, the early start is what makes the whole day feel calmer—especially if you’re chasing a big objective and want a buffer for weather and photo stops.

Lunch: pack it

Even if you plan to eat in town, pack something. Trails don’t care about your lunch reservation.

Our typical “trail lunchbox” looked like: a rice-and-veg salad (plus cheese/egg), an apple, a peanut bar, mini muffins, and a few candies for morale. Very glamorous. Very effective. And if something starts leaking in your bag, congratulations—you’re eating lunch at kilometer two whether you planned to or not.

Easy packable lunches:

sandwiches (classic for a reason)

empanadas

wrap + cheese + salami (trail charcuterie)

leftover pizza (don’t judge; it works)

Post-hike reward: choose your “victory meal”

After a hike, we become very persuasive about dessert. You should too.

Case study: after one of our ~20 km days, we inhaled burgers, walked back to the hotel, and were basically horizontal by 8:30pm. Part legs, part food coma—but that’s the honest rhythm of El Chaltén if you hike big and eat properly.

Reward categories:

“Comfort food” (burgers, fries, milanesa, pasta)

“Café recovery” (waffles, cakes, hot chocolate)

“Beer therapy” (brewpub + anything salty)

There’s a special kind of joy when pizza finally arrives after a long hiking day in El Chaltén, and Patagonicus delivers exactly that moment. This generously topped pie—simple, filling, and easy to share—felt like the perfect post-hike reward, especially paired with a cold drink and the collective relief of finally sitting down after hours on the trail.

Options to Consider:

PAISA High Mountain Coffee — specialty coffee (Colombian-style) plus cakes/pastries for a strong pre-hike start.

La Nieve Café y Viandas — coffee + simple “viandas” (grab-and-go food) when you need something fast and practical.

Panadería & Cafetería Lo de Haydée — classic bakery for facturas, sandwiches, and easy trail snacks.

La Waflería — big sweet and savory waffles (a “before/after the mountain” institution).

Cúrcuma Cocina — vegan + gluten-free comfort food (surprisingly filling), plus healthy options.

B&B Burger Joint — burgers + fries when you want maximum calories with minimum decision-making.

Laborum Pizzería — excellent artisanal pizza (often limited batches), great for an easy take-away dinner.

La Cervecería Chaltén — local craft beer + pub food; classic “we survived the wind” post-hike hangout.

Bourbon Smokehouse — American-style comfort food, cocktails, and local beers (happy-hour energy).

Patagonicus — hearty sit-down spot (pizza/soups/Argentine-ish classics) that works well for groups.

Hostería Senderos Restó Bar — Patagonian-leaning menu + wine bar vibe; they can also prep a packed “vianda” if you ask.

Heladería Domo Blanco — artisan ice cream for the end-of-day victory lap.

The perfect one-day packing checklist

Print this in your brain:

Park ticket purchased (or ready to buy with data)

Offline map downloaded

Windproof layer

Warm layer

Rain protection

1.5–2L water

Snacks (at least 3)

Lunch

Sunscreen + sunglasses

Hat/buff + gloves (shoulder season)

Headlamp (big hikes / shorter daylight)

Power bank

Cash + card

Blister care

We’re extra intense about offline maps here because we learned it the slightly annoying way: our data didn’t reliably work, the Wi-Fi liked to disappear, and “I’ll just load it at the trailhead” is exactly the kind of optimism Patagonia punishes. The central plaza Wi-Fi bailed us out more than once.

Mistakes people make on a one-day visit (so you don’t have to)

Trying to do Fitz Roy and Torre in one day

This is the classic “we’re built different” mistake. Unless you’re trail-running and hate joy, pick one.

Starting too late

Late starts turn gorgeous hikes into stressful marches. If you’re day-tripping, your best lever is the earliest transport you can reasonably do.

Underestimating wind

Wind doesn’t just make you cold. It slows you down, drains energy, and can turn exposed viewpoints into a comedy sketch.

Not packing lunch

You will not regret carrying an extra sandwich. You will regret not carrying one.

Ignoring the return trip

Downhill is where tired legs get sloppy. Save energy and time for the return. It counts.

Micro-itinerary builder: build your own perfect day (with guardrails)

Here’s a simple “plug and play” way to design your one-day plan.

Step 1: Choose your main hike (pick ONE)

Mirador stack + waterfall (safest)

Laguna Capri (half-day classic)

Laguna Torre (big day)

Laguna de los Tres (biggest day)

Step 2: Add one “bonus bite”

Choose one:

Mirador de los Cóndores (if not already)

Mirador de las Águilas (if wind is calm)

A slow café hour (yes, this counts)

Step 3: Add the reward block

Minimum 60–90 minutes. You earned it.

Step 4: Lock your return time

Bus departure or sunset minus buffer.Then work backwards and stop pretending time is fake.

Three complete one-day itineraries (pick your vibe)

Itinerary 1: The “Perfect Day Trip” (most visitors)

Best for: day-trippers, families, casual hikers, anyone who wants a full-feeling day

Morning arrival

Mirador de los Cóndores (+ Águilas optional)

Lunch

Chorrillo del Salto

Café/beer + dinner

Evening departure

Itinerary 2: The “I want a big hike” day

Best for: fit travelers sleeping in town

Option A (Fitz Roy): Laguna de los TresOption B (Torre): Laguna Torre

Early breakfast

Start hiking early

Long lunch break in the scenic zone

Return with daylight

Victory meal

Itinerary 3: The “windy day, still awesome” plan

Best for: high gusts, low visibility, tired legs, shoulder season

Mirador de los Cóndores (check the scene)

Coffee + bakery crawl

Short forest walk or waterfall

Early dinner

Sleep like a champion

🏨 Where to Stay in El Chaltén (Our Top Hotel Picks)

⭐ Quick Booking Box: El Chaltén Hotels (Compare Rates)

PickBest forVibeBooking link🏆 Top PickFirst-timers who want an easy, reliable baseComfortable “no-regrets” stayCompare top stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com💎 Boutique / Treat-YourselfCouples, hikers celebrating a big trek, views + comfort seekersCozy-luxe Patagonia energyBrowse boutique stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com🏘️ Mid-range (great value)Most travelers who want comfort without splurgingWarm, practical, walkableFind mid-range El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com💰 BudgetRoad-trippers + hikers who only need a clean baseSimple, wallet-friendlySee budget stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com

🔎 Want to browse all options instead?👉 Compare all El Chaltén stays on Booking.com

Where to stay (if you can add one night)

If you can turn “one day” into “one day plus one night,” your options expand massively. Even a single overnight lets you:

start at dawn

pick better weather windows

avoid the bus-time crunch

Broad categories:

Budget: hostels + simple rooms (book early in summer)

Mid-range: apartments/posadas for comfort and kitchen access

Treat-yourself: boutique stays with views (and excellent breakfast)

If you only do one upgrade to your trip, make it: sleep in El Chaltén.

Where to stay (if you can add one night): 8 solid options (budget → splurge)

Rancho Grande Hostel & Restaurante (budget / social) — big, classic backpacker base with dorms + privates, 24-hour reception, on-site restaurant, and traveler-friendly facilities (good if you want a lively vibe). 

Patagonia Travelers’ Hostel (budget / central) — right in town and close to the trail starts, with a shared kitchen and free luggage storage (handy if you’re hiking after checkout). 

Familia de Campo Hostel (budget / cozy + practical) — warm, homey hostel feel with two well-equipped shared kitchens, a bright lounge with views, and a garden/BBQ setup.

Hotel Poincenot (mid-range / comfort + location) — comfy rooms in a very convenient spot, with a full breakfast and a bar offering gourmet sandwiches + a strong wine selection. 

Chaltén Suites Hotel (mid-range / hotel comforts) — solid mountain-town hotel with a house buffet breakfast and an on-site restaurant/bar setup (nice for a straightforward, no-fuss stay). 

Hotel Lunajuim (mid-range / friendly + trail-focused) — comfortable, well-located option with breakfast buffet plus restaurant/café/bar energy (and generally “hiker-friendly” service).

Destino Sur Hotel & Spa de Montaña (high / post-hike recovery) — a splurgey pick with a proper spa setup (sauna/jacuzzi/massages) and an indoor heated pool—excellent after big trail days. 

Los Cerros del Chaltén Boutique Hotel (high / views + amenities) — upscale boutique stay known for panoramic mountain views from common areas, plus hotel-style amenities that make resting feel like part of the itinerary. 

Final word: the best one-day plan is the one you can enjoy

El Chaltén is one of those places that rewards ambition—but it rewards smart ambition even more.

If the weather is perfect and you have the time, go big. Chase that iconic viewpoint. Earn the bragging rights.

If the wind is feral or you’re day-tripping on a tight schedule, don’t force a “legendary” hike just to say you did it. Stack the short hits. Eat well. Take in the views. Be present. Your photos will still look like Patagonia.

And your knees will thank you.

✨ Ready to lock in your El Chaltén plan?

🥾 Browse El Chaltén tours on Viator 

🏨 Find El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com 

🚗 Compare El Calafate car rentals on DiscoverCars 

🚌 Book El Calafate → El Chaltén buses on Busbud 

Frequently Asked Questions About Spending One Day in El Chaltén, Argentina (and Making It Count)

Is one day in El Chaltén actually worth it?

Yes. It won’t feel like “enough,” but it can absolutely feel like a proper Patagonia experience if you plan around one main objective and don’t try to cram every hike into one daylight window.

What’s the best hike if I only have one day?

For most people: Mirador de los Cóndores + Chorrillo del Salto (the short-hike stack). If you want one big hike and you’re sleeping in town, Laguna Torre is the best “big payoff without maximum suffering” option.

Can I do Laguna de los Tres as a day trip from El Calafate?

It’s possible but it's awfully tight and risky. You’ll need an early start, long daylight (summer), good weather, and a fast pace. Most visitors enjoy their day more by staying overnight or choosing a shorter plan.

Which is easier: Laguna Torre or Laguna de los Tres?

Laguna Torre is generally easier in terms of elevation gain and feels more “steady.” Laguna de los Tres has that final steep section that turns into a personal negotiation with gravity.

Do I need to pay an entrance fee to hike in El Chaltén?

For the main Northern Zone trailheads in Los Glaciares National Park, yes—there’s a fee and tickets are typically handled online. Check the current rules before you go.

Do I need hiking boots?

For the short hikes, sturdy sneakers can work in good conditions. For the big hikes, boots or trail runners with good grip are a smart move, especially if there’s mud, ice, or loose rock.

How windy does it get in El Chaltén?

Very. Wind can be calm one hour and aggressive the next. Bring a windproof layer and treat gust forecasts like real information, not background noise.

What should I pack for a one-day hike?

Wind layer, warm layer, rain protection, water, snacks, lunch, sunscreen, sunglasses, and an offline map. If you’re doing a big hike or shoulder season, add a headlamp and gloves.

Is it easy to navigate the trails without a guide?

Yes for most classic routes. Trails are generally well marked. Still, download offline maps and pay attention to weather and your turnaround time.

What’s the best time of year for a one-day visit?

Late spring through early fall is the classic season. Summer gives you long daylight but also crowds and wind. Shoulder seasons can be quieter but colder and more variable.

Are the restaurants busy?

In peak season, yes—especially in the evening. Having a backup plan (or eating early) keeps your post-hike reward from turning into a line-standing contest.

Can I do Mirador de los Cóndores with kids?

Usually yes. It’s a short hike and a great “first day” option, but wind can make it feel harder. Go slow, bring layers, and make it a snack-based adventure.

Is Chorrillo del Salto worth it?

Absolutely. It’s easy, pretty, and feels like a “real hike” without requiring a full-day commitment—perfect for a one-day itinerary.

What if the weather is bad?

Lean into the short hikes, viewpoints, cafés, and comfort food. A moody day can still be gorgeous. The key is choosing a plan that keeps you safe and lets you enjoy the atmosphere instead of fighting it.

#### 5 Best Things to do in Ireland for Outdoor Lovers
Towering castles, medieval cities, friendly people, and cozy pubs are all medals on the shelf for Ireland and they continue to drive people to this incredibly diverse island nation year after year. But perhaps Ireland's best feature is the vast number of outdoor activities a traveler can enjoy here.

The country is blessed with rolling emerald hills, glistening creeks and roaring waterfalls. The dramatic coastlines forms fortified cliff barriers that protect the fragile interior ecosystem from the thrashing waves of the Atlantic Ocean.

source: Vagabrothers on YouTube

If you're looking for a place to get out and explore nature and the outdoors, then look no further than Ireland.

In this post, I'm going to share with you the 5 best things to do in Ireland for those who love the outdoors. Let's get started.

Hiking in Ireland, one of the best activities for outdoor lovers.

1. Hiking

There's no question that the hiking in Ireland is some of the best in the world. The landscape is littered with formidable mountains that taunt climbers, while stunning shoreline paths drain camera batteries at an alarming rate.



You don't have to go far to find amazing hiking and trekking opportunities in Ireland either. Just a couple of hours outside of Dublin you'll find the popular Coumshingaun Lake Loop in County Waterford - a 5-hour hike with beautiful views of the lake all the way around (if the clouds don't roll in).

If you're looking to summit something while you're in the country, then Croagh Patrick in County Mayo might be the climb for you.

Around 25,000 pilgrims trek to the summit every year on the last Sunday in the month of July (Reek Sunday). This means that the hiking trail is well-worn and sign-posted so you really can't get lost.

Once at the top you can enjoy breathtaking views of Clew Bay and the surrounding countryside.

And these are just 2 of the many hikes you can find in Ireland.

Fly fishing is one of the best things to do in Ireland if you love the outdoors.

2. Fly Fishing

If you're into fly fishing, then for sure Ireland should be on your fly angling bucket list. Ireland has some of the best fly fishing in the world. With massive 20 lb salmon running up its rivers and the infamously fast-growing Farox Trout lurking in the depths of the Great Western Lakes.

Bring along your best 3-weight fly rods for the smaller creeks and rivers where you can land beautiful brown trout that range from 2 - 4 lbs.



You'll want to bring a heavier set-up for the Western Lakes and for Salmon-rich fisheries like The River Moi and The River Boyne, where you can find yourself hooking into 20-25 lb fish if you're lucky.

For a bit of saltwater fly fishing, head to the Dingle Peninsula, where you can cast your line from the beaches and tie into some beautiful Pollack, sea bass and wrasse.

The great thing about fly fishing in Ireland is that it can be done for a pretty decent price. A fishing license will cost around €25 and that should cover you for most types of fishing around the country. Just be mindful of local laws, regulations, and etiquette while you're on the rivers or lakes.

Some places are in private fisheries though, and if you plan to get into those pools, you'll have to pay a pretty penny, with permits costing as much as €20 per day.

Luckily, while Ireland isn't necessarily one of the cheapest countries in the world to travel, you can actually get by on very little if you rent a car (from €12 / day) and plan to camp the entire time. Which brings me to my next point...

From wild camping to eco-lodges, there are lots of places to enjoy the outdoors in Ireland.

3. Camping

Every outdoor lover enjoys a good campsite, and Ireland has plenty to suit all types of camping. From campervan parks and RV parks, to wild camping and eco-lodges with campgrounds on them, you can find a beautiful place to pitch your tent or park your camper throughout the country.

Campgrounds can cost as little as €8 per night and have all of the amenities you could ask for. There are plenty of books and guides to the best campsites around Ireland, so you shouldn't have a problem getting to them.

The best way to visit Ireland on a camping trip is to rent your own vehicle and drive around the country with a tent and some sleeping gear in the trunk. Luckily, car rentals are extremely affordable in Ireland, costing as little as €12 per day for longer rental periods.

While there are no designated "free" camping spots in Ireland, the country is large and wild enough that you can find free places to camp if you're on a multiday hike.

If there are people or houses in view, always go and ask if it's okay if you pitch a tent as you might unknowingly be on someone else's land. If there's nobody around to ask, you should be able to camp there, but just be sure to follow the "Leave No Trace" rules.

Clean up your garbage, be respectful, and care for the environment around you.

Biking can be a great way to explore the countryside in Ireland.

4. Biking

Just as there are plenty of hiking trails around Ireland, so too are there amazing cycling paths. Whether you want to go on a quick day ride, or a multi-day cycling adventure, you can do it all in Ireland.

One of the best areas in the country for cycling is around Killarney National Park. There are plenty of tour operators there that can take you out for a day, and you can also head out on the well-marked trails yourself.

See beautiful Lough Leane, elegant Muckross House and Gardens, mystical Muckross Abbey, and the multi-tiered Torc Waterfall. You'll get plenty of opportunities to take photos of the amazing scenery.

Pedal along paved and dirt paths past Muckross Abbey, Lough Leane, and the Torc Waterfall to name a few.

Horse trekking is another fun way to enjoy nature and the outdoors in Ireland.

5. Horseback Riding

With 50 thoroughbred horses per 10,000 people in Ireland, they have one of the highest race-horse to human ratios of any country on Earth. But that doesn't mean that you have to be a jockey to have a great time on horseback in the country.

There are a lot of beautiful horse trekking paths and day rides you can do around the country, particularly around Dingle and Sligo. Ride along beaches, through forests and past grazing sheep in the farmlands.

You won't have a hard time finding a horseback tour operator in these places and you can usually book a trip the same-day, particularly in the off-season.

When To Visit Ireland For The Outdoors

Ireland is a place with very unpredictable weather, so if your trip is based on being outside, then you should consider the best time of year to visit.

For hiking, fly fishing, horseback riding, camping, and cycling, the best time to visit Ireland is between June and September. The days are longer and the rains are less oppressive (but you can still get dumped on).

The only problem with this time of year is the dense crowds that descend on Ireland in these peak-season months.

If you really want to avoid the crowds, then you can probably get away with visiting Ireland in the shoulder season, from mid-April through May, or in late September through October.

During these types, you'll almost certainly be wetter and colder, but on those dry sunny days (which still occur in these months) you'll get your photos without 100 other people in the background.

Planning an Outdoor-Focused Trip to Ireland

Choosing Your Region (or Two)

RegionBest ForLandscape VibeGreat BasesIdeal StayKerry & DingleHiking, biking, coastal drivesBig peninsulas, cliffs, beachesKillarney, Dingle3–5 nightsGalway & ConnemaraWild hikes, bogs, lakes, islandsWindy, rugged, moodyGalway, Clifden3–4 nightsSligo & DonegalSurf, mountains, quiet roadsDramatic headlands, empty beachesSligo town, Donegal town3–5 nightsWicklow & EastEasy hikes close to DublinForests, valleys, rounded hillsDublin, Glendalough area2–3 nightsSouth Coast (Cork)Coastal walks, whale watchingCoves, colorful towns, gentler hillsKinsale, Bantry, Skibbereen3–4 nights

You don’t need to cram all of these into one trip. In fact, you’ll have a much better time if you pick two regions and do them properly rather than trying to race around the whole island.

If it’s your first visit and you love the outdoors, a really solid combo is:

Wicklow + Kerry/Dingle, or

Galway/Connemara + Sligo/Donegal

Dublin can just be your gateway on either end for a night or two.

7-Day Outdoor Ireland Itinerary (Minimal City Time)

If you want to spend most of your time outside, but still fly in and out of Dublin, here’s a realistic one-week loop that keeps you mostly on trails and coastal roads rather than inside museums.

Day 1 – Dublin to Wicklow

Pick up a rental car at the airport and head straight for Wicklow.

Stop in Glendalough for your first taste of valley-and-lakes hiking.

Choose a shorter marked loop if you’re jetlagged or a longer circuit if you’re buzzing with energy.

Stay in or near Glendalough, Laragh, or a country B&B.

Outdoor focus: Forest trails, monastic ruins, peaceful lakes.

Day 2 – Wicklow to Killarney

Early start and long drive down to Killarney.

Stretch your legs in Killarney National Park with an easy walk to Torc Waterfall or along the lakes.

If you’ve still got some gas in the tank, rent a bike in town to spin out your legs on the quiet roads around the park.

Outdoor focus: Warm-up hikes, lake views, first glimpse of the big mountains.

Day 3 – Killarney National Park & Gap of Dunloe

Dedicate this one to mountains and valleys.

Hike or cycle into the Gap of Dunloe, a glacial mountain pass with photogenic views every few steps.

Mix and match: walk one way, take a boat trip on the lakes, or hop in a jaunting car if you’re hiking with someone who’s less keen on big distances.

End the day back in Killarney with a hearty meal and, if you’re lucky, live trad music.

Outdoor focus: Valley hiking, peaceful roads, classic Irish scenery.

Day 4 – Ring of Kerry or Dingle Peninsula

You don’t really need both on a short trip. Pick your style.

Ring of Kerry: A big, classic loop with mountain passes, coastal viewpoints, and villages. Great if you love panoramic driving days with shorter stops and quick walks to viewpoints.

Dingle Peninsula: More compact, more intimate, fantastic coastal walking opportunities (like sections of the Dingle Way). Great if you want to park up and walk along cliffs, beaches, and headlands.

Either way, pack snacks, rain gear, and your camera. You’ll be pulling over constantly.

Outdoor focus: Short hikes, viewpoints, beaches, rugged coastal roads.

Day 5 – Killarney to Galway via the Cliffs and Burren

This is a longer travel day, but you can break it up well.

Drive north toward the Cliffs of Moher.

If the weather is cooperating, walk a short section of the cliff path instead of only hitting the main viewing platform.

Continue through the Burren, where the landscape turns into cracked limestone, wildflowers, and low hills. There are short waymarked walks in the Burren if you want to stretch your legs again.

Roll into Galway in the evening and wander through the old streets.

Outdoor focus: Iconic cliffs, unusual limestone landscapes, sea air.

Day 6 – Connemara: Lakes, Bogs, and Mountains

Give Connemara at least one full day.

Drive the loop through Maam Cross, Leenane, and Clifden.

Drop into Connemara National Park for a climb up Diamond Hill (a half-day hike with big views that doesn’t require mountaineering skills).

If the weather is grim, you can still do shorter low-level walks and scenic drives around the fjord and lakes.

Outdoor focus: Accessible mountain hiking, wild valleys, ever-changing light.

Day 7 – Back to Dublin

If your flight is late or the next day, sneak in a quick beach walk or promenade stroll around Salthill in Galway in the morning.

Make your way back to Dublin, aiming for a daylight drive if possible.

Drop off the car and end your trip with a last pint and a plate of something comforting.

Not every day will go perfectly to plan—this is Ireland after all—but this kind of structure keeps you outside plenty, without you needing to change beds every single night.

Getting Around: Car, Public Transport, or Tours?

You can absolutely explore parts of Ireland without driving, but for an outdoor-focused trip, a car is close to a superpower.

Quick Comparison

OptionBest ForProsConsRental CarHikers, campers, photographersTotal flexibility, trailheadsNarrow roads, extra cost, parkingPublic TransportPoint-to-point, linear routesNo driving stress, eco-friendlierLimited in rural areas, fixed timesDay ToursNon-drivers, short tripsEasy, no planning requiredCrowds, rushed stops, less flexibility

If you’re comfortable driving on the left and handling small roads, renting a car unlocks trailheads, quiet coves, and campsites that buses will never touch.

If driving feels like a nightmare, base yourself in a well-connected town (like Killarney, Galway, or Dublin) and:

Use trains/buses for longer jumps between main hubs

Join local day tours to reach national parks and scenic routes

You’ll see less, but you’ll also have far fewer “white-knuckle” moments with stone walls and tractors.

Budgeting for an Outdoor Trip in Ireland

Outdoor gear and walking are free once you own the kit, but Ireland itself isn’t particularly cheap. The good news: focusing on hikes, wild beaches, and countryside walks keeps your daily spend lower than a city-and-museum-heavy trip.

Very Rough Daily Costs (Per Person, Sharing)

StyleAccommodationFood & DrinkTransportActivitiesApprox Total (EUR)BudgetCamping/hostelsSelf-cater + pubsShared car/busMostly free outdoors60–90Mid-RangeB&Bs/guesthousesMix of pub meals & cafésRental car + fuelGuided day tour here/there100–150Splash-OutBoutique hotels/lodgesRestaurant meals, drinksPrivate car, taxisMore paid activities180+

You can shave costs by:

Camping or using hostels in the more outdoorsy areas

Self-catering some meals, especially breakfasts and picnic lunches

Filling your days with free hikes instead of daily paid attractions

You’ll spend a surprising amount on:

Pints and coffees (it adds up fast)

Fuel if you’re doing big loops

Occasional “treat” experiences like boat trips or guided mountain days

Weather, Gear, and Staying Comfortable Outside

Ireland has a reputation for giving you “four seasons in one day.” That’s not just a cute marketing phrase. You genuinely can go from sun to mist to sideways rain in an afternoon.

Clothing and Footwear

Think in layers rather than big heavy coats.

Base layer: Something that wicks, not cotton

Mid-layer: Fleece or light insulated jacket

Outer layer: Proper waterproof shell (not a fashion raincoat)

Bottoms: Quick-drying hiking trousers or leggings

Footwear: Sturdy hiking boots or trail shoes with decent grip

You don’t need full alpine gear, but you do want shoes that can handle mud, rock, and slippery grass. Trails are often boggy, and once your feet are soaked, morale drops quickly.

Outdoor Ireland Questions Answered: Hiking, Weather, Costs & Planning Tips

What’s the best time of year to visit Ireland if I want to be outside most days?

It depends. For long daylight and your best odds of drier days, aim for roughly June to early September, when evenings stretch late, temperatures are mild, and trail conditions are usually friendliest. If you prefer fewer crowds and don’t mind more rain and cooler temps, the shoulder seasons of late April–May and late September–October can be fantastic for hiking, biking, and road trips, as long as you pack proper waterproofs and accept that some days will be a write-off weather-wise.

How many days do I need in Ireland for a proper outdoor-focused trip?

Honestly, I’d say a week is the bare minimum if you want to see more than one region without rushing, and 10–14 days feels like a sweet spot for hikers and nature lovers. With seven days you can realistically pair somewhere near Dublin (like Wicklow) with one big western region such as Kerry or Connemara; with longer, you can slow down, repeat favourite trails in different light, and sprinkle in rest days so you’re not just driving from view to view.

Do I need to rent a car to reach the best hikes and outdoor spots in Ireland?

Yes. If your main goal is trailheads, remote valleys, and quieter coastlines, having a car makes life dramatically easier and opens up areas that buses simply don’t reach. You can still piece together a good trip using trains, buses, and the occasional day tour, but a rental car gives you freedom to chase weather windows, start hikes early, and linger at viewpoints without worrying about timetables.

Is driving in rural Ireland stressful for first-time visitors?

A little. The combination of driving on the left, narrow hedged roads, stone walls, and tractors can feel intense on the first day or two, but most people adjust far quicker than they expect. Go slow, avoid over-ambitious daily distances, let locals overtake when it’s safe, and stick to daylight driving at the start, and you’ll likely discover that Irish roads are part of the adventure rather than a nightmare.

How fit do I need to be to enjoy hiking and biking in Ireland?

Not really. You don’t need to be ultra-fit to enjoy Ireland’s outdoors because there are graded options almost everywhere, from gentle lake circuits and forest loops to full-day mountain hikes. If you can comfortably walk for a few hours at home and manage some hills, you’ll be fine on many classic routes; just be honest about your fitness, check estimated times, and choose shorter, lower-level trails on days with rough weather or low energy.

Is it safe to hike and camp in Ireland on my own?

Generally, yes. Ireland is widely considered one of the safer countries for solo travel, and most outdoor areas feel relaxed and welcoming, especially if you stick to well-used paths and established campsites. That said, treat the landscape with respect: check the forecast, let someone know your route and rough return time, bring a charged phone and basic navigation, and remember that the biggest risks are usually weather, slippery ground, and poor visibility, not crime.

Can I wild camp in Ireland or do I always need to stay in official campsites?

It’s complicated. There isn’t a blanket legal right to wild camp in Ireland, so in theory you should always have the landowner’s permission, but low-impact, discreet overnight camping is often tolerated in remote upland areas. As a rule of thumb, pitch late and leave early, stay well away from houses, farms, and roads, avoid camping in sand dunes or fragile ecosystems, and always follow strict leave-no-trace principles so that future hikers are still welcome.

What should I pack for an outdoor trip to Ireland with unpredictable weather?

Absolutely, think layers. A breathable base layer, a warm mid-layer, and a proper waterproof shell are essential, along with quick-drying trousers, a hat, gloves, and sturdy hiking boots or trail shoes with good grip for mud and wet rock. I always throw in a lightweight pack cover or dry bags for my gear, a compact umbrella for town days, and a cosy change of clothes for evenings in pubs so I’m not sitting in damp kit after a big hike.

Is Ireland a good outdoor destination for families with kids?

Yes. Ireland works brilliantly with kids because so many walks are short loop trails with plenty of natural wow moments like waterfalls, castles, cliffs, and sheep-filled fields to keep them interested. If you base yourself in places like Killarney, Dingle, or Galway, you can mix gentle hikes, beaches, boat trips, bike rentals, and pony rides with rainy-day options and family-friendly pubs where live music starts early.

How expensive is an outdoor-focused trip to Ireland compared with a city break?

Surprisingly, it can be more affordable than a museum-heavy city itinerary because most of your entertainment is free once you’ve got the gear. You’ll still feel costs in accommodation, food, fuel, and the odd guided activity, but hiking, coastal walks, and beach days don’t require tickets, and camping or using hostels in rural areas can keep your daily spend closer to a budget range than if you were eating and drinking your way through cities every day.

Do I need special permits or licenses for hiking, camping, or fishing in Ireland?

Sometimes. You generally don’t need permits for normal hiking in national parks and popular mountain areas, though certain car parks may charge and some private estates may have their own access rules. Fishing is different: many rivers and lakes require a licence or local permit, especially for salmon and trout, so it’s worth checking in advance with angling clubs or tackle shops rather than assuming your regular travel insurance covers everything.

Are the rain, wind, and midges in Ireland really as bad as people say?

Mostly, yes, but they’re manageable if you prepare your expectations. You should absolutely expect rain and wind at some point on almost every trip, even in summer, so good waterproofs and flexible plans are non-negotiable; in some western areas during warmer months, tiny biting insects (midges) can also be annoying around still water and at dusk, but a bit of insect repellent, long sleeves, and choosing breezier spots usually keeps them under control.

Where should I base myself in Ireland if I love the outdoors but still want pubs and music at night?

Luckily, Ireland specialises in small towns that offer both. Killarney is an obvious choice for easy access to mountains, lakes, and the Ring of Kerry; Dingle gives you coastal hikes and a compact, lively town; Galway is perfect if you want Connemara and the Burren by day with plenty of food and music after dark; and places like Westport or Sligo put you close to quieter mountains and surf beaches while still having a proper evening scene.

Can I still enjoy Ireland’s outdoors if I rely on public transport and guided tours?

Definitely. You’ll have a bit less freedom than someone with a rental car, but if you base yourself in well-connected hubs like Dublin, Killarney, Galway, or Cork you can use trains and buses for the long stretches and then book local day tours, shuttles, or guided hikes into national parks and scenic peninsulas. You won’t reach every remote trailhead, but you’ll still get a solid mix of cliffs, lakes, and valleys without ever having to get behind the wheel.

In Closing

If you're looking for an exhilarating outdoor adventure, then Ireland is likely one of the best places to visit.

Spend your days exploring waterfalls, fishing in rivers and riding horseback, and then wind down in the evening over a delicious pint and a hot Irish stew or a boxty in some of the oldest local pubs.

This is what Ireland is all about and as unforgiving as the weather can be, it can also be brilliant and the hospitality of the local people far outweighs the hostility of the climate and landscape. If you're going to Ireland, get ready for an adventure.

#### Bear Bistro at Island Lake Lodge: The Most Scenic Lunch in Fernie (Our Meal + Views)
Fernie was the kickoff to our British Columbia road trip—me (Nomadic Samuel), Audrey Bergner (That Backpacker), and our tiny boss (baby Aurelia)—freshly back in my home province after too much time staring at southern Alberta skies. And yes, Fernie immediately delivered that “ohhh right… this is why people won’t shut up about BC” feeling.

A well-earned lunch after a morning of hiking in Fernie, with Nomadic Samuel diving into the Wagyu smash burger on the Bear Bistro patio at Island Lake Lodge. This casual mountain meal came with big views, fresh alpine air, and that unmistakable “we have to come back here” feeling.

But the moment that turned this trip from “great little mountain town” to “we are absolutely coming back” happened up a rugged backroad, at the end of a cedar-valley climb, on a patio that made us say “wow” so many times we started sounding like malfunctioning robots.

Lunch at the Bear Bistro (a.k.a. Bear Lodge Bistro) at Island Lake Lodge was the highlight of our day… and honestly, one of the highlights of the trip.

https://youtu.be/RoRAhuPKiRE
Here is our BEST things to in Fernie YouTube video on Samuel & Audrey channel. For our entire Island Lake Lodge experience (including Bear Bistro) jump ahead to 12:53. 

Bear Bistro at a glance

WhatDetailsWhereIsland Lake Lodge, Fernie (up in the Cedar Valley, surrounded by peaks + old-growth forest)VibeCasual, serene, rustic lodge energy; big patio + big views SeasonSummer operations (dates vary year to year; check the calendar because closures happen) HoursTypically 11am–5pm, but operating days can vary by week (see “Before you go” below) ReservationsNone — first come, first served Pet policyNo pets on the patio (there’s “pet parking” nearby) Our orderMiso ramen + Wagyu smash burger + salted caramel ice cream sandwich + “Jos Louis” cake 

The view from the Bear Bistro patio at Island Lake Lodge is pure Fernie magic, with alpine peaks rising behind old-growth evergreens and summer flowers lining the terrace. It’s the kind of place where lunch turns into a long pause just to soak it all in.

The “earned lunch” factor

We didn’t roll in like elegant lodge people who wear linen and say things like “a spritz would be divine.”

We arrived like this: baby backpack, sweat, trail dust, and the kind of hunger that makes you briefly consider taking a bite out of your own camera strap.

That day started with the Fairy Creek Falls hike (Aurelia in the hiking backpack, Sam sweating “like a mule,” avalanche terrain signs keeping things spicy, and baby waking up perfectly in time for the waterfall like she has a built-in director’s schedule). 

Then we did the only responsible thing: Fernie Brewing Company for a “we earned this” beer (Ridgewalk Red Ale)… and learned the hard way it’s more pints + snacks than full meal. Which was fine. We called it “appetizer strategy.”

And then… Island Lake Lodge.

That drive felt like a little quest: the kind where you’re not sure if you’re headed to lunch or to audition for a rally race.

After lunch at Bear Bistro, we hit the shaded forest trails around Island Lake Lodge with Aurelia happily riding along in the backpack carrier. It was the perfect post-meal wander—quiet, green, and a reminder of how family-friendly Fernie’s hiking can be.

Getting to Bear Bistro (drive, bike, or hike)

Island Lake Lodge is up the Cedar Valley, and the Bear Bistro is up at the lodge. It’s not hard… it’s just committed.

Option 1: Drive up (most common)

After you enter the property gates, you drive up the access road approximately 8 km to the top. It’s described as rugged, with a 30 km/h max, and they recommend allowing about 20-30 minutes. 

Tip: If you’re prone to carsickness, this is a great time to practice deep breathing and positive affirmations like “the ice cream sandwich is the real deal.”

Option 2: Bike up (for the “I deserve this lunch twice” crowd)

Island Lake encourages riders to use the Lazy Lizard bike trail to reach the lodge, and there are bike racks right by the bistro entrance. 

Option 3: Hike up (the full reward mode)

From the lower parking lot, you can hop on the Rail Trail → connect to the Old Growth Trail → then hop on the Lake Trail with signage for the lodge. 

Tourism Fernie also calls out family-suitable options like the Rail Trail, Old Growth Trail, and Lake & Fir Trails. 

The entrance sign for Island Lake Lodge marks the start of the scenic drive into one of Fernie’s most iconic backcountry destinations. From here, visitors access hiking trails, spa facilities, and the Bear Bistro, making it the gateway to a memorable mountain experience.

The “check the calendar or you’ll cry” reality

This is the one detail that matters more than anything else: Island Lake Lodge has non-operational days and private function closures—and they really, truly want you to check the calendar before you drive up. 

Here’s the practical version:

The Bear Bistro page lists the bistro as open in summer Friday–Tuesday, 11am–5pm, with closures for private functions and non-operational days. 

Tourism Fernie hiking info adds that vehicle access to the lodge is typically Sunday–Tuesday, and on non-operational days/private functions the road is closed beyond the lower lot and no services are available. 

So: yes, you can often still hike from the lower lot even when services are closed… but if you drove there for ramen and a patio beer, you want an operational day.

Tip: The most Fernie sentence ever is, “We drove 30 minutes for lunch and got a great hike instead.” Don’t let it happen to you.

The spacious patio at Bear Bistro is where mountain lunches stretch a little longer than planned, with forest views, fresh air, and classic lodge architecture all around. On a sunny day in Fernie, this is the kind of place you settle into and forget about the clock.

First impressions: this place is ridiculous

We rolled up and immediately started doing the wide-eyed, pointing-at-everything routine.

“Look at the view… look at the chairs… look at the lake…”

Then the official verdict: Unbelievable place. The highlight of the day. The highlight of the trip. 

Island Lake Lodge sits in a spectacular setting—big peaks, a mountain lake, lush forests—and the approach itself runs you through ancient old-growth cedar.

And the Bear Bistro is in Bear Lodge, the historic first log building completed at Island Lake—home to that grand river-rock fireplace and the bistro itself.

It has that “cozy-but-not-cutesy” mountain feel: handcrafted lodge details, a rustic interior, and then… the patio. 

Island Lake itself literally describes the Bear Bistro as the kind of “post-exertion reward” that belongs on the “most scenic patio in the Fernie area.”

We’re not here to start patio wars, but… we get it.

Audrey diving into a comforting bowl of miso ramen at Bear Bistro, with towering evergreens and fresh mountain air all around. It was one of those unexpected moments where great food and an even better setting come together perfectly.

What we ate at Bear Bistro (and what we’d order again in a heartbeat)

We arrived at Island Lake Lodge in full “earned lunch” mode: we’d already done our hike, had a quick beer stop, and then rolled up the road to this backcountry lodge with serious hunger.

Then we stepped onto the patio and immediately went full-time professional view appreciators (“look at the view… look at the chairs…”) and declared it the highlight of the day—and honestly the trip.

And the food? It matched the setting. Like, suspiciously well.

A well-earned dessert moment at Bear Bistro, with Nomadic Samuel digging into the Elevated “Jos Louis”—a rich chocolate cake layered with soft marshmallow. It’s the kind of nostalgic, indulgent finish that feels especially right after a mountain-view lunch at Island Lake Lodge.

Our order (with prices from the Summer 2025 menu)

DishPriceWhy we loved itMiso Ramen22“Like traveling back to Japan.” Deep, comforting, post-hike perfection. Wagyu Smash Burger27“Shake Shack inspired” double-smash joy with major cheese energy. Housemade Ice Cream Sandwich (salted caramel)15Big, melty, and wildly satisfying with mountain views as the backdrop. Elevated “Jos Louis”12Nostalgic chocolate + marshmallow decadence that begs to be shared. 

A close-up look at the miso ramen at Bear Bistro, packed with chashu pork, springy noodles, and a deeply savoury broth. It’s the kind of comforting, unexpectedly excellent dish that tastes even better when enjoyed in the mountains at Island Lake Lodge.

Miso Ramen: the “wait… we’re in Fernie?” bowl

Audrey ordered the Miso Ramen, and I’m not exaggerating when I say she was transported. Her exact line: “It was like traveling back to Japan.” 

On the menu, it’s a proper, composed bowl: miso broth, egg noodles, chashu, soy egg, spinach, wood ear mushroom, and bamboo shoots. Which is basically the ideal blueprint for a post-hike reset: warm broth, chewy noodles, that salty-savoury miso depth, and enough “stuff” that you feel like you actually ate a meal.

It was also the perfect contrast to the whole rugged-road / cedar-valley / big-peak environment. You expect burgers, fries, and maybe a salad. Instead, you’re suddenly cradling a ramen bowl while staring at the Rockies like this is the most normal thing in the world. 

Who should order it

Anyone who wants something warming + satisfying after hiking.

Anyone who’s had great ramen elsewhere and is skeptical you can get a legit bowl up a backroad in the mountains. (You can.) 

The Wagyu smash burger at Bear Bistro is pure comfort food done right, with crisp-edged patties, melty cheddar, and a soft brioche bun that holds it all together. It’s the kind of mountain lunch that tastes even better after a hike—and makes you seriously consider ordering a second one.

Wagyu Smash Burger: the double-smash, “so much cheese” moment

I went with the Wagyu Smash Burger, and my immediate comparison—unprompted, with the confidence of a man holding a brioche bun—was that it felt Shake Shack inspired. 

Menu-wise, it’s two 3oz Wagyu patties, American cheddar, house-made burger sauce, and a brioche bun.And in real life, it ate like a greatest-hits playlist:

The thin, smashed patties give you those browned edges and that deep “griddled” flavour.

The cheddar + sauce + brioche combo is basically engineered to make you say, out loud, “this is so good” at least twice. (We did.) 

If you want the simplest “mountain lunch done right,” this is it. And if you’re sharing food like we did, it’s the perfect counterpart to ramen—one bowl, one burger, and suddenly you’ve built a tiny personal buffet without ordering half the menu.

Who should order it

People who want a classic patio lunch that feels indulgent but not fussy.

People who say they’re “not that hungry” and then eat half your burger. (We see you.)

The housemade ice cream sandwich at Bear Bistro is pure summer joy—thick chocolate chip cookies wrapped around salted caramel ice cream that starts melting the moment it hits the patio. It’s the kind of dessert you order “to share” and then quietly hope no one asks for the last bite.

Dessert: the ice cream sandwich + “Jos Louis” = choose-your-own happiness

We did the responsible adult thing and ordered two desserts.

Housemade Ice Cream Sandwich (salted caramel)

Audrey’s dessert was the housemade ice cream sandwich (you can choose salted caramel or cookies ’n’ cream on the menu). It’s a real ice cream sandwich—aka, not a polite little afterthought. This is the kind of dessert that makes you do quick math like: “If we hold it up for a photo, will it melt immediately?”

Who should order it

People who want a fun, shareable dessert that feels like summer—especially if you’ve hiked and you’ve earned the sugar. 

This Elevated “Jos Louis” is pure nostalgia with a mountain-lodge glow-up—a dense chocolate cake layered with soft marshmallow and finished with a rich chocolate coating. It feels playful and indulgent at the same time, and somehow even better enjoyed on the Bear Bistro patio.

Elevated “Jos Louis”

I went with the Elevated “Jos Louis”—a moist chocolate cake + soft marshmallow.It's a decadent chocolate cake with a bit of marshmallow filling. Nostalgic snack-cake energy, but upgraded and plated.

Who should order it

Chocolate people. Marshmallow people. Anyone who wants dessert that feels like a little victory lap. 

The underrated best ingredient: a sleeping baby

Here’s the part that made the whole meal feel borderline luxurious: Aurelia slept the entire time we were eating. So we had this rare, peaceful patio lunch where we actually got to taste everything while quietly competing to steal each other’s bites (“Oh my gosh, you’ve got to try this”). 

Then she woke up ready for the lake trail, and we got the full Fernie parenting experience: delicious meal, ridiculous views, and a tiny traveller who’s somehow thriving in the middle of it all. 

Island Lake Lodge feels like something pulled straight from a mountain daydream, with its handcrafted log architecture and expansive patios overlooking the surrounding wilderness. This is the heart of the property—and the place where many Fernie adventures naturally slow down and linger.

What else is on the Bear Bistro menu

This is pulled from the Bear Bistro Summer 2025 menu PDF (so expect seasonal changes), but it gives you a very accurate sense of the style: casual mountain dining with playful flavours, plus boards, salads, bowls, and a serious drinks list.

Quick “pick your vibe” guide

If you want…Order thisShare plates + patio grazingBear Frites, boards, chicken tendersA full meal that’s not a burgerMiso Ramen, Golden Crunch Bowl, Goldilocks BowlA lighter mealBear Summer Salad, Lodge Caesar, Watermelon & Tomato Salad Something crunchy + saucyChicken Karaage Sandwich or Golden Crunch Bowl Dessert-first behaviourIce Cream Sandwich, Whipped Cheesecake, Elevated “Jos Louis” 

Desserts

Whipped Cheesecake (berry coulis, graham cracker) — 12 

Elevated “Jos Louis” (moist chocolate cake, soft marshmallow) — 12 

Housemade Ice Cream Sandwich (salted caramel or cookies ’n’ cream) — 15 

Bowls

Goldilocks Bowl (quinoa, chickpeas, kale, carrot + beet, miso tahini dressing, soft-boiled egg, feta, beet hummus) — 24 

Miso Ramen (miso broth, egg noodle, chashu, soy egg, spinach, wood ear mushroom, bamboo shoots) — 22 

Golden Crunch Bowl (karaage chicken, tonkatsu sauce, rice, cabbage, grilled corn, carrot, chili garlic aioli) — 29 

Handhelds

Crispy Tofu Mushroom Sandwich (miso/tahini tofu, portobello, gochujang aioli, havarti, slaw) — 23 

Chicken Karaage Sandwich (chili garlic aioli, slaw, brioche bun) — 28 

Wagyu Smash Burger (two 3oz patties, cheddar, burger sauce, brioche bun) — 27 

“Take A Hike” Burger + Beer special

If you do the lodge’s trail-of-the-week promo, there’s a Burger + Beer special for 27 (with a veggie option: Lion’s Mane mushroom burger) and a choice of Fernie Brewing beers. 

Salads (and add-ons)

Bear Summer Salad — meal 19 / starter 12 

Lodge Caesar — meal 21 / starter 13 

Watermelon & Tomato Salad (whipped feta, prosciutto, focaccia, citrus dressing) — 23 

Optional add-ons: garlic chicken breast (10), garlic shrimp skewer (8) 

Start / Share

Crispy Chicken Tenders — 20 

Bear Frites — full 18 / half 12 

Cheese Board — 36 

Butcher’s Board — 34 

Charcuterie Board — 59 

Drinks (highlights)

Mocktails: Lavender Lemonade, Virgin Caesar, Zen Fizz, Iced Coffee. 

Local beers: multiple Fernie Brewing Company cans listed (Project 9 Pilsner, Hit the Deck Hazy IPA, Headwall Hazy Pale Ale, What The Huck Berry Ale, Waymark IPA, Campout Pale Ale). 

Cocktails: Sunnyside, Summer Berry Mojito, Lodge Caesar, Elderflower Spritz, Pimm’s Cup, Zen Fizz, plus a rotating cocktail-of-the-week. 

Drinks: cold beer, mountain air, and the “why don’t we live here?” moment

One of the lodge’s own descriptions of Bear Bistro is basically: cold beer, friends, lunch, backcountry setting.

And yes, there are Fernie Brewing Company options on the Bear Bistro menu. 

We had already put in a Fernie Brewing stop earlier (Ridgewalk Red Ale), but the vibe up here is different: quieter, slower, more “let’s stare at mountains until our eyes forget what emails are.”

After a beautiful hike around Island Lake, Audrey takes a moment to soak in the breathtaking mountain and lake views, enjoying the peace and tranquility that comes with a well-earned break at the lodge. This quiet moment, just steps from the water, was the perfect ending to our adventure.

A quick lakeside walk after lunch (the easiest “wow” you’ll get all day)

After eating, we wandered down toward the lake for a gentle stroll—because Island Lake has that Banff/Lake Louise kind of “how is this real?” feel without the crowds.

The Lake Trail is an easy loop (45–60 minutes, minimal elevation). It’s perfect when your time is limited—like after lunch.

Our version, because it was later in the day, was less “45–60 minutes” and more “look at baby… look at lake… wow… wow… wow.” 

“Take A Hike” Burger + Beer special (worth planning around)

If you want to turn this into a proper Fernie mission, Island Lake Lodge runs a “Take A Hike” trail-of-the-week deal: complete the featured trail, take a photo at the iconic spot, and you can redeem a Burger + Beer special at Bear Bistro.

The Bear Bistro menu itself explains the mechanics (photo at the iconic spot, tag on Instagram, show your server) and lists the $27 burger + beer special for participants. 

Tip: Even if you don’t do the promo, the “trail + patio” formula is the whole magic of this place.

Choosing your approach (quick decision matrix)

ApproachEffort levelBest forWhat to knowDrive-up lunchLowFamilies, casual visitors, “we just want the patio”Rugged road; allow time; check operational days/blackout dates Bike up (Lazy Lizard)MediumMountain bikers, active lunch peopleBike racks by the entrance; they prefer riders use the trail over the road Hike up (Rail → Old Growth → Lake)Medium to highHikers who want the full “reward meal”On non-operational days you’ll start from the lower parking lot; services may be closed “Lunch + Lake Trail loop”Very lowEveryoneEasy loop after eating; prime for families and “we’re full” strolls 

Practical tips (so your visit is smooth)

No reservations: it’s first come, first served. 

Groups: they may limit large group tables during peak congestion.

Pets: no pets on the patio; “pet parking” is nearby. 

Pack in/out: it’s private property—respect the place and pack out your garbage if you’re picnicking/exploring. 

If you’re hiking: bring the usual mountain basics. We’ll admit it—on our Fairy Creek hike we didn’t have bear spray (oops), so don’t copy that part. fernie_cleaned_transcript

Tip: If you’re visiting with kids, this is a dream scenario when naps align. If naps don’t align… well… you’ll still have mountains.

Island Lake is as serene as it looks, with still water reflecting towering peaks and forests in every direction. Canoeing here seems like it  unhurried and almost meditative—one of those simple experiences that quietly becomes a trip highlight.

Why this lunch felt like “the Fernie version of luxury”

Fernie impressed us because it has that sweet spot of serious scenery without the “everyone has the same itinerary” vibe.

We came for lunch.

We left plotting a return trip for canoeing, longer hikes, and Audrey’s extremely convincing pitch to “drive out right before a big snow dump and accidentally get stuck for three days.”

Fernie, you got us.

Plan your Bear Bistro day (simple, realistic game plan)

TimeDo thisMorningPick a hike (either in Fernie proper or up at Island Lake Lodge trails) Late morning / lunchAim for Bear Bistro before the afternoon rush; order something hearty + save room for dessertAfter lunchLake Trail loop (gentle, scenic, very “we’re full but happy”) Before you leaveTake a final patio look and say “wow” at least once for good luck 

Questions to toss in the comments

Have you eaten at Island Lake Lodge yet—Bear Bistro lunch, or the Tamarack Dining Room in the evening? And if you’ve done the “Take A Hike” trail-of-the-week special, tell us which trail you tackled.

Everything you need to know about Bear Bistro at Island Lake Lodge in Fernie, BC

Is Bear Bistro open year-round?

Nope. Bear Bistro is a summer-season spot, and operating dates/hours can change based on lodge operations and private functions. Always check the lodge calendar before heading up. 

What are Bear Bistro’s hours?

Typically 11am–5pm during summer operations. The exact operating days can vary by week (some sources list Friday–Tuesday; others list Sunday–Tuesday), so treat the calendar as the final boss. 

Do you need a reservation for Bear Bistro?

No. It’s first come, first served.

How do you drive to Bear Bistro?

After entering the property gates, it’s about 8 km up a rugged access road with a 30 km/h max speed; they suggest allowing about 20-30 minutes. 

Can you always drive all the way to the lodge?

Nope. In summer operations, vehicle access past the lower parking lot is closed on certain days, and on non-operational/private function days there may be no services. Plan around operational days and confirm by calendar.

Where do you park if the road is closed?

Tourism Fernie notes free parking at the lower parking lot during the summer season, and that it becomes the primary staging area on days when the road is closed beyond it. 

Can you bike to Bear Bistro instead of driving?

Yes. You can ride up via the Lazy Lizard trail, and bike racks are located right by the bistro entrance.

What’s the easiest hike to do after lunch?

Yes. The Lake Trail is a gentle loop (about 45–60 minutes with minimal elevation gain) and is specifically described as a great post-meal option. 

What did we order at Bear Bistro?

We had miso ramen, the Wagyu smash burger, and then dessert: the salted caramel ice cream sandwich and the “Jos Louis” cake. 

Is the ice cream sandwich actually worth it?

Yes. It’s one of those “this is why people blog” desserts—housemade, big, and totally designed for patio happiness. 

Is Bear Bistro kid-friendly?

Yes. Casual lunch, outdoor space, and you’re surrounded by easy trails. We visited with a baby and had the rare miracle of her sleeping through the whole meal. 

Are dogs allowed on the patio?

No. Pets aren’t allowed on the patio, but there’s designated “pet parking” nearby. 

What is the “Take A Hike” special?

It’s a trail-of-the-week promo where you hike the featured trail, take a photo at the iconic spot, and redeem a Burger + Beer deal at Bear Bistro (listed as $27 on the menu for participants). 

What’s the vibe inside Bear Lodge if the patio is full?

Cozy and rustic. Bear Lodge is the historic first log building at Island Lake and it’s known for its grand river-rock fireplace—classic lodge energy. 

Can you just picnic instead of eating at Bear Bistro?

Yes, but Island Lake Lodge notes it’s private property and asks visitors to pack in/pack out all belongings and garbage. 

Is Island Lake Lodge only about food in summer?

Nope. Tourism Fernie highlights hiking, canoeing, spa treatments, and lodging—so you can make it a full day (or a “why did we only book one night?” situation).

#### When is the Best Time to Visit Ushuaia, Argentina?
Wondering when is the best time to visit Ushuaia, Argentina? Here are the pros and cons of each season and seasonal events to keep an eye on.

Reaching the City at the End of the World is quite the endeavour, so if you're going to go through all the effort of getting there, you probably want to choose the best time to visit.

The great thing about Ushuaia is that it's a versatile destination that offers unique tours and adventures throughout the year. 

Summer is great for cruising the Beagle Channel and spotting sea lions, autumn brings fiery landscapes that charm hikers, winter is the time to hit the slopes at Cerro Castor, and spring brings Tierra del Fuego National Park to life again with wildflowers and active wildlife.

Like most travellers to Ushuaia, I chose to visit during the summer months in order to make the most of the long days and good weather. I also wanted to ring in the New Year in the southernmost city in the world, but that proved to be a bit anticlimactic as there isn't a whole lot going on unless you want to go to a bar! 

That's why today I'm breaking down the pros and cons of visiting Ushuaia in each season, along with activities and events you may want to include in your plans!

Best Time to Visit Ushuaia, Argentina

Summer in Ushuaia

(December to February)

Pros of summer in Ushuaia

Summer is the most popular time of year to visit Ushuaia with tourists descending on the city at the End of the World by the thousands. 

The pros of visiting Ushuaia in the summer are the long days where you can enjoy up to 18 hours of daylight! We found it a bit strange not experiencing darkness; we went to sleep before sunset and woke up long after sunrise. But on the bright side - quite literally! - it means you can maximize your days and squeeze in different tours and excursions.

Weatherwise, the summer temperatures in Ushuaia range from 8–20°C (46–68°F), making it a really nice time to enjoy outdoor activities.

We did quite a bit of hiking in Tierra del Fuego National Park during our summer visit. One of our highlights was hiking the Senda Costera or Coastal Trail, which starts next to the Post Office at the End of the World (where you can send a postcard!) and then follows the shores of the Beagle Channel.

There are lots of different tours you can enjoy inside Tierra del Fuego National Park, so don't think you're just limited to hiking. There's also canoeing, birdwatching, and the famous End of the World train ride.

Plus, there are numerous hikes to enjoy in and around Ushuaia, like Laguna Esmeralda and Vinciguerra Glacier, just to name a couple.

Another activity we thoroughly enjoyed was going on a Beagle Channel boat tour where we got to see sea lions, sea birds and Magellanic penguins! We also cruised past Les Éclaireurs Lighthouse, which is another iconic photo op.

If your schedule is flexible, summer is generally considered the best time to visit Ushuaia.

Summer is the peak season for cruises to Antarctica, so if you're planning to combine your visit to Ushuaia with a cruise to the White Continent, then summer is the best time to do so. If that's the case and you only have a few days to enjoy the city, you may find this 3-day Ushuaia travel itinerary helpful.

Cons of summer in Ushuaia

The downside of visiting Ushuaia in the summertime is that it is peak tourist season. This means it's important you book your accommodations and tours in advance as certain experiences can sell out.

If you want to stay at a particular property - Ushuaia has some beautiful luxury hotels! - you'll want to reserve that in advance. The same goes for the boat tours that visit Isla Martillo to walk with penguins, as only a small number of visitors are permitted per day.

The higher demand for tours and accommodations can also result in slightly higher prices than in the shoulder season, however, we still found it to be reasonably priced for such a remote corner of the world.

Lastly, I think it's worth noting that even during the summer months, the weather in Ushuaia can be quite temperamental, as it is across Patagonia. We visited during December and January and experienced everything from sunshine to intense winds and freezing rain. You still need to pack for a sub-Antarctic climate!

Recommended Summer Activity in Ushuaia:🐧 Hop aboard a Beagle Channel cruise with mini trekking. You'll see penguins and sea lions and cruise past the famous Les Éclaireurs Lighthouse. You'll then disembark at Bridges Islands for a walk and talk about local wildlife and the Yámana people.

Autumn in Ushuaia

(March to May)

Pros of Autumn in Ushuaia

Autumn in Ushuaia brings vibrant colours as the forests turn all shades of crimson, pumpkin and gold. This is the time of year that draws photographers looking to capture the changing Fuegian landscapes.

The weather starts to cool down ranging from 5–10°C (41–50°F), however, it's still a very comfortable temperature for hiking and enjoying the outdoors.

Some hikes to consider for peeping autumn colours include Laguna Esmeralda, Martial Glacier, and many of the trails in Tierra del Fuego National Park, which remain accessible through mid-autumn until the snow arrives.

Alternatively, you can admire the autumn foliage on a helicopter flight over Ushuaia, or you can also take in the landscapes while cruising the waters of the Beagle Channel.

Another pro of visiting Ushuaia in autumn is that it's the shoulder season. This means it is quieter with fewer tourists and you can expect to see prices drop for accommodations and tours.

Cons of Autumn in Ushuaia

There aren't too many downsides to visiting Ushuaia in autumn. Sudden rain and cooler spells can occur, but you can always save these days for indoor activities like visiting the Old Ushuaia Prison, going on a double-decker bus tour, or enjoying a taste of Fuegian cuisine. 

Recommended autumn activity in Ushuaia:🍂 Join a 4x4 tour of Paso Garibaldi, a mountain pass across the Fuegian Andes where you'll enjoy the autumn foliage. You'll see Lake Escondido, Lake Fagnano, and finish the excursion with a traditional Argentine barbecue.

Winter in Ushuaia 

(June to August)

Pros of Winter in Ushuaia

Winter in Ushuaia is something straight out of a postcard. This is when the City at the End of the World transforms into a wintry wonderland with snow-covered mountains and forests.

During this time of year, you can enjoy an abundance of outdoor sports like snowshoeing, dog sledding, snowmobiling, and ice trekking. This is the best time to go to Ushuaia for all things related to outdoor winter fun! 

Ushuaia is home to Cerro Castor, Argentina's southernmost ski resort, offering downhill skiing, cross-country skiing, snowboarding, and even an ice skating rink.

There are two fun winter events at Cerro Castor: the Snow Pool where skiers and snowboarders slide down a slope and then attempt to glide over a pool of water, and the Torch Descent where skiers and snowboarders descend the mountain with torches putting on a show for spectators.

Finally, we can't forget about Fiesta Nacional de La Noche Más Larga, or The Longest Night Festival, which celebrates the winter solstice with live music, dancing, and a variety of activities that take place across the city.

Cons of Winter in Ushuaia

The downside of winter in Ushuaia is that it will be cold. However, if you're visiting from Canada or the Nordic countries, you won't actually find it that cold! You might even say it's a mild winter.

The temperatures hover around -2 to 5°C (28–41°F), though it can feel colder with the wind chill and Ushuaia does experience strong winds.

Another downside of winter travel in Ushuaia is that certain hiking trails in Tierra del Fuego National Park and the surrounding area will be closed due to ice and snow. However, you can enjoy some of the landscapes in the park by riding the Train at the End of the World, also known as the Southern Fuegian Railway.

The days will be a lot shorter with around 6-8 daylight hours, depending on the month you visit.

Recommended Winter Activity in Ushuaia: 🚂 Ride the End of the World Train and enjoy the snowy landscape while you learn about Ushuaia's origins as a penal colony.

Spring in Ushuaia

(September to November)

Pros of Spring in Ushuaia

The springtime weather is still relatively cool with daytime temperatures ranging from 5–12°C (41–54°F).

If you visit in early spring, you might still be able to enjoy a bit of skiing or snowboarding on Cerro Castor!

As springtime arrives in Ushuaia, the snow melts, the trails in Tierra del Fuego National Park become more accessible and wildlife becomes more active. That means plenty of opportunities to spot sea birds, penguins, and seals!

Because spring is shoulder season, that means there are fewer tourists around, which also translates to better prices on both accommodations and tours.

Cons of spring in Ushuaia

One of the cons of spring travel in Ushuaia is that the weather can be a bit unpredictable bringing a mixture of sudden rain, strong winds and even lingering snow. 

This means you have to be flexible with your plans and you should save a few indoor activities for inclement weather days. One of the lessons we learned during our trip to Ushuaia was that not every day will be a hiking day!

Another thing to consider is that during the early spring season, some trails may still be muddy or partially closed.

Recommended Spring Activity in Ushuaia:🌷Go on a small group guided hike to Laguna Esmeralda known for its green-turquoise colour. This tour includes a complimentary boxed lunch.

So, when should you visit Ushuaia?

As you can see, the best time to visit Ushuaia greatly depends on the types of activities you want to enjoy and each season brings its own pros and cons.

Summer is for hiking, seeing penguins, and embarking on Antarctic expeditions. Winter is all about snow sports and some unique events. Meanwhile, spring and autumn bring fewer tourists, lower prices and stunning landscapes.

One thing is for certain, there is no shortage of options whatever season you choose!

So, if you're ready to start planning your trip, here's some information on different ways to get to Ushuaia, and here's a complete travel guide to the southernmost city so you can get some ideas of things to do once you get here.

#### Where to Stay in Cordoba: The Best Places to Stay in Cordoba, Argentina
So you're in the midst of planning your trip to Argentina and you're wondering where to stay in Cordoba. Well, you've come to the right place!

Argentina's second-largest city may still be relatively undiscovered by international tourists, but it's a destination with a lot to offer.

In Cordoba, you can explore the Jesuit Quarter which is sprinkled with cathedrals, churches, crypts and other historic buildings from the city's early days.

You can browse the artisanal fair at Paseo de las Artes or shop at the ornate mall known as Patio Olmos. Mornings can be spent wandering through museums and art galleries and afternoons strolling the gardens of Parque Sarmiento. The options really are endless!

But let's get back to where to stay in Cordoba because each neighbourhood has its own distinct flair. In this guide, we're going to highlight 3 different neighbourhoods in Cordoba that are ideal for travellers - that means walking distance to the main attractions and plenty of options for dining and shopping.

Plus, we'll also share some of our top picks for boutique hotels, mid-range hotels, and hostels in the city.

Where to Stay in Cordoba

Being centrally located and able to reach the city's main attractions on foot is an important thing to consider when booking your accommodations. If you only have a few days in the city, you don't want to be in a quiet residential area that doesn't have much to offer tourists or have to put up with a long commute into the city centre.

That's why we're going to highlight three neighbourhoods that are ideal for travellers, and each of these offers something a little different ranging from historic areas with colonial architecture, lively boroughs with plenty of nightlife, and neighbourhoods that offer art and culture but are also close to green spaces.

Centro

Best neighbourhood for history and culture

If you want to live and breathe Cordoba's colonial history, stay in Centro which is the Old Town. This part of the city is home to the Jesuit Quarter or Jesuit Block, which is a UNESCO World Heritage Site. This is where the city saw its early beginnings and walking through these streets will transport you back through time. In Centro, you'll find attractions like Cordoba Cathedral, the Jesuit Crypt, the Society of Jesus Church, and the National University of Cordoba (the oldest university in Argentina and the third oldest in the Americas).

Nueva Córdoba

Best neighbourhood for art, culture and greenery

Nueva Córdoba is considered a student neighbourhood so it has a very youthful atmosphere. It is home to a couple of universities and its numerous faculties. Here you'll find bars, cafés, and cultural venues. Some of the top attractions in Nueva Cordoba include Paseo del Buen Pastor, the Church of the Capuchins, the Fine Art Museum, the Latin American Craft Museum, and the Anthropology Museum. The neighbourhood is also right next to Parque Sarmiento offering a nearby green escape.

Güemes

Best neighbourhood for nightlife and dining

Güemes is another neighbourhood to consider if you prefer a lively atmosphere. This is Cordoba's trendiest neighbourhood known for its bohemian vibe, walls covered in street art, and pulsating nightlife. Here you'll find restaurants, bars and nightclubs that stay open late. There are plenty of boutique shops to browse during the daytime, plus you can walk along the tree-lined stream known as La Cañada and browse the handicrafts in Paseo de las Artes. Güemes is a nice place to explore, but if sleep is your priority, keep in mind that you may hear music and conversation until the early hours of the morning, especially if you end up in a street-facing hotel room.

Remember that Córdoba is a relatively compact city, so you can easily explore multiple neighbourhoods during your visit. Each neighbourhood has its own unique charm and attractions, so be sure to choose the one that aligns with your interests and preferences.

Boutique Hotels in Cordoba

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Azur Real Hotel Boutique & Spa (@azurhotel) 

Azur Real Hotel Boutique

Azur Real is a family-run boutique hotel set in the heart of Cordoba's Centro neighbourhood. The building dates back to 1915 and is steeped in history; over the years, it has been a leather workshop, a pharmacy, a school, a Chinese restaurant and a dance club, just to name a few of its roles.

By the time this building was acquired by its current owners, it sat in ruins and was painstakingly renovated over the course of four years. The result is a warm and homey atmosphere that showcases Cordoba's architectural history.

The hotel's key selling feature is its spa called Baños de Azur, where you can enjoy their Ancient Baths Circuit. This is a 2-hour tour by candlelight through 12 different areas where water in its different states and temperatures promotes a state of relaxation.

The rooms have a contemporary-meets-rustic feel and range from standard to more luxurious suites with a private patio, large dressing room and jacuzzi.

Azur Real Hotel Boutique has an onsite restaurant called Bruma, which uses fresh, organic and locally sourced ingredients. Itacú is their tea house featuring artisan teas, native mountain herbs and yerba mate.

Read reviews for Azur Real Hotel Boutique.

Address: San Jerónimo 257

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Virreinato Hotel Boutique (@virreinatohotelboutique) 

Hotel Virreinato

Hotel Virreinato is a boutique hotel set in a historic building that dates back to 1670 in the Jesuit Quarter. It stands in what used to be the courtyard of a tile-making workshop during the city's colonial days.

Today, the interior of this hotel is exquisitely decorated with antique wood furniture and lots of art, chandeliers, tapestries, figurines and treasures from the past few centuries. Walking through the halls is like wandering through a museum and the surrounding pieces really do take you back in time.

If you stay here, be sure to join their private guided tour of the property. During this tour, you'll learn all about the building’s Jesuit history and the couple who made this place what it is today, filling it with an impressive art collection from across the globe.

Enjoying breakfast in the living room surrounded by pieces of history is one of the highlights of staying at Hotel Virreinato.

Read reviews for Hotel Virreinato.

Address: Avenida Duarte Quirós 167

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by 🏨Sacha Mistol __ (@sachamistol) 

Sacha Mistol Art Hotel

Sacha Mistol Art Hotel is Cordoba's first themed boutique hotel, where art invades every corner of the old mansion which dates back to 1927.

The boutique hotel is situated in Centro in a house that belonged to Emilio F. Olmos, who was Mayor of the City and Governor of the Province of Córdoba. The construction showcases the styles that were prevalent at the time of its construction. The result is a colonial horizontal house with a dash of Neoclassicism and a central inner patio as the protagonist.

Sacha Mistol Art Hotel has 9 unique rooms, each featuring murals, installations, and works by different artists.

The hotel also offers a spa and wellness centre where guests can enjoy hot or cold stone massages and body scrubs.

Read reviews for Sacha Mistol Art Hotel.

Address: Rivera Indarte 237

Mid-range Hotels in Cordoba

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Yrigoyen 111 Hotel (@y111hotel) 

Yrigoyen 111 Hotel

Yrigoyen 111 Hotel is located in Nueva Cordoba and offers bright, modern and spacious rooms.

This Cordoba hotel has 109 rooms spread out across 2 towers and 14 floors. Guests can choose between twin, double and triple rooms.

Some of the hotel's highlights include the spa, sauna and swimming pool, which are located on the hotel's rooftop, offering city views.

An American-style buffet breakfast is served daily, and guests can also make use of the 1906 Lounge Bar.

Read reviews for Yrigoyen 111 Hotel.

Address: Avenida Hipólito Yrigoyen 111

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by MyBeds.com (@mybedsoficial) 

NH Córdoba Urbano

NH Córdoba Urbano is located in Centro overlooking La Cañada and is just a couple of blocks away from the Jesuit Quarter. Its central location makes it a great base for exploring Cordoba on foot.

The hotel has 72 guestrooms ranging from standard to suites decorated in a classic-meets-contemporary style. Suites on the 14th and 15th floors have their own private balcony with city views.

One of NH Córdoba Urbano's key selling features is its rooftop swimming pool with a wooden sun deck and lounge chairs - the perfect way to cool off in the city on a summer's day.

Read reviews for NH Córdoba Urbano.

Address: Avenida Marcelo T. de Alvear 363

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Vilaut Temporario (@departamentovilautcba)

Vilaut Smartflat

Vilaut Smartflat is the first coliving space in Cordoba and it is situated in Centro. This former hotel was completely renovated and transformed into a new type of accommodation geared at students, digital nomads, and visitors balancing work and travel.

Vilaut Smartflat has shared coworking spaces, a gym, a rooftop swimming pool and 24-hour security.

Guests can choose between studios and apartments, making it an ideal option for anyone planning a longer stay in Cordoba.

Read reviews for Vilaut Smartflat.

Address: Corrientes 207

Hostels in Cordoba

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Socialtel Global (@socialtelglobal)

Socialtel Nueva Cordoba

Socialtel (formerly Selina) is a new hostel chain with numerous locations across the globe, and they've most recently added a new hostel in Nueva Cordoba.

Socialtel Nueva Cordoba offers private rooms (suite, standard or micro) as well as 8-person dorms. Some rooms have a private bathroom while others have shared bathrooms, depending on your selection.

Some of the hostel's highlights include an outdoor pool (much needed during Cordoba's summer months!), yoga classes, a cafe and a bookstore. In the evenings, they have a bar that serves up cocktails, live music and an outdoor cinema using a projector.

This hostel caters to travellers as well as digital nomads working abroad for extended periods of time.

Read reviews of Socialtel Nueva Cordoba.

Address: San Lorenzo 163

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hostel Alvear | Córdoba (@hostel.alvearr) 

Hostel Alvear

Hostel Alvear is located in Centro in a large historic home that's just two blocks away from Plaza San Martin and Cordoba Cathedral.

The hostel has lots of large communal spaces including a rooftop terrace, a billiards room, table tennis, a games room and BBQ facilities - all great opportunities to connect with fellow adventurers!

Rooms at Hostel Alvear are simply furnished yet comfortable. They offer 4-bed and 6-bed dorms with private bathrooms or shared bathrooms.

Read reviews for Hostel Alvear here.

Address: Gral. Alvear 158

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Aldea Hostel Hostel (@aldeahostelcordoba) 

Aldea Hostel

Aldea Hostel is located in Centro just one block from La Cañada and within walking distance to a lot of the city's main attractions.

The hostel's name 'Aldea' means 'village' and they've leaned into that creating cool rooftop space for guests to meet and socialize.

They offer a variety of private rooms (single, double, triple and quadruple) with private or shared baths, as well as dorm rooms for those looking for a more budget-friendly option.

Read reviews for Aldea Hostel here.

Address: Santa Rosa 447

If you're planning to venture beyond Cordoba City and you want to enjoy a taste of the Sierras, check out this list of dreamy estancias where you can enjoy some horseback riding, learn about gaucho culture, and get a taste of rural living in this corner of Argentina.

#### Where to Stay in El Calafate, Argentina
Wondering where to stay in El Calafate, Argentina? We've got you covered with this list of hotels to suit every traveller's budget!

El Calafate is a bucket list destination in Patagonia. This town is the gateway to the southern end of Los Glaciares National Park and more importantly, the famed Perito Moreno Glacier, which is one of the few advancing glaciers in the world. 

It's also a destination where you can enjoy all sorts of day tours and outdoor adventures like going on boat tours to see glaciers, kayaking the milky waters of La Leona River, spending the day at an estancia, going on 4x4 adventures across the Patagonian steppe, and so much more!

Because there are so many fun things to do in El Calafate and your itinerary is likely to be action-packed, you'll want to make sure you have a relaxing place to return to at the end of the day. 

In this El Calafate hotel guide, we're going to highlight the best luxury hotels, high-end hotels, mid-range hotels, budget-friendly hotels and hostels. That means you can choose the best accommodations to suit your budget and travel style. And if you're looking for estancias near El Calafate, we have those too!

Luxury Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Imago Hotel & Spa (@imagohotel) 

Imago Hotel & Spa

Imago Hotel & Spa is a luxurious 5-star hotel in El Calafate.

Guests can choose between master suites and junior suites, or double, twin and triple rooms. The room's key features are the large windows overlooking Lago Argentino.

Imago Hotel & Spa has its own on-site restaurant, Cicero Bistro, which offers international cuisine and gourmet Argentinian specialties.

The hotel also boasts a spa and wellness centre where guests can indulge in massages, hydrotherapy, and other relaxation treatments. Perfect for unwinding after a busy day exploring Los Glaciares National Park and the Perito Moreno Glacier! 

The hotel also has a gym for those who want to keep up with their fitness routine, though there's plenty of trekking to enjoy around these parts.

"We had a very relaxing stay in a great room with a fabulous bathroom that included a jacuzzi bath , walk in power shower an adjoining living room and fantastic views. I had an amazing massage - back and neck and the swimming pool was lovely after a day visiting the glacier and national park . The staff were all very professional and helpful." - Gerry from Ireland
Review via Booking

Address: Calle 669 N°40, El Calafate 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Xelena Hotel & Suites (@xelena_hotel) 

Xelena Hotel & Suites

Xelena Hotel & Suites is a luxury property set on the shores of Lago Argentino in the outskirts of El Calafate.

The hotel offers a variety of suites and standard rooms with either lake or garden views.

Guests can enjoy a heated indoor-outdoor pool, jacuzzi, and dry sauna, as well as massages and spa treatments.

Xelena Hotel & Suites offers 4 different gastronomic options for guests: Mora Restaurant for Patagonian cuisine and an exclusive selection of wines, Pierrot Bistró Lobby Bar for cocktails and tapas-style dishes, Coral Coffee Shop for breakfast, and Huerta & Fuegos which is the hotel orchard and is open during the summer months for evening drinks.

"The staff were brilliant . The reception staff on more than one occasion when out of their way to help us ,they were friendly and efficient and a credit to the hotel . Same with the bar staff and restaurant staff . And a Special mention to shuttle bus driver who waited for us after we got back from a 3 hour coach trip from el chalten . The pool is fantastic with great views of lago argentino , the man who runs the pool is also very friendly and efficient. The Rooms are spacious and comfortable and Kept very clean . Everything about this hotel exceeded my expectations, it was like a holiday from an holiday after 4 nights in Buenos Aires . But the staff made the biggest difference , they were brilliant . The guide on the coach tour to el chalten who was unconnected with the hotel told us this was “the best hotel in El Calafate “ I can’t argue with that." - John from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Rene Favaloro 3500, El Calafate

High-end Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Kosten Aike - El Calafate - Patagonia (@hotelkostenaike) 

Hotel Kosten Aike

Hotel Kosten Aike is set in an Alpine-style boutique hotel situated right in the centre of town, just two blocks from the main street making it a convenient location for travellers who want to be in the heart of it all.

The hotel's name comes from the native Tehuelche language - kosten meaning wind and aike meaning place, and 'windy place' is quite fitting for El Calafate! Rooms are bright, spacious and incorporate Tehuelche design elements.

Hotel Kosten Aike also boasts numerous gastronomic options including Restaurant Ariskaiken for fine dining, Asador Kampen for traditional Argentine BBQ and Patagonian lamb, and Bar Aura for afternoon tea (locally known as merienda) and evening cocktails.

The hotel has spa facilities which include a hot tub, a sauna, a Scottish shower and a massage room.

"This is an outstanding hotel. It’s just off the main strip so quiet. The hotel is very luxurious with games room, gym, spa etc. The staff are outstanding, very accommodating, extremely helpful and speak Spanish and English which was a great help. The rooms are big and luxurious and the breakfast was outstanding with a huge choice of cooked, breads, cakes, cereal etc. I would very much recommend this hotel. It was a delight staying here." - Ann from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Gobernador Moyano 1243, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel 4 Estrellas ⭐⭐⭐⭐ (@posadalosalamos) 

Hotel Posada Los Alamos

Hotel Posada Los Alamos is one of the top-rated 4-star hotels in El Calafate.

The hotel is centrally located and offers double rooms either twin or standard. Rooms have views over the organic garden and the mountains on the horizon.

Hotel Posada Los Alamos provides a full range of modern spa facilities and an indoor pool with floor-to-ceiling windows. It also has its own small 18-hole par 3 golf course.

The hotel has several on-site dining options; La Posta for a la carte regional and international cuisine, Humus Resto Bar for cocktails, El Águila for snacks or drinks in the lobby bar, plus they also have a wine cellar where you can arrange a wine tasting.

"The hotel has fantastic facilities, the spa is wonderful. The staff were very friendly and helpful. The rooms themselves were spacious with a large bathroom and comfy beds. Breakfast was delicious with lots of choice. The location is within easy access of the lake and the town centre." - Roisin from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Ingeniero Hector M. Guatti 1350, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Mirador Del Lago (@miradordellagohotel) 

Mirador del Lago

Mirador del Lago is a hotel that overlooks the shores of Lago Argentino. It is a beautifully designed property with lots of stone and wood accents giving it a warm, rustic feel. 

Guests can choose between 3 different types of rooms including standard rooms, superior rooms with either garden or lake views, and suites with balconies that overlook the lake. 

Mirador de Lago also has its own in-house restaurant called La Bahía where guests can enjoy dishes like Patagonian lamb, trout and homemade pasta. They also have their own snack bar where you can order light meals and drinks.

“The location was excellent. Just on the edge of town where it was a bit quieter and with a great view of the lake. The breakfast was the best on our trip. Great selection of pastries!” - Andrew from Australia
Review from Booking

Address: Avenida del Libertador 2047, El Calafate

Mid-range Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hosteria Cauquenes de Nimez (@cauquenesdenimez) 

Hostería Cauquenes de Nimez

Hostería Cauquenes de Nimez is located in the north end of El Calafate just 50 metres from Laguna Nimez, a nature reserve where you can see all sorts of birds including flamingoes. 

Part of the charm of this guesthouse is the fact that it's decorated using antique furniture, plus the oak wood floors and stone walls add some rustic charm to the place. 

All the rooms at Hostería Cauquenes de Nimez come with their own ensuite bathroom. 

The front desk can also help organize various activities such as horseback riding, kayaking, mountain biking, hiking and birdwatching.

"The team were very welcoming and helped with organising trips and advising on the local area. The rooms were really warm and cosy, ideal after day trips to ice glaciers! The location is ideal for walking into the centre of El Calafate but also having the nature reserve on the doorstep. Overall, great value for money." - Laura from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Calle 303 Nº 79, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Quijote Hotel (@quijotehotel) 

Hotel Quijote

Hotel Quijote is centrally located just 1 block from Avenida del Libertador, which is the main thoroughfare in town. 

The hotel offers 3 different types of rooms to suit all travellers: economy, comfort and duplex. 

An American-style buffet breakfast is served daily, and they also have a cafe and bar service throughout the day. 

Staff are bilingual and speak Spanish and English. Luggage storage can be arranged if needed. 

“The staff were very helpful and spoke English. The breakfast was quite nice and in a pretty room. The entrance and lobby of the hotel was attractive. Location was great, two blocks from downtown shops and restaurants.” - Nadine from USA
Review via Booking

Address: Gobernador Gregores 1191, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Picos del Sur (@hotelpicosdelsur) 

Hotel Picos del Sur

Hotel Picos del Sur is located in the east end of El Calafate just a short stroll from the centre of town.

This is a spacious property with a big lawn, an outdoor terrace and lounge chairs where visitors can enjoy the outdoors. 

Guests can choose between twin rooms, double rooms and triple rooms, all with their own en suite bathroom.

"Rooms were large and clean, and the view from our room was great. There's good WiFi and large communal areas. Location is only a 10min walk from the bus terminal and you can easily walk to restaurants in the centre of town." - Sarah from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Puerto San Julian 271, El Calafate

Budget-friendly Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Posada Larsen (@posadalarsen) 

Posada Larsen

Posada Larsen is a small 6-room guesthouse on a quiet side street a short walk from the centre of town.

The guesthouse features twin, double and triple rooms with views of Lake Argentino and the Andes Mountains 

The guesthouse has heated floors, free Wi-Fi, and private parking.

They serve a traditional Patagonian breakfast with lots of home-baked goodies. 

“Lovely Posada only 10min walk from the centre. Beautiful views of the lake from bedroom and breakfast room. Irina, the manager was very welcoming and helpful before check-in and throughout our stay. Delicious breakfast. Highly recommended.” - Francesca from Italy
Review via Booking

Address: Puerto Deseado 223, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by HOSTERIA KAU KALESHEN (@hostkauka) 

Kau Kaleshen

Kau Kaleshen is a little oasis tucked away just one block from the main street surrounded by greenery. It's as central a location as you can get, while still offering tranquillity.

The guesthouse has 12 rooms with access to a central garden. You can choose from single, double, triple and quadruple rooms. 

Buffet breakfast is served daily including coffee, tea,  juices, pastries, homemade bread, cheeses and more.

They have their own on-site restaurant and their specialty is fondue! They also serve traditional Patagonian dishes featuring trout and lamb.  

"The front desk staff were knowledgeable, patient and friendly. The location in the center of town but one block away from the noise makes this place an oasis like it’s name implies…house of the rising sun. Make sure to have dinner at the restaurant! The food, waitstaff and ambience are amazing and unforgettable." - Ellen from USA

Address: Gobernador Gregores 1256, El Calafate

Hostels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by América del Sur Hostel (@americahostel) 

America del Sur Calafate Hostel

America del Sur is a small hostel chain with locations in both El Calafate and the neighbourhood of San Telmo in Buenos Aires.

Their hostel in El Calafate is located in the northeast end of town, making it a short and pleasant 7-minute walk into the centre of town. 

The hostel is built in that classic Patagonian design with lots of wood elements, large windows that offer sweeping views of Lago Argentino, and a large communal area where travellers can hang out and plan the upcoming day's adventure.

America del Sur Calafate Hostel offers different types of rooms. You can choose from a private room with an ensuite bathroom, a private room with a shared bathroom, a triple room, a quadruple room or a 6-bed dorm. 

This hostel also features floor heating, free Wi-Fi, a communal kitchen and a laundrette.

“It was the best hostel I ever stayed at - the social area is super cozy and with the most amazing view. People staying there are super social. The rooms are good, the breakfast too and the reception is also a travel agency. Will 100% come back.” - Annika from Spain
Review via Booking

Address: Puerto Deseado 153, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Lago Argentino - Hostel en El Calafate (@hostellagoargentino)

Lago Argentino Hostel

Lago Argentino Hostel is a family-run business by people who are passionate about tourism. The hostel is centrally located just 2 blocks from the main avenue. 

This hostel has a beautiful garden which is especially beautiful when the lupins bloom. A continental breakfast is served daily and guests can also make use of the communal kitchen to cook their own meals. 

In terms of accommodations, this hotel offers double and triple rooms with private bathrooms, or double rooms and dorms with shared bathrooms.

They offer free parking with your reservation and luggage storage is available upon request.

"The garden was so beautiful and had so many great smelling flowers! There was a cute little cat that wandered around and was so friendly! The room was so comfortable and the location of the hostel was very convenient to walking into town." - Emily from USA
Review via Booking

Address: Campaña del Desierto 1050, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by FOLK hostel (@folkhostelll) 

FOLK Hostel

FOLK Hostel is located in the east end of town, just 200 metres from the El Calafate Bus Terminal. 

The hostel has a garden, a shared lounge, a communal kitchen and luggage storage.

They have a variety of different room types to suit all sorts of travellers. You can choose from double rooms with a private bathroom, double rooms with a shared bathroom, 4-person dorms and 8-person dorms. 

They serve a very simple buffet-style breakfast with bread, cereals, yogurt, fruit and hot and cold beverages. You can also order a pre-packed lunch if you're planning a full-day excursion around El Calafate. 

"Lovely hostel with great kitchen and good location. Love the common area and friendly staff. Really great showers as well! Breakfast was okay, nothing special. Would definitely recommend staying at Folk" - Alberto from Denmark
Review via Booking

Address: José R. Haro 424, El Calafate

Read More:

How to Visit Perito Moreno Glacier with a Tour

Visiting Perito Moreno Glacier from El Calafate

2 Days in El Calafate Itinerary

El Calafate Day Trip to a Working Ranch

Getting from El Calafate to El Chaltén

Patagonia with Gadventures: Which Tour Should You Choose?

Glamping in Patagonia: Here are 10+ Beautiful and Remote Domes!

#### Where to Stay in San Antonio de Areco, Argentina
Wondering where to stay in San Antonio de Areco, Argentina? This gaucho town boasts lots of estancias, guesthouses and unique stays! 

San Antonio de Areco is a sleepy town in the pampas and it's a popular weekend destination from Buenos Aires. A big part of the experience is immersing yourself in gaucho culture and rural living and that involves visiting or staying at an estancia!

Estancias are traditional ranches or farms primarily used for rearing cattle and growing crops and you can find them all over Argentina. 

The estancias in San Antonio de Areco range from high-end properties that offer full room and board plus numerous activities to smaller estancias closer to town at a more accessible price range. 

Accommodations are quite varied; aside from estancias, you can also find cute guesthouses set in colonial homes and unique stays featuring converted train wagons. 

We've compiled a list of some of the best places to stay in San Antonio de Areco. You'll find something for all tastes and all budgets, and one thing is for sure, all of these properties capture the country spirit of the pampas!

Where to Stay in San Antonio de Areco

Estancias in San Antonio de Areco

There are so many estancias across Buenos Aires Province and many of them are located in and around the town of San Antonio de Areco! These range from luxury estancias to smaller family-run establishments with a more rugged feel. Here's a selection of places for you to consider:

1. Estancia La Cinacina

We were pretty set on staying at an estancia since that is part of the experience of coming to the self-proclaimed gaucho capital. During my search, I stumbled upon Estancia La Cinacina which dates back to 1870.

The beauty of this estancia is that it is located in the west end of town, yet it's only 6 blocks away from the main square, Plaza Ruiz De Arellano. Almost all of the other estancias in San Antonio de Areco are located on the outskirts of town and require a car, however, this property allowed us to explore on foot for the length of our stay.

Breakfast at the estancia was abundant and we really enjoyed it. It featured two baskets of baked goods (one filled with medialunas or sweet croissants), jams, cereal, yogurt, freshly squeezed orange juice, tea, coffee, and an abundance of fresh fruit like watermelon, plums, grapes and apples.

The estancia has a huge pool which is open during the summer months, and they also offer horseback riding and massages for an additional fee.

If you're looking for an estancia experience close to town that won't break the bank, this is a nice mid-range option. We found the staff to be friendly and attentive, and we thoroughly enjoyed our stay!

Book your stay at Estancia La Cinacina.

Address: Bartolomé Mitre 9, San Antonio de Areco

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Madrugada Areco (@estancialamadrugada_areco) 

2. Estancia La Madrugada

Estancia La Madrugada offers a rural experience with a touch of luxury. This is an exclusive property featuring only 3 suites.

The farmhouse has been renovated, however, it still manages to retain its traditional charm. The rooms lead out to a tranquil garden and an aguaribay grove.

The estancia offers a three-course menu and outdoor barbecues with ingredients sourced from the organic garden for a farm-to-table dining experience.

Activities at Estancia La Madrugada include horseback rides through the countryside, guitar sessions by the campfire, or exploring the gaucho town of San Antonio de Areco.

While this property is located on the outskirts of town, the estancia does offer free bikes for guests to ride into town. It's a 5-kilometre ride or about 15 minutes - alternatively, you can ask them to book you a taxi into town. 

Book your stay at Estancia La Madrugada.

Address: Camino del Yameo, San Antonio de Areco

3. Estancia El Ombú de Areco

El Ombú de Areco is a historic estancia set in the outskirts of San Antonio de Areco. It dates back to 1880 and it’s been in the hands of its current owners, the Boelcke Family, since 1934.

The estancia has 11 guest rooms, all of them refurbished, each with a private bathroom and vintage decor.

Guests can choose from double, triple and quadruple rooms, and they also offer interconnecting rooms in case you're visiting with a large family.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco offers full board; which means breakfast, lunch, afternoon snack and dinner. There's no reason to leave the estancia during your stay, unless of course, you want to explore the area. 

As far as activities, guests can enjoy 2 horseback rides per day, plus they have swimming pools, bike rides and leisurely walks through the property.

This estancia also welcomes day visitors. You can read more about our experience visiting El Ombú de Areco for their estancia day and gaucho tour. 

Book directly via Estancia El Ombú de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Cuartel VI, Villa Lía, San Antorio de Areco

4. Estancia La Bamba de Areco

La Bamba de Areco is an estancia hotel set in the pampas on the outskirts of San Antonio de Areco, and it is one of the oldest Argentinian colonial-style estancias in the area. It is also a Relais & Chateaux property.

The estancia dates back to 1830 when one of its post houses formed part of the Camino Real or Royal Road that connected Buenos Aires to the northern part of the country. 

The estancia's name La Bamba derives from the Celtic word Bahamba meaning 'place of rest and hospitality'. 

This was one of the first estancias to open its doors to visitors back in the 1980s and it was renovated in 2009 while still retaining its colonial essence.

This estancia hotel has 11 rooms and suites featuring dark wooden floors and antique furnishings, and offers views of the pampas, gardens and polo fields.

It's one of those exclusive places, where again, there's no need to leave the estancia during your stay because everything is provided. 

Book directly via Estancia La Bamba de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Km 7.5, San Antonio de Areco

Guesthouses in San Antonio de Areco

5. Hotel Draghi

Hotel Draghi is a small centrally-located hotel just one block north of the central square, Plaza Ruiz de Arellano.

The hotel is run by the Draghi family, a respected name in town when it comes to the silversmithing tradition - you can read more about the Draghi Museum and Silversmith Workshop in our travel guide to San Antonio de Areco.

Hotel Draghi features 9 rooms with access to an internal garden with a swimming pool. 

They serve a continental breakfast featuring bread, medialunas, deli meats, cheese, eggs, granola, jam, yogurt, juice and more.

The hotel connects to the Draghi Museum and Silversmith Workshop via a garden. 

It has a great location in the heart of the old town which means easy access to cafes, restaurants, shops and other attractions.

Book your stay at Hotel Draghi.

Address: Matheu 380, San Antonio de Areco

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Antigua Casona (@antiguacasona) 

6. Hotel Antigua Casona

Hotel Antigua Casona is a bed and breakfast set in a traditional colonial-style home. It features a covered gallery, an inner courtyard, and an outdoor swimming pool. 

Guests can choose between double and triple rooms with private bathrooms, all decorated with antiques and vintage furnishings. 

The property stands in the heart of the old town making it a great choice for travellers who want to explore San Antonio de Areco on foot. It offers easy access to restaurants, bars and local attractions.

Book your stay at Hotel Antigua Casona.

Address: Segundo Sombra 495, San Antonio de Areco

Unique Stays in San Antonio de Areco

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Los Vagones de Areco (@losvagonesdeareco) 

7. Los Vagones de Areco

If you are looking for a unique stay in San Antonio de Areco, then you'll want to check out Los Vagones de Areco. This is one of several glamping sites near Buenos Aires.

This property is located on the outskirts of town, so you will need a car to get there, but the reward is a one-of-a-kind hotel set in restored train wagons!

They are located 7 kilometres from the old Vagues Train Station (now a museum), and 14 kilometres from the town of San Antonio de Areco.

This train hotel is a place to disconnect from city life and enjoy rural living; it's a place where you can enjoy long walks through the plains, play croquet, take a dip in the swimming pool (during the summer months!), and come together for a communal campfire at night. 

Los Vagones de Areco has 7 rooms set in various antique trains each featuring en suite bathrooms, vintage furniture and decorations, and a small private deck. 

Book your stay at Los Vagones de Areco.

Address: Vagues, San Antonio de Areco

#### Where to Stay in Ushuaia: The Best Ushuaia Hotels for Every Budget!
Today we're going to help you figure out where to stay in Ushuaia during your visit to the southernmost city in the world.

The city of Ushuaia offers an abundance of accommodation options to fit every budget whether you're looking for luxury resorts, mid-range hotels or budget-friendly accommodations.

Because this is a scenic Argentine city set between the Andes Mountains and the seaside, that means you can opt for hotels on the shores of the Beagle Channel, hotels on the mountainside surrounded by Fuegian forest, and hotels that are located right downtown within walking distance of many shops, restaurants and tourist attractions.

There are hotels with spas and heated pools for those looking for a relaxing holiday, hotels with ski and snowboard storage for those who want to stay active and plan to hit the ski slopes, and hotels with their own in-house restaurants specializing in Patagonian and Fuegian dishes for those foodies wanting to enjoy Argentine cuisine.

With all this in mind, we want to help you find the best hotel in Ushuaia for your budget so that in between cruising the Beagle Channel, riding the Train at the End of the World, sending a postcard from the End of the World Post Office, hiking Tierra del Fuego National Park, and going on a myriad of fun excursions at the End of the World, you can have a comfortable place to rest at the end of each day.

We've already helped you figure out how to get to Ushuaia, so next up, let's tackle accommodations! Without further ado, here's our guide to where to stay in Ushuaia, Argentina.

Luxury Hotels in Ushuaia

Ushuaia has a wonderful selection of 5-star hotels sprinkled on the outskirts of the city, ideal for guests who are looking for a quiet escape surrounded by nature and impeccable views. If you're only spending a few days in Ushuaia and you're looking to splurge, here are the best luxury hotels in Ushuaia to consider.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa (@arakur_ushuaia) 

Arakur Ushuaia Resort and Spa

Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa is considered to be the best hotel in Ushuaia.

This luxury hotel is perched on a natural balcony 800 feet above sea level inside the Reserva Natural Cerro Alarkén. You have hiking trails just outside the hotel doors, plus an indoor and outdoor pool where to unwind after an active day of sightseeing.

Their restaurant La Cravia serves up Argentine and international cuisine offering a la carte and buffet dining.

It's a 10-minute drive from Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa into the centre of town, so if you're looking for a relaxing stay where you'll be surrounded by nature and have epic views of Ushuaia and the Beagle Channel, this is the place for you!

Book your stay at Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa

Address: Cerro Alarken N° 1 (Access vis Avenida Héroes de Malvinas 2617)

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Los Cauquenes Resort & Spa (@loscauquenes) 

Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa

Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa is a high-end resort located on the outskirts of Ushuaia.

It sits on the shores of the Beagle Channel and offers seaside views to one side and a mountain backdrop to the other.

It's a 15-minute drive from Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa into the centre of town, but well worth the short journey in exchange for the privacy and tranquillity this property offers.

The resort also features a fully-equipped spa, swimming pool and hot tub perfect for unwinding at the end of a fun day.

They also have their own on-site restaurant called Reinamora which serves up European gourmet cuisine and Patagonian dishes like lamb and king crab.

Book your stay at Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa.

Address: Barrio Bahía Cauquén, De la Ermita 3462

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort (@lashayasresort) 

Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort

Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort is a luxury hotel in the outskirts of town on the way up to Martial Glacier.

All rooms feature large windows with either sea views or mountain views.

This Ushuaia resort features an indoor swimming pool and spa with sauna, jacuzzi and steam baths.

The gastronomy options include Le Martial Restó for fine dining, Jauke Bistro & Cocktail for drinks and gourmet burgers or sandwiches, and Desayunador Drake for breakfast with a view.

Book your stay at Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort.

Address: Luis Fernando Martial 1650

High-end Hotels in Ushuaia

Travellers looking for elegance and comfort will be pleased with the selection of 4-star hotels in Ushuaia. These accommodations are known for their style, hospitality and comfort.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel (@losaceboshotel) 

Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel

Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel is a high-end hotel in Ushuaia situated on the mountainside.

Their spacious hotel rooms offer panoramic views of the Beagle Channel, plus they also have two junior suites and penthouses.

Every morning at Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel starts off with a superb buffet breakfast that satisfies both sweet and savoury palates.

Their restaurant Orange features a mix of international and Argentine dishes and an extensive Argentine wine list.

Book your stay at Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel.

Address: Luis Fernando Martial 1911

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Tierra del Fuego (@hoteltierradelfuego) 

Hotel Tierra del Fuego

Hotel Tierra del Fuego is a centrally-located property making it a great option for visitors who want to be in the heart of Ushuaia close to shops, restaurants and attractions.

This Ushuaia hotel has double and triple rooms as well as suites for those who prefer more space.

Hotel Tierra del Fuego offers a 24-hour front desk as well as a ski storage service for travellers who are planning to hit the slopes during their visit.

Book your stay at Hotel Tierra del Fuego.

Address: Gobernador Deloqui 198

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Fueguino (@hotelfueguino) 

Fueguino Hotel Patagónico

Fueguino Hotel Patagónico is located in the centre of Ushuaia making it easy to get around the city on foot.

The hotel offers a warm and welcoming atmosphere and has double, triple and quadruple rooms. Travellers wanting more space can also opt for their suites which offer two living spaces.

Fueguino Hotel Patagónico has a fitness centre featuring a gym, dry sauna, steam room and relaxation room.

They also have their own restaurant, Komenk, which serves regional Patagonian dishes. The restaurant opens for breakfast, lunch, afternoon tea and dinner offering buffet and a la carte options.

Book your stay at Fueguino Hotel Patagónico.

Address: Gobernador Deloqui 1282

Mid-range Hotels in Ushuaia

For the mid-range traveller wondering where to stay in Ushuaia, there are plenty of 3-star hotels offering the perfect intersection of style and comfort at a fair price. Here's our list of mid-range properties to consider.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Alto Andino Hotel (@altoandinohotel) 

Alto Andino Hotel

Alto Andino Hotel is situated in downtown Ushuaia making it a great choice for visitors who want to be in the heart of it all.

This property offers single, double, triple and quadruple rooms as well as apartments for those who prefer a self-catered holiday.

Alto Andino Hotel offers a complimentary breakfast that is served in Bar Lookout, which has spectacular views of Ushuaia.

The hotel also offers storage of ski and snowboard equipment.

Book your stay at Alto Andino Hotel.

Address: Gobernador Paz 868

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hosteria y Restaurante America (@restaurante.america) 

Hostería & Restaurante America

Hostería & Restaurante America is a guesthouse that sits directly across from Ushuaia's Centennial Monument just a couple of blocks from the centre of town.

The guesthouse offers standard rooms, superior suites and master suites, as well as apartments that can fit up to 6 guests.

Hostería & Restaurante America serves a buffet breakfast, stores ski and snowboard equipment, and has a 24-hour reception.

They also have their own in-house restaurant, Restaurante America, which focuses on traditional Patagonian and Argentine dishes like Patagonian toothfish in black butter, King crab casserole, and steak.

Book your stay at Hostería & Restaurante America.

Address: Gobernador Paz 1665

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Altos Ushuaia Hotel & Restó (@altosushuaia) 

Altos Ushuaia Hotel

Altos Ushuaia Hotel sits on the edge of town surrounded by Fuegian Forest on the same road that leads up to Martial Glacier.

The hotel has 46 rooms spread out across 3 floors offering either views of the Beagle Channel or the mountains. The room configurations include double rooms, triple rooms and junior suites.

Guests can also enjoy the outdoor jacuzzi which is available year round.

Another key feature is that it offers emergency medical services available to clients at all times.

Altos Ushuaia Hotel has its own restaurant, Bartolomé Restó, which serves traditional Patagonian dishes with views of the Beagle Channel.

Book your stay at Altos Ushuaia Hotel.

Address: Luis Fernando Martial 1441

Budget-friendly Hotels in Ushuaia

If you're looking for simple and affordable rooms where to rest your head after a busy day of exploring, then this list of budget-friendly 2-star hotels might be just right for you.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel de Los Andes, Ushuaia 🇦🇷 (@delosandeshotelushuaia)

Hotel De Los Andes

Hotel de Los Andes is an affordable hotel option right in the centre of Ushuaia just two blocks from the waterfront.

Rooms are simple but bright, and they offer free high-speed internet in all rooms as well as common areas.

Their restaurant Bar D Pizzas serves up stone-baked pizzas and beer and is a good option for a meal in.

Address: Avenida San Martín 753

Book your stay at Hotel de Los Andes.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hosteria Kupanaka (@hosteria.kupanaka) 

Hosteria Kupanaka

Hosteria Kupanaka sits in a bright yellow building just 3 blocks from Plaza Islas Malvinas and the Ushuaia city sign.

This guesthouse offers simple no-frills accommodations where guests can choose from double, triple and quadruple rooms with private bathrooms.

The guesthouse offers free WiFi, TV with cable in rooms, and breakfast is included.

Address: Gobernador Paz 1410

Book your stay at Hosteria Kupanaka.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hoteles del Fin del Mundo (@hotelesdelfindelmundo) 

Hotel Monaco

Hotel Mónaco (part of Hoteles del Fin del Mundo) is a basic hotel option in Ushuaia for travellers looking for budget-friendly accommodations.

The rooms are minimalist and well-illuminated with double, triple and quadruple room options.

There is free WiFi access in the communal areas and breakfast is served daily for all guests.

Read reviews for Hoteles del Fin del Mundo.

Address: Avenida San Martín 1355

Hostels in Ushuaia

Accommodations in the city at the end of the world can be pricier than elsewhere in Argentina, so hostels are a good option to keep travel costs down. Another benefit of staying in a hostel in Ushuaia is the opportunity to meet fellow travellers, which is great for those travelling solo.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hostel Antarctica (@hostelantarctica) 

Antarctica Hostel

Antarctica Hostel is centrally located just one block away from the Museum of the Prison of Ushuaia.

The hostel offers both mixed dorms and female-only dorms, and room sizes range between 6-8 beds with a shared bathroom.

They also have double rooms with private bathrooms for those who prefer a bit more privacy but still want to enjoy the hostel ambience.

Read reviews for Antarctica Hostel.

Address: Antártida Argentina 270

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Oshovia Hostel - Ushuaia (@oshoviahostel) 

Oshovia Hostel

Oshovia Hostel sits in Ushuaia's west end in a more residential neighbourhood. It's a 20-30 minute walk into the centre of town, but it's a very scenic walk that takes you along the shores of Bahía Encerrada Nature Reserve and the Beagle Channel.

The hostel offers mixed dorms and female-only dorms that range from 4-6 beds per room. Additionally, they have double, triple and quadruple rooms.

Oshovia Hostel's feel is very rustic and cosy with lots of wood elements. The hostel also has communal areas where guests can meet other travellers.

A continental breakfast is included.

Read reviews for Oshovia Hostel.

Address: Primer Argentino 127

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by El Refugio Lodge Hostel (@elrefugiolodgehostel) 

El Refugio Lodge Hostel

El Refugio Lodge Hostel is another centrally-located Ushuaia hostel that's only 3 blocks away from the port where all the Beagle Channel cruises depart from.

This hostel offers a variety of room options. Dorm rooms have anywhere between 4-16 beds - the more beds the cheaper the room.

Alternatively, guests can opt for a mix of twin rooms, double rooms, or triple rooms some with the option of private bathrooms.

Select rooms also include a kitchen with a fridge, ideal for travellers looking to self-cater during their visit.

Read reviews for El Refugio Lodge Hostel.

Address: 25 de Mayo 231 

#### 10 Ways Investors Can Improve The Classic Risk Parity Portfolio
The Risk Parity Portfolio ought to be the default portfolio average DIY investors utilize as a long-term investing strategy as opposed to the industry standard 60/40 portfolio.
That's a bit of a bold statement to start off an article!
Well, if investors are concerned about primarily preparing a portfolio for all four economic regimes, controlling volatility and managing sequence of return risk, it's a slam dunk no-brainer to select the Risk Parity Portfolio over the 60/40 Portfolio.
Yet, an even bolder question would be, can the classic long-only Risk Parity Portfolio be potentially enhanced or improved?
That's the very question we're going to explore in detail today.

How To Improve The Classic Risk Parity Portfolio: 10 Suggestions For Investors

About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

Risk Parity Portfolio Introduction

The Risk Parity Portfolio, as one might expect given its name, is primarily concerned with managing risk and volatility.
Instead of asset classes being weighted by default configurations such as 80/20, 60/40 and 40/60, a risk parity portfolio focuses on the volatility of each asset class as opposed to its expected returns.
Furthermore, instead of being merely a concoction of just stocks and bonds, an alternative sleeve is a big part of the risk parity strategy.
Traditionally, that alternative sleeve has been gold and/or commodities.
Given that stocks, gold and commodities are considerably more volatile (in terms of standard deviation) than bonds, the typical long-only Risk Parity Portfolio typically features two different bond asset classes at 30% slices whereas stocks and gold receive 20% allocations respectively.
20% Stocks30% Bonds A (10 Year Treasury)30% Bonds B (Intermediate)20% Gold/Commodities
Why this configuration?
Let's explore the asset classes individually.

Risk Parity Portfolio Asset Classes

Thanks to Portfolio Visualizer (an invaluable resource for investors), we can backtest the standard deviation of the US Total Stock Market, Intermediate Term Treasury, 10 Year Treasury and Gold dating all the way back to 1972.
We're able to notice the following:

Risk Parity Portfolio Risk By Individual Asset Class
US Stock Market = 15.65% Risk (Standard Deviation) Gold = 19.86 Risk (Standard Deviation)Intermediate Term Treasury = 5.75% Risk (Standard Deviation)10 Year Treasury = 8.01% Risk (Standard Deviation) 
Since the Risk Parity Portfolio is not primarily concerned with returns (and instead focuses on risk) you end up with a portfolio that has a greater allocation to bonds than it does to stocks and gold.
Furthermore, the Risk Parity Portfolio seeks to include exposure to asset classes that are uncorrelated with each other in order to improve the overall diversification of the portfolio.
It includes an alternative sleeve (in this example Gold) as opposed to just being merely stocks and bonds.
Risk Parity Portfolio Asset Class Monthly Correlations

What's immediately obvious is that Gold and Stocks are uncorrelated with all other asset classes and it is only bonds that are highly correlated with each other but uncorrelated to both Stocks and Gold.
This level of diversification between asset classes has historically served investors extremely well offering returns (CAGR of 8.31%) that were higher than Risk (Standard Deviation of 6.99%).
Risk Parity Portfolio Returns 1972-2022

The silky smooth ride of the static Risk Parity Portfolio has offered investors close to equity-like returns with bond-like stability.
When you consider its worst year performance is only single digits (-9.93%) it's been a bastion of stability in comparison to equity only portfolios where the US Total stock market has witnessed years as bad as -37% in 2008.
Moreover, the greatest feather in the Risk Parity Portfolios cap is its historical sequence of returns risk profile (also known as Roll Period) of only being underwater for 1 year.
Risk Parity Portfolio Roll Period 1972 to 2022

In comparison the US Total Stock Market has been underwater for a period of an entire decade!
How about the 60/40 Portfolio?
A five year negative sequence of returns risk.
Thus, how on earth could the Risk Parity Portfolio be improved?
Is that even possible?
Let's explore.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
1) US Stocks Only --> Global Equities = Risk Parity Upgrade
Let's grab the lowest hanging fruit of all and move from US stocks only to a globally diversified equity allocation.
Afterall, diversification is your only free lunch in investing and avoiding "home country bias" is a paramount upgrade.
Indeed, US equities have served investors well over the past 40 years but the cautionary tale of Japan is a reminder to diversify whenever possible.
Furthermore, consider the 2000s as an example of what can potentially happen when you put all of your equity eggs in one basket.

A globally diversified equity allocation prevents investors from having a lost decade.
US Total Stock Market returns stymied portfolios with a -0.27% CAGR whereas International Developed Equities were slightly above water with a 1.24% return and the one that saved your bacon was Emerging Markets coming in at 9.82% CAGR.
Thus, to improve our naive Risk Parity Portfolio we'll go from something like a $VTI US Total Stock Market to a $VT Total World Stock Market.

2) Market Cap Weighted Global Equities --> Global Minimum Volatility Equities
Imagine being able to enjoy the same return profile (or better) of a globally diversified equity portfolio while subtracting 400 to 500 basis points of risk to further smooth out the ride?
Too good to be true?
Enter the room Global Minimum Volatility Equities.
Minimum volatility investing is an equity factor strategy that seeks to "control volatility" by screening for companies that have more stable returns while sifting out companies that are more volatile.
You eliminate lottery ticket stocks.
It's as much about what is included (more stable stocks) as it is about what is excluded (highly volatile stocks).
You would think that trying to reduce volatility would lower returns but that is not the case at all.

In fact, when you compare MSCI minimum volatility indexes (US, EAFE, EM, Canada, etc) what you more often find is that they historically outperform their market-cap weighted benchmark.
Since 1988 the MSCI World Minimum Volatility Index has outperformed its parent index with returns of 8.43% and 7.64% respectively.
Hence, you get a "free lunch" of potentially greater returns but more importantly you significantly upgrade the standard deviation of an asset class that is one of the portfolios most volatile wings (only gold being more volatile).

3) Intermediate Treasury --> Long Term Treasury = RP Enhancement
The next upgrade we'll be seeking is in the fixed income category of bonds.
Intermediate Treasury see ya later alligator!
Enter the room Long Term Treasury.
Wait. But. Why?

Let's consider the period of 2000 until the end of 2008 - the roughest stretch for markets since 1972.
During the Bear Market Years of 2000 until the end of 2002 and 2008, Long-Term Treasury provided significantly more protection versus Intermediate Treasury.
Moreover, for that entire rough period of time it outperformed Intermediate Treasury by over 200 basis points.
For a so called "lost decade" for equities, finding assets that provide more stability (when you need it most) and offer higher returns is an upgrade worth taking in my books.
PortfolioVisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

4) 10 Year Treasury --> TIPS (Treasury Inflation Protected Securities)
One of the biggest problems of owning Intermediate Treasury and 10 Year Treasury is just how highly correlated they are to each other.

With a correlation of 0.96 dare I say they're almost the same!
Given we've got two slots for fixed income diversification in our Risk Parity Portfolio let's try to upgrade by finding a solution that is less correlated and strategically different.
Drum roll....
TIPS!
U.S. government issued Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities (TIPS) are a special type of Treasury security indexed to inflation.
By adding this asset class to our portfolio we're making it more regime ready for when inflation rears its ugly head.
Enter the room 2022.
LOL.
Normally that expression is referred to on this site for funds and/or asset classes but 2022 has been a unique animal in and of itself.
For those of us too young to have experienced rampant inflation in previous years it's a big part of our lives now.

Maybe the most important upgrade of all is that now we've got two fixed income asset classes that have a correlation of 0.63 to each other as opposed to 0.96.
We'll take it and move on.

5) Leverage --> Lever the Portfolio Up Buttercup = 200% Canvas
Here is where I'm going to lose some of you.
We're going to add leverage to the portfolio to expand the canvas to 200%.
Not to add more heaping scoops of what we've already got but to instead add multiple different asset classes and strategies to improve the overall portfolio diversification and return stack performance on top of the base we've already created.
But won't that make the Risk Parity Portfolio fall apart?
That was a question I once had.
I created the Battle of the Leveraged Portfolios to test the Risk Parity Portfolio along with other classic portfolios to see if, when, why, how it would fall apart.
You can see the results here: 2X, 3X, 4X
The TL;DR version is this:
The Risk Parity Portfolio can handle leverage like a pack-mule.
In every round of the competition its returns exceeded its level of risk, roll periods remained the same and its Sharpe Ratio and Sortino Ratio improved.
But all of that was done with just four crude assets: long US total stocks, treasuries (Intermediate and Long) and gold.
What we're attempting to do is not increase what we've already got but instead add additional layers of diversification to further increase the efficiency of the portfolio.
Sound exciting?
It does for me!

6) Trend-Following Managed Futures Strategy
It's time to bring the Chameleon into the room!
So far we've had nothing but long-only non-adaptive asset classes and strategies in our portfolio.
That changes right now.
For those unfamiliar, trend-following is the predominant managed futures strategy used to go both long and short global equity, bond, commodity and currency indexes.
Historically speaking, it has provided equity-like returns with only half of the volatility.
Moreover, it is uncorrelated to both long only equity and bond markets.
Furthermore, it typically does extremely well during periods of market turmoil when trends are strong.
Hence, it has been referred to as a crisis alpha-strategy - even though it provides decent return streams outside of bear market situations.
Thus, the strategy utilizes short, medium and long term signals to determine whether to go long, short or take no position at all.
Quite honestly I couldn't imagine my portfolio now without it.
Best of all it has done extremely well in 2022 when basically everything else under the sun has been getting disemboweled.

Check out the difference between Managed Futures trend-following ticker $DBMF versus milquetoast 60/40 $AOM.
Suffering Succotash!!!

7) Global Systematic Macro + Options Strategies (Aside from Trend)
Some of the top quants on #FinTwit have coined the popular saying: "Diversify your diversifiers, yo!"
And that's the plan over here.
Instead of relying "only" on trend-following strategies we'll deploy other global systematic macro strategies such as carry, value, momentum, quality, seasonality and mean reversion along with long-volatility options strategies to protect against tail-risk (extreme market events).
I won't go over each of these line-items one by one but instead we'll define a few for good measure.
Carry is a strategy where investors seek to benefit from a wide differential between high and low carry assets.
Long-volatility strategies typically involve buying out of the money put-options, at various strike prices, to provide a type of "portfolio insurance" should the markets experience a fierce drawdown.
By not just sticking to trend-following we're exposing our portfolio to more diversified diversifiers.

8) REITS (Real Estate Investment Trust)
Let's add some global REITS to our portfolio.
Real Estate Investment Trust is a specialized equity asset class that gives you exposure to many types of commercial real estate.
The primary reason for adding them in your portfolio is to diversify your equity sleeve and hedge against inflation.

Much like with our bonds, we're seeking to add diversification to our equities sleeve by offering something less correlated to the US total stock market.
Given that the US Total Stock Market and REITS have a 0.61 correlation we'll happily take it.
Let's wind back the clock to the 2000s for a bit of a case study.

When the US Total Stock Market was causing investors to pull their collective hair out, REITs were the all-star performer that saved the day.
I'm not sure if we'll witness such an extreme situation again in the future but it's nice to be prepared with something in the portfolio that'll potentially work in our favour.

9) Market Neutral Equities Strategy
Market-Neutral Equities is an absolute return hedge fund strategy that seeks positive returns in any market environment.
By choosing a low NET exposure (typically between 0 to 20%) it is just as long as it is short most of the time.
Furthermore, it is lowly correlated to markets providing the diversification benefit we're craving with our additional 100% canvas space.
Let's use an example to showcase how it can make money even in the down market.
Let's say the strategy is long 100 and short 90 for a net 10 exposure.
Our long equity component is down -8% whereas our short component is down -20%.
We'd be -80 + 180 for a net of 100.
In this scenario we'd earn an impressive 10% return before fees.
It can also generate positive returns when the market is up.
Our long component at 100 is up 12% whereas our short is only up 5%
We're 120 - 45 in this scenario for an overall 7.5% return.
Given the absolute return potential and diversification benefit of the strategy we're excited to add it.

10) Mish-Mash of Other Alternative Strategies
To close things off we'll further diversify our portfolio by drawing from a well of a mish-mash of other alternative strategies.
These could potentially be but are not limited to the following:

Merger Arbitrage
Bitcoin
Reinsurance
Tail Risk
Credit Hedging
Private Equity
Private Loans

I could write an entire article on each of these strategies so we'll keep this brief.
The idea is just to add a few more diversifiers to round off the portfolio.
It would entirely be up to you which of these you'd potentially choose depending on your interest towards the various asset classes and/or strategies.

Improved Risk Parity Portfolio
What does our improved Risk Parity Portfolio look like after all of these potential upgrades and an expanded canvas?
Maybe something like this:

Enhanced Risk Parity Portfolio 200%
40% Trend-Following (Equity, Bond, Currency, Commodity Indexes)30% Global Systematic Managed Futures Strategies (Carry, Seasonality, Value, Momentum, Quality, Mean Reversion, etc)30% Long Treasury30% TIPS20% Global Minimum Volatility Equities20% Gold10% REITS10% Market Neutral Equities10% Diversified Alternatives Basket (Reinsurance, Merger Arbitrage, Bitcoin, Private Equity/Credit, etc)
Overall, I very much like the looks of what we've got over here.
We've improved the overall diversification of our portfolio while adding more uncorrelated asset classes/strategies to the mix.
I'd expect returns to exceed risk with this high Sharpe/Sortino ratio seeking portfolio with the potential to outperform most others while offering a considerably smoother ride.

ETFs and Mutual Funds to Create an Enhanced Risk Parity Portfolio
For those interested in putting together something "similar" to what we've suggested we could potentially utilize the following funds:
US Investors
40% UPAR40% RDMIX15% QRPIX5% SRRIX
UPAR Ultra Risk Parity sets the table for the long-only Risk Parity asset allocation by providing global equities (US, Int-Dev, EM) at 35%, TIPS (49%), Long Term Treasury (49%) and Gold/Commodities (35%) for a net exposure of 168%.
RDMIX Rational Resolve Adaptive Asset Allocation from ReSolve Asset Management provides the backbone of the "adaptive" risk-parity mandate with trend-following and an ensemble of global systematic managed futures strategies (carry, seasonality, mean reversion, value, etc) across all global equity, bonds, commodities and currency indexes.
QRPIX Alternative Risk Premia Fund from AQR goes long/short across equity, bond, currency and commodity indexes while deploying five unique styles including Value, Momentum, Carry, Defensive, and Trend.
SRRIX Stone Ridge Reinsurance Risk Premium Interval Fund offers investors the alternative strategy of reinsurance to round out the portfolio.
The hybrid approach of long-only and long-short risk parity strategies as the backbone of this portfolio along with diversified diversifiers should provide investors the returns meets risk management they crave.
Canadian Investors
40% UPAR40% HRAA.TO10% PFAA.TO10% ONEC.TO
UPAR Ultra Risk Parity sets the table for the long-only Risk Parity asset allocation by providing global equities (US, Int-Dev, EM) at 35%, TIPS (49%), Long Term Treasury (49%) and Gold/Commodities (35%) for a net exposure of 168%.
HRAA.TO Horizons Adaptive Asset Allocation from ReSolve Asset Management provides the backbone of the "adaptive" risk-parity mandate with trend-following and an ensemble of global systematic managed futures strategies (carry, seasonality, mean reversion, value, etc) across all global equity, bonds, commodities and currency indexes.
PFAA.TO Picton Mahoney Fortified Alpha Alternative Fund offers investors a primary strategy of market neutral, special situation credit and merger arbitrage with a secondary component of Momentum, Value, Quality, Discretionary Hedges and Tail Risk.
ONEC.TO Accelerate OneChoice Alternative ETF is a 10 in 1 fund offering exposure to Bitcoin, Long-Short Equity, Senior Loans, Merger Arbitrage, REITS and Global Infrastructure equities not already included in the portfolio.
The one sad thing here is that we're not able to squeeze a minimum volatility equities strategy into the equation but hopefully such a product will exist someday in the future!
The Picture Perfect Portfolio that I'd love to launch someday as an ETF attempts to solve that.

Risk Parity Resources For Further Reference
For those interested in learning more about Risk Parity investing I'd recommend the following resources:

Risk Parity: How to Invest for All Market Environments (book) by Alex Shahidi
Adaptive Asset Allocation (book) by Adam Butler, Rodrigo Gordillo and Mike Philbrick
Risk Parity Chronicles (blog) from Justin living in Japan
All Seasons Portfolio (blog) by Nicholas Ahonen from Sweden

Nomadic Samuel filming a travel video while visiting Lake Titicaca in Peru
12-Question FAQ — 10 Ways Investors Can Improve the Classic Risk Parity Portfolio
1) What is a classic long-only Risk Parity portfolio?
A rules-based mix that balances risk (volatility) across assets instead of capital weights, typically: 20% stocks, 30% 10-Yr Treasuries, 30% intermediate Treasuries, 20% gold/commodities—aiming for all-weather resilience and shallow drawdowns.
2) Why consider improving Risk Parity at all?
To keep the all-regime intent while seeking higher risk-adjusted returns, lower correlations, and better inflation defense using modern tools (TIPS, managed futures, market-neutral, merger arb, etc.).
3) What’s the first equity upgrade?
US-only → Global equities. Going global (developed ex-US + EM) reduces home-country bias and helps avoid “lost-decade” concentration risk.
4) How can we make equities smoother without giving up much return?
Market-cap → Global Minimum Volatility (MinVol). MinVol tilts toward steadier companies, historically lowering stdev and improving downside capture—well aligned with Risk Parity’s stability goal.
5) How should the bond sleeve be refined?
Replace the “two-highly-correlated Treasuries” problem by upgrading Intermediate to Long-Term Treasuries (more crisis ballast) and swapping 10-Yr Treasuries for TIPS to add explicit inflation linkage and lower intra-bond correlation.
6) What does “expand the canvas to 200%” mean?
Use return stacking / modest leverage to add new diversifiers on top of the classic core (rather than doubling the same assets), targeting more return streams with controlled risk.
7) Why add Managed Futures (trend-following)?
They can go long/short across commodities, rates, currencies, and equities, tending to zig when stocks/bonds zag and often delivering crisis alpha in stressed regimes.
8) Should we diversify beyond trend?
Yes—add global systematic macro / alternative risk premia (e.g., carry, value, momentum, quality, seasonality, mean-reversion) and long-vol/tail overlays to “diversify the diversifiers.”
9) Where do REITs fit?
Global REITs broaden the equity sleeve toward real assets and can improve inflation sensitivity with moderate correlation to broad stocks.
10) What’s the case for Market-Neutral equity?
It targets stock-selection alpha with near-zero net beta, delivering low-vol, low-correlation returns that complement both long-only assets and macro diversifiers.
11) Any room for a small “other alts” basket?
A measured 5–10% sleeve can include merger arbitrage, reinsurance, private credit/equity, bitcoin, or other niche alts—kept small to protect the core risk profile.
12) What might an enhanced 200% “RP+” look like in practice?
Illustrative mix: 40% trend, 30% global systematic macro/risk premia, 30% long Treasuries, 30% TIPS, 20% global MinVol equities, 20% gold, 10% REITs, 10% market-neutral, 10% diversified alts—aiming for returns > risk, high Sharpe/Sortino, and shallow max drawdowns (allocation sums reflect stacked exposures).
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
Sorry, my friends for yet another behemoth of a post!
I hit you last time with 4000 words and now we're well over 3000 here.
To say I'm a fan of Risk Parity would be an understatement.
I feel it should be the "default" portfolio for investors of all shapes, sizes and (of course) stages of life.
With a return profile greater than its risk and a roll period that puts the 60/40 to shame, we ought to collectively be pondering what's going on here?
Risk Parity is the literal backbone of my own DIY quant portfolio.
The static long-only Risk Parity Portfolio has had impressive results for over 50 years.
However, as I think we've all seen in this article it can easily be upgraded.
Strategies that were once only available to high networth individuals and institutions are now available for the little guys (us plebs).
Failing to integrate these strategies into your portfolio seems like a lost opportunity and then some.
What's most exciting is that fund of funds ETFs and Mutual Funds are now available meaning you can cobble together a maximally diversified risk parity portfolio with as little as 4 tickers!
Wowzers!
So much diversification in just a handful of funds.
The crazy part is that I think it's only going to get better.
What an exciting time to be an investor.

10 Ways to Improve the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio

All Weather Portfolio Introduction
Before we look at improving the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio let's first examine what it is in its original form.
The Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio is a portfolio that moves beyond merely stocks and bonds with the addition of gold and commodities as an alternative sleeve.
The purpose of the portfolio is to perform in all economic environments as opposed to just inflationary boom and disinflationary boom regimes.
Relative to a 60/40, the all weather portfolio reduces its exposure to equities, increases its exposure to bonds and adds both commodities and gold in an attempt to balance its risk/reward profile in such a manner that it offers investors protection during inflationary stagnation and deflationary bust economic regimes.

Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio Allocations
US Stock Market = 30%Long Term Treasury = 40%Intermediate Term Treasury = 15%Gold = 7.5%Commodities = 7.5%
With equities limited to just 30% and bonds making up 55% of the portfolio, the all-weather allocation is instantly more conservative than most other portfolios that are more aggressive with equities.
Uncorrelated asset classes of gold/commodities round out the portfolio with 7.5% slices each.
In my opinion, this all-weather portfolio is a diversification masterpiece, (relatively speaking) compared to what 90% of most investors have going for them.
The results of this portfolio in the picture perfect portfolio challenge (leveraged portfolios battle) at the 1X. 2X, 3X and 4X level speaks for itself.
It dominated.
This is a robust regime ready portfolio that can handle all economic conditions in addition to high amounts of leverage as well.
But that doesn't mean it can't be enhanced.
And so let's explore that now.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
1) Add Global Equities To The All-Weather Portfolio
Maybe the most obvious place to start would be going from a US only equity allocation to diversifying globally.
In the past decade, investors who have gone global (as opposed to being US-centric), have by and large been frustrated with the results.
However, when considered through the lens of the early 2000s, diversification was the key ingredient that kept your equity sleeve above water.
The idea here isn't to pick which region of the world is going to be the winner over the coming years/decades but rather have it spread out so broadly as to not guess at all.
One of the most informative self-education moments throughout my journey as a DIY investor, has been to pick up vintage investing books that weren't recently published.
Open up an investing book published in the mid 90s and you'll likely find information on how investing abroad in the 70s would have prevented a lost decade.
If diversification is your only free lunch as an investor then avoiding to succumb to home country bias should be an absolute no brainer of an upgrade.
This is low hanging fruit my friends.
I'll gladly accept this "easy upgrade" by going from US centric equities to a globally diversified portfolio featuring both significant EAFE and Emerging market exposure.

2) Minimum Volatility Equities Upgrade To The All-Weather Portfolio
Can we further optimize our equity sleeve of our Ray Dalio inspired all-weather portfolio?
I believe so.
Let's explore factor optimization.
Given our mandate of creating an enhanced Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio, we're specifically looking for ways to drive performance while smoothing out the ride.
What can help make the equity investing journey a little less bumpy?
Factors.
Specifically, defensive factors.
Yield.
Quality.
Minimum Volatility.
Amongst the three mentioned above, the most defensive of them all is minimum volatility.

From the time period of 1999 to 2020, Global market cap weighted equities had a standard deviation of 16, Yield scored 15, Quality hovered around 14 and World Minimum Volatility was a defensive stalwart coming in at 11.
Given our mandate of making the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio an enhanced version of itself, we'll take the 5 standard deviation points of risk improvement and say thank you very much.
Thus, at this point, we've now moved away from "home country bias" US only equities to global and we've upgraded from market-cap weighted to minimum volatility to bolster our defence.
Yummy.
So far.

3) Expand The Canvas Of The All-Weather Portfolio
Now that we've optimized our equites in two different ways, it's time to turn our attention to the rest of the portfolio.
What does an artist need to paint a beautiful picture?
A canvas.
Our canvas has been confined to 100%.
Let's change that right now.
We'll expand it to 200%.
But with the explicit caveat of not adding more of what we've already got in the portfolio.
No scooping extra mashed potatoes on top of the previous pile.
Instead we're going to use this extra space to add additional diversifying elements to the portfolio.
But before we do this let's examine why it's even a potentially good idea (or not) to add leverage to the Ray Dalio All Weather portfolio.
For that we'll need to jump over to the Battle of the Leverage Portfolios (Picture Perfect Portfolio Challenge) to see how the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio performed at each level:

Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio in the Battle of the 2X Leverage Portfolios
3X Leverage portfolio performance for the Ray Dalio All Weather Folio (coming soon)
Wacky Ray Dalio All Weather in the 400% Leveraged Portfolio competition (coming soon)

Just as a heads up, the results are with GOLD taking up 100% of the COMMODITY sleeve given back-test data constraints from portfolio visualizer only going back to the mid 2000s with commodities.
Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio Performance 100%

Initial Balance: $10,000Final Balance: $520,019CAGR: 9.34%RISK: 7.94%Worst Year: -5.61%Sharpe Ratio: 0.63Sortino Ratio: 1.00
From 1978 until 2022 (March) a hypothetical $10,000 investment in the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio would have grown to $520,000.
With a CAGR of 9.34% it delivered an impressive 140 basis points outperformance over RISK at 7.94%.
Its worst year comes in at only -5.61% with a Sharpe Ratio of 0.63 and Sortino Ratio of 1.00.
Ray Dalio All-Weather Roll Period 100%

When we check out the Roll Period it is even more impressive.
The Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio had only a low of 1 year at -11.59% with all sequence of returns being positive at a 3 year, 5 year, 7 year, 10 year and 15 year periods.

2X Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio Performance 200%

Initial Balance: $10,000Final Balance: $20,069,497CAGR: 18.75%RISK: 15.88%Worst Year: -11.07%Sharpe Ratio: 0.90Sortino Ratio: 1.55
What happens when we expand the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio from 100% to 200%?
In a word....
Magic.
The 2X Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio really comes alive when a modest amount of leverage is applied.
Consider how a hypothetical backtest of $10,000 grows now to $20,069,497.
$520,000 at 1X canvas vs $20,069,497 at 2X.
Wowzers!
Moreover, the CAGR shoots up to 18.75% with a 287 basis points of outperformance versus RISK at 15.88%.
You'd think with double the leverage the Ray Dalio portfolio might fall apart a little in terms of its worst year performance.
Nope.
Just -11.07%.
Finally, it's Sharpe Ratio of 0.90 and Sortino Ratio of 1.55 are massive improvements over the 100% canvas level as well.
This is a portfolio that is Taylor-made for leverage.
It's time to lever up buttercup.
2X Ray Dalio All-Weather Roll Period 200%

4) Adding Uncorrelated Assets To The All Weather Portfolio
So we've decided to expand the canvas of the Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio but what is it that we're going to add if we're not just doubling up its already existing asset classes?
Well, if we're beating the drum of diversification is your only free lunch we're going to run a marathon with that.
But the Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio is already a diversification masterpiece, is it not?
Yes.
In many ways it is.
But we've still got various asset classes and multi-strategy enhancement opportunities.
Off the table is the following:

Global Minimum Volatility Equities
Long-Term Treasury
Intermediate Treasury
Gold
Commodities

So what could we add?
Long-short equities.
TIPs.
Managed Futures.
Merger Arbitrage.
These all come to mind.
Let's explore them individually.

5) TIPs Strategy To The All-Weather Portfolio
Let's first explore adding to the fixed income/bond sleeve of the Ray Dalio All Weather portfolio.
Since we've already got long-term and intermediate treasury securities we'll turn our attention towards something that is more prepared to safeguard our portfolio from inflation.
Enter the room TIPs.
In a nutshell, TIPs are treasury inflation protected securities, issued by the US government, that are designed to shield investors from declines in purchasing power by being indexed to inflation.

What jumps out to me immediately from an annual performance standpoint, when I compare TIPS with Intermediate Term Treasury and Long Term Treasury, are the years 2008 & 2009 and 2021 & 2022.
You'll notice uncorrelated performance in 2008 when TIPS were less defensive and much stronger recovery in 2009.
In more recent times, when inflation has been persistent and pesky, TIPS have done their job by being above water in 2021 and more relatively defensive in 2022.

While Long Term Treasury and Intermediate Treasury have a correlation of 0.86 adding TIPS to the mix provides an immediately clear diversification benefit.
TIPS correlation with Long Term Treasury is 0.63 and with Intermediate Term Treasury is 0.72.
This in my opinion is a considerable diversification upgrade in the fixed income sleeve of the portfolio.

6) Trend-Following To The All-Weather Portfolio
One of the most most glaring omissions from the Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio is a total lack of managed futures exposure.
I wrote a detailed post about the benefits of trend-following and why it is not a more popular investing strategy.
Basically, being able to go both long/short commodities, currencies, equities and bonds from a broad range of global markets adds massive diversification to the portfolio given it is an uncorrelated strategy to both stocks and bonds.
Consider 2022 for example.
When both equities and bond markets from across the globe (have by and large) been down for the year, trend-following strategies have been thriving.
Why?
Because they adapt like a chameleon to whatever is going on in the markets in terms of short-term, medium-term and long-term signals.
When equity markets are down they say "yes" to that by shorting exposure.
When bonds are down they also say "yes" to that by shorting exposure.
One other clear benefit is that this strategy isn't nearly as volatile as Gold and Commodities allocations.
You don't have the at times annual -20% to -40% years of volatile drawdowns.
When I examine annualized data from SG Trend index I'm noticing a worst year of only -8.11% in 2018.
SG Trend Index Returns

What I'm most impressed with is the performance of this strategy during the early 2000s and 2008 in particular.
When equities are struggling (such as in 2022) trend-following provides significant fortification to the portfolio in terms of historical backtests.
Hence, adding a managed futures trend-following strategy to our enhanced Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio is quite honestly a no-brainer.

7) Market Neutral Investing Strategy To The All Weather Portfolio
A market neutral investing strategy is the most conservative of all the long-short equity strategies.
Its NET exposure is often far less than its long-short brother and active extensions sister.
It seeks to select stocks it thinks will relatively outperform while shorting those that it feels are either relatively overvalued or will potentially underperform.
Managers of a market neutral strategy are seeking to profit from both increasing and decreasing prices in the marketplace.

Consider the performance of Picton Mahoney, a Canadian alternative fund provider, with its long-short market neutral mandate.
A much higher sharpe ratio than its TSX benchmark (0.81 vs 0.40) and standard deviation of 4.71% versus 17.05%.
More importantly notice the difference in terms of annual returns.
Above water in 2008 at 2.12% when equities were down -33% and again in 2015 and 2018 when equities were below water.
Adding a market-neutral strategy to the portfolio should very well improve its overall diversification.

8) Merger Arbitrage Addition To The All Weather Portfolio
Let's add a merger arbitrage strategy to the portfolio.
I just finished interviewing Julian from Accelerate about merger arbitrage as an alternative investment strategy.
Please check it out.
Briefly, merger arbitrage is an event driven hedge fund strategy that purchases stocks of merging companies attempting to take advantage of market inefficiencies before (and/or after) a merger/acquisition.
Let's once again consult with Picton Mahoney as they've been delivering results from a merger arbitrage mandate for several years.

Check out that Sharpe Ratio of 1.17!
No negative years.
A 77.45% positive months success rate.
A standard deviation = 3.75%.
We're adding more stability/defensiveness to the portfolio with this unique strategy.

9) Mystery Asset Allocation To The All-Weather Portfolio
Here is the fun part.
I'm carving out a dedicated portion of the portfolio for you to add whatever you want.
That's right.
It's entirely a choose your own adventure sleeve.
When it comes to all of the potential options to consider for this totally flexible "mystery asset allocation" sleeve here are a few options that come to mind:

Private Equity
Managed Futures (Global Systematic strategies other than trend-following)
Crypto Currency
Active Extension Equities 130/30
NFTs
Art, Wine, Collectibles
REITs
Real Assets
Private Debt
Factor Optimized Equities (Value, Momentum, Quality, Size, Yield)
Reinsurance 

Personally, I'd probably choose a few of these at 2-3% slices but that's just me.
Whatever you'd do with this 10% is entirely subjective.
I believe investing should also be "fun" and not just a boring procedure, so this 10% might seem trivial but I'm hoping it provides a creative outlet for those who are curious about certain asset classes/strategies but never pursued them before.
Have a little bit of fun.
Life is short.

10) All Weather Tail Protection Addition
Let's slap a little insurance on this portfolio for those rare black swan events.
How can we do this?
By adding tail protection.
Tail risk arises when the portfolio (typically equities) moves three standard deviations from the mean.
It's a rare event.
But let's be prepared for it.
One of the easiest ways we can add insurance to the portfolio is by purchasing put options at various strike prices that trigger if/when a severe equity drawdown takes place.
Think 2008 levels.
We've got other elements in our portfolio that will be conspiring to keep our portfolio above water in this type of scenario but adding tail risk protection is just another way we can "diversify our diversifiers" as some folks in this industry love to say.

#### Enhanced Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio
Now that we've made 10 different adjustments to potentially improve the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio what do we have as the final asset allocation?

New Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio
30% Global Minimum Minimum Volatility Equities40% Long Term Treasury Bonds15% Intermediate Term Treasury Bonds7.5% Gold7.5% Commodities40% Managed Futures (Trend-Following)20% TIPS (Treasury Inflation Protected Securities)15% Market Neutral Equities10% Merger Arbitrage Strategy10% Wildcard (Crypto, NFTs, Reinsurance, Factor Equities, ETC. Whatever you want!)5% Tail Protection Strategy
That's quite a few enhancements!
To recap briefly the only thing we tinkered with in terms of the original Ray Dalio All Weather portfolio was ultimately going global with equities and choosing minimum volatility as our factor as opposed to market-cap weighting.
The rest of the "classic configuration" stays the same with 40% Long Term Treasury, 15% Intermediate Term Treasury, 7.5% Gold and 7.5% Commodities.
For the additional 100% layer we've added 40% Managed futures, 20% TIPS, 15% Market-Neutral Equities, 10% Merger Arbitrage, 10% Whatever You Want and 5% Tail Protection.
The primary goal of the expanded canvas was to add uniquely uncorrelated (or less correlated) multi-asset class strategies as additional layers of return streams while boosting overall portfolio diversification.
I'm happy with what we've been able to accomplish here.
In fact, it is quite similar to the All Weather Picture Perfect Portfolio I've designed.
I could easily ride this portfolio off into the sunset as I believe it'll provide a beautiful intersection of returns meets risk management.
But that's just my opinion.
I'm interested in yours.
Do you think this is an improvement over the original Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio or would you have just left things the same?
Please let me know in the comment section below.
If you enjoyed this article I think you might also like "10 Ways Investors Can Improve A 60/40 Portfolio | Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio With ETFs" where we expand the canvas to add alternative sources of returns in addition to what is classically provided with equities and bonds.
12-Question FAQ — 10 Ways Investors Can Improve the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio
1) What is the classic Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio?
A rules-driven allocation aimed to work across economic regimes: 30% US stocks, 40% long-term Treasuries, 15% intermediate Treasuries, 7.5% gold, 7.5% commodities—tilting conservative vs. a 60/40 while adding inflation hedges.
2) Why try to “improve” an All Weather portfolio?
To maintain the all-regime intent while pursuing higher risk-adjusted returns and shallower drawdowns by expanding beyond long-only stocks/bonds/commodities and adding uncorrelated strategies.
3) What’s the first upgrade—global vs. US-only equities?
Swap the US-only sleeve for global equities to reduce home-country bias and capture diversification across EAFE and emerging markets without having to pick regional winners.
4) Why use Minimum Volatility (MinVol) for the equity sleeve?
MinVol historically delivers smoother rides (lower stdev) and better downside capture than market-cap weighting—aligned with All Weather’s goal of defensive resilience.
5) What does “expand the canvas” mean here?
Move from 100% to ~200% total exposure (return stacking/leverage)—not to double stocks/bonds, but to add new, uncorrelated return streams on top of the core without crowding out the base.
6) Which bond enhancement belongs first?
TIPS (Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities) complement long/intermediate Treasuries by directly indexing principal to inflation—helpful when inflation is persistent or surprise-positive.
7) Why add Managed Futures (trend-following)?
Managed futures can go long/short across commodities, rates, currencies, and equities; they’ve tended to zig when stocks/bonds zag, offering crisis alpha and regime adaptability.
8) What’s the role of Market-Neutral equity?
Market-neutral seeks stock-selection alpha with near-zero net market exposure, targeting low volatility and low correlation—an additional return stream that doesn’t rely on market beta.
9) How does Merger Arbitrage help?
Event-driven merger arb harvests deal spreads with historically low volatility and low equity beta, adding another differentiated source of return and drawdown buffer.
10) What’s the “Wildcard” sleeve for?
A ~10% sandbox to personalize the portfolio—e.g., crypto, reinsurance, real assets, private debt/equity, factor sleeves—kept small to preserve the portfolio’s core risk profile while letting investors express views.
11) Why include tail-risk protection?
Systematic put options/tail hedges can help during multi-sigma selloffs, complementing trend and diversifiers to further cap left-tail outcomes (with an expected carry cost in calm markets).
12) What does the enhanced allocation look like at a glance?
Core stays recognizable (now global MinVol equities + Treasuries + gold/commodities). The added 100% layer introduces managed futures, TIPS, market-neutral, merger arb, a wildcard sleeve, and tail hedging—all aimed at more diversification without over-relying on equities.

#### 20 Different 3 Fund Expanded Canvas Portfolios With 4+ Strategies
Sometimes it's a good idea to give yourself a creative challenge.
One of my biggest weaknesses as an investor, that I've tried my best not to spill over profusely onto this site, is that I'm inclined towards complexity.
I love keeping a messy room when it comes to my own personal portfolio.
In other words, I've got lots of funds under the hood.
Way more than the average investor.
In terms of constructive feedback, I've had investors tell me that my portfolio ideas (that tend to be somewhere between 5 to 10 funds on average) are often overly complicated.
Hence, I've given myself a fun challenge.

Can I come up with diversified model portfolios that are capital efficient using only three funds?
Here is my specific mandate:
Create a series of diversified portfolios that offer 4 or more strategies that are limited to just 3 funds.
At first, I thought I'd maybe only come up with 4 to 6.
However, I've got 20 to share with you today!
Yes, you heard that correctly.
20.
Furthermore, they all follow the guidelines and template of the Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 model portfolios:

Capital Efficiency
Maximum Diversification
Optimization

An attempt by an amateur investor to come up with serious portfolios with absolutely ridiculous names.
You'll notice they range from 140% to 200% canvas size and from ultra defensive (tactical equity exposure of 0% in defensive mode) to 100% equities plus diversifiers.
Moreover, each portfolio features a minimum of 4 strategies and a maximum of 9.
This challenge helped me to think more creatively and to tighten the reigns.
I was actually surprised that it's a cinch to put together a diversified portfolio with just 3 funds.
So without further ado, let's explore them!
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
20 Expanded Canvas Portfolios: 3 Funds / 4+ Strategies

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Perfect Pizza Portfolio
40% $RSSY - Return Stacked U.S. Equity & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $GDMN - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Gold Miners Strategy Fund
Canvas: 196%
Exposures:
40% Equities40% Carry (Futures)40% Managed Futures40% Bonds36% Gold Strategy (Gold exposure + Gold producing equities)
Strategies: 6
Objective: A capital efficient alternative to an equal slice Harry Browne Portfolio with extra diversifiers (managed futures & carry) instead of cash
Benchmark: Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio (25% VTI / 25% GLD / 25% TLT / 25% BIL)

Bounty Hunter Portfolio
40% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF40% $RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% $RSSY - Return Stacked U.S. Equity & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)
Canvas: 200%
Exposures:
100% Equities40% Bonds40% Managed Futures20% Carry (Futures)
Strategies: 4
Objective: To outperform an all equity portfolio utilizing a diverse capital efficient ensemble of 100% alternatives added to the mix
Benchmark: 100% Equities (60% SPY + 40% VT)

Tightrope Walker Portfolio
40% $UPAR - UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF40% $BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund20% $QDSIX - AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global EquitiesBonds (including TIPs)Managed FuturesGoldMarket NeutralMacroStyle PremiaArbitrageMulti-Asset
Strategies: 9
Objective: As balanced and diverse of a portfolio that one could possibly assemble where maximum diversity is priority numero uno
Benchmark: None

The Chameleon Portfolio
50% $BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund25% $RDMIX - Rational/ReSolve Adaptive Asset Allocation Fund25% $QSPIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global EquitiesManaged Futures (Trend)BondsGlobal Systematic MacroTail-RiskStyle Premia
Strategies: 6
Objective: An adaptive alternative to a global static risk parity portfolio where diversification reigns supreme
Benchmark: Global Risk Parity (50% $AGG / 30% $VT / 10% $GLD / 10% $DBC)

Coin It Portfolio
40% $GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund ETF36% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF24% $BTRN - Bitcoin Trend Strategy ET
Canvas: 168%
Exposures:
36% Equities36% Gold36% Managed Futures36% Bonds24% Bitcoin (Trend-Following)
Strategies: 5
Objective: A diversified and capital efficient balanced portfolio with a generous allocation budget and tilt towards Bitcoin
Benchmark: None

Value Vulture Portfolio
60% $AVGV - Avantis All Equity Markets Value ETF20% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
60% Global Value Equities40% Bonds20% Managed Futures20% Gold
Strategies: 4
Objective: A balanced take on a global value tilted portfolio with three additional strategies added to the mix (bonds, managed futures, gold)
Benchmark: Global 60/40 (60% VT / 40% AGG)

Pack Mule Portfolio (60/40+)
40% $RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF40% $QDSIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: 160%
Exposures:
60% Equities40% Bonds20% Managed Futures40% Alt-Other:Market NeutralMacroStyle PremiaArbitrageMulti-Asset
Strategies: 8
Objective: To pack mule a diverse set of alternatives to the backbone of a 60/40 portfolio
Benchmark: 60/40 Portfolio (VBIAX and AOR)

Even-Steven Portfolio
50% $ACWV - iShares MSCI Global Min Vol Factor ETF25% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF25% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
50% Global Min Vol Equities50% Bonds25% Managed Futures25% Gold
Strategies: 4
Objective: Equal Parts Equities (50%), Bonds (50%) and Alternatives (50%) for a balanced defensive approach.
Benchmark: 50% VT / 50% AGG

So Trendy Portfolio
50% $BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund30% $GMOM - Cambria Global Momentum ETF20% $COM - Direxion Auspice Broad Commodity Strategy ETF
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global Equities (MCW + factors)Managed FuturesBondsCommodities (long + long/flat)
Strategies: 4
Objective: A pure trend portfolio (long, long-flat and long-short strategies) with exposure to a diverse range of global asset classes
Benchmark: AOK and AOR

Quantasaurus Portfolio
40% $SPQ - Simplify US Equity PLUS QIS ETF40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund ETF
Canvas: 176%
Exposures:
58% Equities40% Bonds40% Managed Futures20% QIS Multi-Strategy18% Gold
Strategies: 5
Objective: An alternative tilted portfolio where 78% of the portfolio exposure is committed to strategies other than long-stocks and bonds
Benchmark: None

Living Large L/S Portfolio
40% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF40% $QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund20% $QSPIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
40% Equities40% Long-Short Equities40% Managed Futures20% Style Premia
Strategies: 4
Objective: A portfolio where every fund has exposure to L/S strategies across a diverse range of asset classes.
Benchmark: None

The Sloth Portfolio
35% $GDE – WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Fund35% $RSBT – Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF30% $CAOS – Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF
Canvas: 163%
Exposures:
31.5% Equities31.5% Gold35% Bonds35% Managed Futures (Trend)30% Tail Risk: OTM Put
Strategies: 5
Objective: A Dragon-inspired portfolio with a slow and steady approach to accumulation whilst defensively being prepared for all economic scenarios
Benchmark: None

Factorious Portfolio
60% $GLOF - iShares Global Equity Factor ETF20% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $RSBY - Return Stacked Bonds & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
60% Global Multi-Factor Equities40% Bonds20% Managed Futures (Trend)20% Carry (Futures)
Strategies: 4
Objective: A factor first approach to asset allocation where a multi-strategy approach is favoured over MCW equities.
Benchmark: 60% VT / 40% AGG

Creative Canvas Portfolio
60% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF20% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF20% $RSBY - Return Stacked Bonds & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)
Canvas: 200%
Exposures:
60% Equities60% Managed Futures40% Bonds20% Gold20% Carry
Strategies: 5
Objective: To expand the canvas to 200% with a balanced 60/40 portfolio plus diversifiers
Benchmark: 60/40 Portfolio ($VBIAX)

The Coward Portfolio
20% $HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced U.S. Equity Strategy ETF40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF40% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF
Canvas: 200% or 180%
Exposures:
Offensive:
40% Equities80% Bonds40% Managed Futures40% Gold
Defensive:
0% Equities80% Bonds40% Managed Futures40% Gold20% Cash
Strategies: 4 of 5
Objective: A portfolio that has the ability to retreat to 0% equity exposure (hence the nickname 'coward') during market downturn scenarios
Benchmark: 20/80 Portfolio (20% $VTI / 80% $AGG)

Double Double Eh Portfolio
60% $AOFT - Auspice One Fund Trust30% $PFAA.TO - Picton Mahoney Fortified Alpha Alternative Fund10% $QBTL.TO - AGF US Market Neutral Anti-Beta CAD-Hedged ETF
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global EquitiesManaged Futures (Trend)BondsGoldM/N EquityArbitrageSpecial Situation CreditStyle Premia
Strategies: 8
Objective: An alternative strategy for Canadians to consider who are seeking maximum diversification above all other considerations
Benchmark: Global Balanced (VBAL.TO ETF)

Ultimate Defender Portfolio
40% $ACWV - iShares MSCI Global Min Vol Factor ETF50% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF10% $CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF
Canvas: 150%
Exposures:
40% Global Min Vol Equities50% Bonds50% Managed Futures10% OTM PUT
Strategies: 4
Objective: To overall limit exposure to equities (40%) and to choose the most defensive stocks strategy (min vol) to stabilize the portfolio
Benchmark: 40/60 Portfolio (40% VT / 60% AGG)

Tactical Tornado Portfolio
40% $RSSY - Return Stacked U.S. Equity & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced U.S. Equity Strategy ETF
Canvas: 200% or 180%
Exposures:
Offensive:
80% Equities40% Managed Futures40% Bonds40% Carry (Futures)
Defensive:
40% Equities40% Managed Futures40% Bonds40% Cary (Futures)20% Cash
Strategies: 4 or 5
Objective: A portfolio that is balanced but has an offensive boost towards growth (80%) or tactically retreats to conservative (40%) equity exposure
Benchmark: None

Tortoise Portfolio
20% $USML - ETRACS 2x Leveraged MSCI US Minimum Volatility Factor TR ETN60% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund
Canvas: 180%
Exposures:
60% Bonds60% Managed Futures40% US Min Vol Equities20% M/N Anti-Beta
Strategies: 4
Objective: A portfolio that is designed for slow and steady accumulation with the potential to retreat into its shell during market turbulence
Benchmark: 40/60 Portfolio (40% $VTI / 60% $AGG)

Alt Arrow Portfolio
40% $RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% $QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund40% $QDSIX - AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
40% Global Equities40% Bonds40% Alt Other20% L/S EquitiesMarket NeutralMacroStyle PremiaArbitrageMulti-Asset
Strategies: 9
Objective: A portfolio where alternative strategies take up 60% of the resources in terms of asset allocation with only 40% to stocks/bonds.
Benchmark: None
Bonus Portfolios
Here are some bonus portfolios from other friends and acquaintances on FinTwit.
I love receiving contributions from others as it almost always opens my eyes to new possibilities.

Triforce Portfolio
Creator: @game_book_life
Backtest:
https://x.com/game_book_life/status/1773768852821684721
36.5% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF27% $NTSI - WisdomTree International Efficient Core Fund36.5% $QSPIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: 186.5%
Exposures:
60.8% Equities (60/40 US/exUS)36.5% Managed Futures16.2% Bonds73% Style Premia
Strategies: 4
Objective: An alternative to a global 60/40 portfolio that avoids home country bias (with Int-Developed equities) whilst committing significant resources to style premia and managed futures
Benchmark: Global 60/40 (60% $VT / 40% VBTLX)
3-Fund, 4+-Strategy Portfolios: Your Expanded-Canvas FAQ
1) What is a “3-fund expanded canvas” portfolio?
It’s a capital-efficient portfolio built from only three tickers that collectively deliver exposure to four or more return drivers (e.g., equities, bonds, managed futures, gold, carry, style premia). By stacking exposures inside each fund (e.g., 90/60, 100/100), you expand total “canvas” beyond 100% while keeping the lineup simple.
2) How do you measure the “canvas size” (e.g., 140%–200%)?
Canvas size approximates the portfolio’s summed gross exposures. For example, a 40% position in a 100/100 fund contributes ~40% equity + ~40% bonds. Add up all stacked sleeves across the three funds; totals above 100% indicate an expanded canvas that frees room for diversifiers without sacrificing core assets.
3) Why limit the build to only three funds?
Three funds force discipline. You capture meaningful diversification (4–9 strategies) with minimal operational complexity, fewer rebalance legs, lower trading friction, and cleaner risk oversight—yet still benefit from stacked, uncorrelated sleeves.
4) Which return drivers show up most across the 20 models?
The common quartet is global equities, bonds, managed futures (trend), and gold. Many models also layer carry, market-neutral/anti-beta, style premia, macro, long/short equity, options/tail-risk, and selective bitcoin trend exposure for asymmetric shock protection or convexity.
5) How do these models balance offense and defense?
Offense comes from equities (sometimes factor-tilted) and carry/style premia; defense is delivered by managed futures, gold, market-neutral, and optional tail-risk. Several portfolios have tactical sleeves that can dial equity from full throttle to near-zero during downtrends.
6) What distinguishes “defensive” vs “offensive” 3-fund builds?
Defensive variants bias to min-vol equities, larger bond and trend sleeves, gold, and optional puts—aiming for shallow drawdowns. Offensive versions tilt toward higher equity weight, equity-plus overlays, and return-enhancing alts while still retaining diversifiers that historically shine in stress.
7) How do carry and style-premia fit in a 3-fund mix?
Carry (e.g., futures yield) and multi-premia/style strategies diversify beyond pure beta and trend. They often have low correlation to both stocks and bonds, offering smoother returns between equity cycles and complementing crisis-alpha from managed futures.
8) Can a 3-fund build rival a classic 60/40?
Yes. Several lineups recreate or surpass 60/40 risk/return by return-stacking: one fund supplies equity+bond beta, while the other two introduce trend, gold, and premia. The idea is 60/40 plus—keeping the core engine while adding uncorrelated sleeves for better Sharpe and smaller max drawdowns.
9) How should I think about rebalancing with stacked funds?
Use calendar (e.g., quarterly/semiannual) or band-based rules (e.g., ±20% of target sleeve weights). Because stacked funds move multiple sleeves at once, keep rebalancing simple and avoid over-trading; let the embedded strategies (trend/tactical) do some of the heavy lifting.
10) What risks should I monitor in expanded-canvas builds?
Watch leverage mechanics, derivative collateral, bond duration mix, concentration, tracking difference, and liquidity/spreads. Ensure each fund’s process is transparent, capacity-aware, and consistent with your risk budget—especially when total canvas approaches 180–200%.
11) How do I choose among the 20 models?
Rank by your priorities: drawdown tolerance, equity target, strategy count, and simplicity. If defense is paramount, prefer min-vol/anti-beta + trend + gold. If growth is key, favor equity-plus overlays with complementary managed futures and premia. Match exposures to your time horizon and behavior.
12) Are these meant to be copied as-is?
No—treat them as templates. The tickers illustrate how to stack exposures; your final mix should reflect personal objectives, tax location, account type, and product access. The win is learning how to get 4–9 distinct strategies from only three funds while keeping the portfolio manageable.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
Whew, thanks for making it through all 20 portfolios!
I hope I didn't overwhelm you with options galore.
Sometimes going to a behemoth supermarket can make me feel anxious as I'm overwhelmed by choices.
However, I wanted to present as many different portfolio options as possible to explore all of the interesting combinations out there.
These, at the end of the day, are just ideas.
I'm of the firm opinion that it's not a wise idea to just copy any of these portfolios; instead put your personal stamp of approval by coming up with something that makes sense for you.
With all that said, there has never been a better time IMO to be a capital efficient DIY investor.
You have so many options these days as fascinating puzzles pieces continue to penetrate the marketplace.
But at this point in the article I'm more interested in what you've got to say.
What are some three fund portfolio ideas that you've come up with?

#### 5 Reasons Why I'm Not A Bogleheads Investor And Never Will Be
At some point in your investing journey you'll likely encounter a group that is the literal antithesis of what you stand for as an investor.
For me that investing group is The Bogleheads.
They're the opposite of me in more or less every manner possible under the sun, moon and stars above.
I don't believe in market-cap weighted equity exposure as if it was pancakes drowning in maple syrup on a Sunday morning.
I'm not slavishly obsessed with fees. I'd rather have dessert than collect crumbs under the table.
I don't believe in being average.
I'm not keen to stay in my lane.
I'm not interested in commandments and rules.
I'm contrarian by nature and a sponge investor at heart.
I'm not overly predictable and willing to tow the party line - espousing talking points that have been refuted at large.

Also, I'm curious enough to have studied alternative investment strategies and equity optimization to the point where I've put in the necessary work (with regards to back-tests) to see firsthand that portfolios composed of market-cap weighted equities and aggregate bonds are not sufficiently diversified and all-weather regime prepared.
Last but not least, I'm not seeking affiliation as an investor and I'm not interested in going down a narrow tunnel where I'll be making myself prone to confirmation bias.
Also, and by the way most importantly, I'm not interested in doing what everyone else is doing in life or with my investment portfolio.
Had I done that in my life, I wouldn't have met my wife (a fellow travel media personality), wouldn't have taught English in South Korea, wouldn't have travelled the world to visit 75 different countries and wouldn't be currently working on exciting new projects (this blog) and something I'm doing in Argentina at the moment.
I'd be living on the small-island I grew up on in British Columbia. I'd be working a nine to five. I'd be not living out my personal legend during this brief time I've got on this planet.
This is a longer intro than normal but I had quite a bit to get off of my chest!
Before I inform you of the 5 reasons why I'm not a Bogleheads investor, let's first define what one is.

Why I Am Not A Boglehead
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Who Are The Bogleheads

They're a group of 90,000 registered members that honor Vanguard founder and late investor John Bogle.
John Bogle, unlike his followers today, was a contrarian and maverick in the sense he was the creator of the index fund.
Having to endure criticism and scorn, during the early days of its creation, was something John faced during indexings early years.
The index fund in many ways changed the investment landscape for the better.
Bad active management and high fees were the options being served to investors in terms of typical funds for most of the 20th century.
Indexing changed all of that. And for the better.
However, owning market-cap weighted stocks and aggregate bonds, although potentially geographically diverse (if one goes global and doesn't succumb to home country bias) is anything but strategically or stylistically diverse.
It's pure and simple market-beta.
Research has show that optimization of equities and alternative investments make portfolios more robust, resilient and regime ready for whatever economic regime is thrown its way.
Instead of recognizing that further research has advanced portfolio strategies, since the days of John Bogle's revolutionary achievements, investors that adhere to his philosophy today have portfolios that are less than optimal.

What Do The Bogleheads Believe

The Bogleheads believe in the following 11 core principles under "prepare to invest" plus "create a portfolio" and "maintain discipline".
1) Live below your means2) Develop a workable plan3) Never bear too much or too little risk4) Invest early and often 5) Diversify6) Invest with simplicity7) Use index funds when possible8) Minimize costs9) Minimize taxes10) Never try to time the market11) Stay the course

I agree with most of these.
In fact, it is only points 5, 6, 7 and 8 where I don't see eye to eye.
Let's now explore the reasons I'm not a member of the Bogleheads, never have been a member of the Bogleheads and never will be a member of the Bogleheads.

Top 5 Reasons I'm Not A Bogleheads Investor

1) Simplicity vs Complexity
One click and done. All in one. Simple indexing.
Stocks. Bonds.
This all sounds great until a scenario such as the 70s, early 2000s, 2008 and 2022 rears its ugly head.
How does a simple strategy of merely market-cap weighted stocks and bonds perform under those scenarios.
Terrible.
The idea of simplifying your life is a powerful and strong message.
It makes sense in a lot of ways.
But in terms of investing, it leaves you prone to significant drawdowns when stocks are getting hammered in the markets and bonds are not providing (as much or way too little) defensive coverage.
What is missing?
A 1-2-3 approach to diversification.
Let's explore that below.

2) Lack of Strategic Diversification
When I started working on my Picture Perfect Portfolio design, I did so from a bottoms up approach.
I was genuinely curious to see what would enhance returns and provide significant downside protection.
What I found was that I needed to expand the canvas from 100% to something greater.
I then started plugging in equal parts equities, bonds and alternatives and magic started to happen.
I could build a portfolio that achieved significantly higher returns while managing risk better than the industry standard 60/40.
The "secret sauce" was alternative investments and a multi-strategy and multi-asset class approach.
When I back-tested results, by just owning market-cap weighted stocks and aggregate bonds I would both underperform and have significantly more negative years.
By merely shaving down a small amount of equities and bonds and adding an alternative, such as gold, I would greatly improve the results, risk, sortino, sharpe, maximum drawdown, worst year and overall success ratio of my portfolio.
Just by doing one thing alone. Thinking outside of the box.
Being open to new ideas.
Embracing alternatives.
That is all it took to enhance returns and manage risk.
And gold is not anywhere close to being the best alternative strategy in my opinion.
It is far too volatile.
For instance, managed futures provides better risk-adjusted uncorrelated returns.
Adding TIPS in the bond category smoothed out my portfolio and made it more inflation regime ready.
By adding uncorrelated assets and adhering to an equal parts equity, bonds and alternative sleeve I obtained, what for me, is the Picture Perfect Portfolio.

3) Factor Investing and Market Cap Size Exposure
I've now written three different articles on the benefits of optimizing equity strategies using a multi-factor rules based approach, considering mid-cap investing in your portfolio and avoiding a large-cap centric portfolio unless you're interested in finishing in last place.
The benefits of having exposure to mid-cap, small-cap and micro-cap equities includes enhanced potential returns and no lost decades over the past 50 years.
With large-cap centric portfolios being prone to investor exuberance, high forward P/E concentration and narrative based investing it makes sense to hang-out in territory where the road is less travelled.
Moreover, equity factor strategies provide exposure to uncorrelated strategies that perform well and struggle under various economic regimes.
For instance minimum volatility, yield and quality strategies are more defensive than market-cap weighted equities.
Pro-cyclical strategies such as deep value investing and size exposure can perform relatively well when market-cap beta is struggling.
Consider how well value is doing this year versus broad markets?
By including numerous factor strategies in your portfolio you'll ensure that you'll always have 'something' in your portfolio that relatively thrives.
This also means you'll have strategies that underperform.
That is what diversification looks like.
Not putting all of your risk in market-beta.
Having opportunities to contribute "buy low" when strategies are underperforming while riding recent winners that are doing great.

4) Being Mediocre = Play It Safe "Own Them All"
Out of all the things that irk me about the philosophy of The Bogleheads group it is the message of being mediocre.
Be average. Own them all.
Own them all?
Why would anyone want to do that?
Think about any other endeavor you pursue in life.
Imagine yourself as the manager of a professional sports team.
Would you want to own the average players in the league?
If so, you'd be comfortable finishing in the middle of the pack, missing the playoffs and alienating your fan base over time.
It is through the process of 'selection' and 'exclusion' that you come up with something optimal.
For instance, my Picture Perfect Portfolio has been able to achieve such phenomenal backtests because of what it owns and what it doesn't own.
Minimum volatility equities, for instance, screen out the most volatile companies and seek the most stable ones.
This strategy in the past 20 years has proven to be at times 1000 basis points more defensive than "owning them all" in a market-cap weighted strategy.

5) Slavish Fee Obsession
Honestly who doesn't love a bargain? Wouldn't we all want to pay less for something?
Yes. But not if it means owning an inferior product.
Also, not if it excludes certain uncorrelated investing strategies that improve diversification and portfolio stability just because they inherently have higher costs such as trend-following.
Would I be willing to pay a few more basis points for a more sophisticated multi-factor equity strategy that has proven to outperform over long periods of time by 150 to 300 basis points?
Most definitely.
In some ways this slavish fee obsession seems akin to fighting over crumbs under the table when dessert is being served up above to other guests sitting patiently.
Nomadic Samuel traveling in Peru with a camera in hand
Final Thoughts From Nomadic Samuel
At the end of the day I'm a Sponge Investor and not a Bogleheads Investor.
Although there is plenty I respect about the Bogleheads there is equally as many things I'll never be in full agreement over.
I'm highly cognizant of what being a part of a group does in terms of influencing your openness to new ideas and research.
Thus, I'm not looking to ever be a hardcore value investor, a Bogleheads investor or part of any other type of investing group.
I'm a free-agent that is perpetually seeking to improve the performance, diversification and risk-management of my portfolio.
I wish all investors well and to be perfectly honest if you focus on your patience, time, discipline, diversification and strategy of your portfolio you'll likely achieve all of your investing goals.
However, at the end of the day I'm pursuing the picture perfect portfolio and being a part of the Bogleheads group would be detrimental to that process.
So best of luck Bogleheads but I'm off on my own investing journey.
Ciao for now.
5 Reasons Why I’m Not A Bogleheads Investor — 12-Question FAQ (Philosophy, Portfolio Design, and Trade-offs)
What is the Bogleheads philosophy in one sentence?
Keep costs low, own broad market-cap-weighted index funds, keep taxes low, stay the course, and avoid market timing or complexity.
Why do you disagree with “own the market” simplicity?
Simplicity can mask concentrated risk in market beta and a reliance on stock/bond negative correlation. It may work in benign regimes, but it’s less prepared for inflation shocks or correlation spikes.
What’s your main diversification critique of classic Boglehead portfolios?
They diversify geographically but not strategically. Adding alternatives (e.g., managed futures/trend, commodities, gold) and factor tilts can broaden return drivers and reduce reliance on one regime.
How do factor strategies improve on cap-weight?
Rules-based tilts (value, quality, momentum, min-vol, size) can disperse risk across behaviors and balance sheets, offering different payoff profiles across cycles versus a mega-cap-heavy cap-weighted index.
Isn’t paying higher fees always worse?
Fees matter, but net outcomes matter more. If a well-designed multi-factor or alternative sleeve improves risk-adjusted returns and drawdown control, a few extra basis points can be rational.
When can Boglehead simplicity actually be a good choice?
For investors prioritizing behavioral ease, ultra-low cost, minimal oversight, and long horizons, a simple allocation can be perfectly serviceable—provided they accept large equity-driven drawdowns.
What do you mean by “expand the canvas” beyond 100%?
Using capital-efficient or embedded-leverage funds judiciously lets you hold more diversifiers without sacrificing equity exposure, potentially targeting equity-like returns with smoother risk.
How do you avoid “diworsification” while adding sleeves?
Set clear objectives, test correlations and factor overlap, size positions with risk budgets, and require each sleeve to contribute a distinct role (return, ballast, crisis alpha, inflation hedge).
What role do bonds play if stocks and bonds can fall together?
Bonds still hedge growth shocks and recessions, but add inflation-aware bonds (e.g., TIPS) and trend/commodities to address inflationary or supply-shock regimes where bonds struggle.
How should a non-Boglehead portfolio be rebalanced?
Use bands (e.g., 20% relative or 2–5% absolute), calendar checks (semi-annual/annual), and drawdown playbooks (pre-planned actions at −10/−20/−30%) to keep decisions systematic, not emotional.
What are the biggest behavioral risks in either approach?
Recency bias, overconfidence, performance-chasing, and loss aversion. Simplicity helps some stick to a plan; complexity helps others prepare for regimes—both fail without discipline.
If someone wants to evolve beyond pure Boglehead, where to start?
Keep a low-cost core, then add one or two evidence-based sleeves: a multi-factor equity fund and a trend/managed-futures sleeve. Monitor correlations, costs, taxes, and your own behavior.